Boxster, Boxster S, Boxster GTS: Umschlag - U1+U4 - Aussen - FM Seite 1 Freitag, 28. März 2014 8:34 08

Umschlag_U1+U4_aussen.fm Seite 1 Freitag, 28.
März 2014 8:34 08
Boxster, Boxster S, Boxster GTS

WKD 981 06 21 15
Boxster, Boxster S, Boxster GTS
Owner’s Manual
Umschlag_U2+U3_innen.fm Seite 2 Freitag, 28. März 2014 8:34 08
WKD 981 06 21 15 03/14 Orientation guides in the Owner’s Manual Various types of safety instructions are used in
Dr. Ing. h.c. F. Porsche AG is the owner of The orientation guides in the Owner’s Manual are this Owner’s Manual.
numerous trademarks, both registered and highlighted in yellow. h DANGER Serious injury or death
unregistered, including without limitation the
Overall Table of Contents
Porsche Crest®, Porsche®, Boxster®, Carrera®, Failure to observe safety instructions in the
Cayenne®, Cayman®, Panamera®, Macan™, At the start of the Owner’s Manual you will find an “Danger” category will result in serious injury or
Speedster®, Tiptronic®, Tequipment®. overview of the overall contents of the Owner’s death.
VarioCam®, PCM™, PDK®, 911™, 4S®, RS® and Manual.
the model numbers and the distinctive shapes of Section Contents h WARNING Possible serious injury
the Porsche automobiles such as, the federally There is a summary of topics with the or death
registered 911 and Boxster automobiles in the corresponding page numbers at the beginning of Failure to observe safety instructions in the
US. The third party trademarks contained herein each main chapter. “Warning” category could result in serious injury
are the properties of their respective owners. or death.
Porsche Cars North America, Ltd. and its affiliates Index
believes the specifications to be correct at the There is a detailed, alphabetical index at the end h CAUTION Possible moderate or
time of printing. However, specifications, standard of this Owner’s Manual.
minor injury
equipment and options are subject to change Safety instructions in the Owner’s Manual Failure to observe safety instructions in the
without notice. Some options may be unavailable
For your own protection and longer service life of “Caution” category can result in moderate or
when a car is built. Some vehicles may be shown
your car, please heed all operating instructions minor injury.
with equipment that is not available in the US and
and special warnings. These special warnings
Canada. Please ask your dealer for advice
contain important messages regarding your NOTICE
concerning the current availability of options and
safety and/or the potential for damage to your
verify the optional equipment that you ordered. Possible vehicle damage
Porsche. Ignoring them could result in serious
Porsche recommends safety belt usage and Failure to observe safety instructions in the
mechanical failure, serious personal injury or
observance of traffic laws at all times. “Notice” category could result in damage to the
death.
© 2014 Dr. Ing. h.c. F. Porsche AG vehicle.
Information
Additional information, tips and instructions are
indicated by the word “Information”. Please read
this information carefully and follow the
instructions.
14_981_Boxster_21.book Seite 1 Freitag, 28. März 2014 7:43 07
Dear Owner, A separate Maintenance Booklet explains how h WARNING Alteration or misuse of
you can keep your Porsche in top driving condition
Thank you for choosing a Porsche Sports car. No vehicle
by having it serviced regularly.
other car embodies such a unique blend of Any alteration of the vehicle may negate or
A separate Warranty and Customer
legendary heritage and cutting edge innovation. interfere with those safety features built into the
Information Booklet contains detailed
For maximum safety and pleasure, we encourage information about the warranties covering your vehicle. Modifications may be carried out on your
you to read the Owner's Manual and take time to Porsche. vehicle only if approved by Porsche.
familiarize yourself with the operation of your Your Porsche is intended to be used in a safe
Porsche vehicle before you drive it. Always drive For U.S. only: manner obeying the local traffic laws and in the
within your own unique capabilities as a driver and If you believe that your vehicle has a fault which light of driving conditions faced by you, and in
ensure that anyone else driving your Porsche could cause a crash, injury or death, you should accordance with the instructions provided in this
vehicle does the same. To prevent or minimize immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Owner’s Manual.
injury, always use your safety belts and always Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to f Do not misuse your Porsche by ignoring those
lawfully operate your Porsche vehicle. notifying Porsche Cars North America, Inc. laws and driving conditions, or by ignoring the
Always keep your Owner's Manual in the car. If you (Porsche Cars N.A.). instructions in this manual.
sell your Porsche vehicle, pass the Owner's If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open f Do not alter your Porsche. Any alteration could
Manual and other operation manuals on to the new an investigation, and if it finds that a safety create dangerous conditions or defeat safety
owner. problem exists in a group of vehicles, it may order engineering features built into your car.
Should you have any questions regarding the a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA
operation or maintenance of your vehicle, please cannot become involved in individual problems NOTICE
call 1-800-PORSCHE or contact your authorized between you and your dealer, or Porsche Cars
N.A.. Risk of damage to the engine due to inadequate
Porsche dealership.
supply of oil.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety
Hotline toll-free at The fitting of racing tires (e.g. slicks) for sporting
1–888–327–4236 (TTY: 1–800–424–9153); events is not approved by Porsche. Very high
cornering speeds can be achieved with racing
go to
tires. However, the resulting transverse
http://www.safercar.gov; acceleration values would jeopardize the
or write to: adequate supply of oil to the engine. Porsche
Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Ave, SE, therefore will not accept any warranty or accept
Washington, DC 20590. any liability for damage occurring as a result of
You can also obtain other information about motor non-compliance with this provision.
vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov. f Do not fit racing tires (e.g. slicks) for sporting
Your car has thousands of parts and components events on your vehicle.
which have been designed and manufactured in
accordance with Porsche’s high standards of
engineering quality and safety.
1
Regularly check your vehicle for signs of Note to owners Driving on Race Circuit
damage.
Damaged or missing aerodynamic
In Canada, this manual is also available in French. (e.g. Sports Driving Schools, Club
To obtain a copy contact your dealer or write to: Sport Events)
components such as spoilers or underside
panels affect the driving behavior and Note aux proprietaires Brake fluid, brake pads and brake disks
therefore must be replaced immediately. Au Canada on peut se procurer un exemplaire de Brake fluid absorbs moisture from the air over
Your car may have all or some of the components ce Manuel en français auprès du concessionaire time. This accumulation of water lowers the
described in this manual. ou du: boiling point and can impair braking action if the
Should you have difficulty understanding any of brakes are subjected to high temperatures, such
the explanations of features or equipment installed Porsche Cars Canada, Ltd. as can occur on race circuits (sports driving
in your vehicle, contact your authorized Porsche Automobiles Porsche Canada, LTEE school, Club Sport events).
dealer. He/She will be glad to assist you. Also The brake fluid should therefore not be more than
check with your dealer on other available options 5925 Airport Road 12 months old if the vehicle is driven on race
or equipment. Suite 420 circuits (sports driving school, Club Sport events).
Throughout this booklet, left is designated as the Mississauga, Ontario f For more information, see the “ Maintenance”
driver's side of the vehicle, and right as the Canada, L4V 1W1 booklet.
passenger's side of the vehicle. Wear on the brake pads and brake disks depends
Text, illustrations and specifications in this manual Telephone number for customer assistance: to a great extent on the driving style and driving
are based on the information available at the time 1-800-PORSCHE / Option 3 conditions. Wear on the brake components is
of printing. increased as a result of high temperatures, such
as can occur on race circuits (sports driving
It has always been Porsche’s policy to
school, Club Sport events).
f Before and after driving on race circuits (e.g.
continuously improve its products. Porsche,
therefore, reserves the right to make changes in
sports driving school, Club Sport events), it is
design and specification, and to make additions or
important therefore to carry out a professional
improvements in its product without incurring any
inspection of the brake pads and brake disks
obligation to install them on products previously
for wear.
manufactured.
We wish you many miles of safe and pleasurable Racing tires
driving in your Porsche. The fitting of racing tires (e.g. slicks) for sporting
events is not approved by Porsche.
Very high cornering speeds can be achieved with
racing tires. The resulting transverse acceleration
values would jeopardise the adequate supply of oil
to the engine.
Porsche therefore refuses to accept any
guarantee or liability for damage occurring as
a result of non-compliance with this provision.
2
Setting and operating vehicle h WARNING California Ground Clearance

components when driving Proposition 65
NOTICE
h WARNING Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and
Operating components Risk of damage to the vehicle due to lower ground
certain vehicle components contain or emit
while driving clearance.
chemicals known to the State of California to
Setting or operating the multi-function display, cause cancer and birth defects or other The vehicle may touch the ground as a result of
radio, navigation system, telephone or other reproductive harm. reduced ground clearance.
equipment when driving could distract you from In addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and f Drive carefully and slowly on steep slopes
the traffic. You could lose control of the vehicle certain products of component wear contain or (e. g. parking lots, curbs, uneven roads, lifting
resulting in serious personal injury or death. platforms etc.).
f Operate the components while driving only if
emit chemicals known to the State of California to
cause cancer and birth defects or other f Avoid steep ramps.
the traffic situation allows you to do so safely.
f Carry out any complicated operating or setting
reproductive harm.
procedures only with the vehicle stationary.

Porsche Ceramic Composite Brake
Hot Exhaust Pipes (PCCB)
h WARNING Hot exhaust pipes f Please see the chapter “BRAKES”
Engine Exhaust on page 138.
The exhaust pipe is hot when the vehicle is running
h DANGER Engine exhaust The high-performance brake system is designed
and remains hot for some time after the vehicle is
inhalation for optimal braking effect at all speeds and
turned off.
Engine exhaust is dangerous if inhaled. f To prevent injury, make a point of noting where temperatures.
Certain speeds, braking forces and ambient
Engine exhaust fumes have many components your vehicle’s exhaust pipe is, avoid placing
conditions (such as temperature and humidity)
which you can smell. They also contain carbon your legs near the exhaust pipe, and closely
therefore might cause brake noises.
monoxide (CO), which is a colorless and odorless supervise children around the vehicle during
gas. time when the exhaust pipe could be hot. Wear on the different components and braking
Carbon monoxide can cause unconsciousness A hot exhaust pipe can cause serious burns. system, such as brake pads and brake disks,
and even death if inhaled. depends to a great extent on the individual driving
f Never start or let the engine run in an en- Portable Fuel Containers
style and the conditions of use and therefore
closed, unventilated area. cannot be expressed in actual miles on the road.
It is not recommended to sit in your car for h DANGER Portable fuel container The values communicated by Porsche are based
prolonged periods with the engine on and the leaks on normal operation adapted to traffic. Wear
car not moving. increases considerably when the vehicle is driven
Portable fuel containers may leak, whether they
on race tracks or through an aggressive driving
are full or partially empty. Fuel leaking from a
style.
f Please consult an authorized Porsche dealer
portable container carried in your vehicle could, in
case of an accident, cause a fire or explosion.
f Never carry additional fuel in portable about the current guidelines in effect before
such use of your vehicle.
containers in your vehicle.
3
Dear Porsche Owner, f Be sure the vehicle battery is well charged and In the driver’s seat…
f Check operation of the horn.
cranks the engine properly.
f
A lot has gone into the manufacture of your
f Position seat for easy reach of foot pedals and
Check all doors and lids for proper operation
Porsche sports car, including advanced
and latch them properly.
f
engineering, rigid quality control and demanding controls.To reduce the possibility of injury from
Check and if necessary replace worn or
inspections. These engineering and safety the air bag deployment, you should always sit
cracked wiper blades.
f
features will be enhanced by you… back as far from the steering wheel as is
See that all windows are clear and
practical, while still maintaining full vehicle
the safe driver… unobstructed.
f
control.
f
– who knows her/his car and all controls, Check air intake slots and area between
Adjust the inside and outside rear view mirrors.
f
– who maintains the vehicle properly, luggage compartment lid and windshield.
Buckle your safety belts.
f
– who uses driving skills wisely and always Ensure that these areas are free of snow and
Check operation of the foot and electric
drives within her/his own capabilities and the ice, so the heater and the windshield wipers
parking brake.
f
level of familiarity with the vehicle. work properly.
f
Check all warning and indicator lights with
You will find helpful hints in this manual on how to If a child will be riding in the vehicle, check
ignition on and engine not running.
f
perform most of the checks listed on the following child seat/child seat restraint system to
Start engine and check all warning displays for
ensure that restraints are properly adjusted.
f
pages. If in doubt, have these checks performed warning symbols.
f
by your authorized Porsche dealer. Check all exterior and interior lights for
Never leave an idling car unattended.
f
operation and that the lenses are clean.
f
Lock doors from inside, especially with
Before driving off… Check the headlights for proper aim, and if
children in the car to prevent inadvertent
necessary, have them adjusted.
f
Check the following items first opening of doors from inside or outside.
Check under the vehicle for leaks.
f Turn the engine off before you attempt any f Be sure all luggage is stowed securely.
Drive with doors locked.
checks or repairs on the vehicle.
f Be sure the tires are inflated correctly. Emergency equipment
Check tires for damage and tire wear. It is good practice to carry emergency equipment
f See that wheel bolts are properly tightened in your vehicle.
and not loose or missing. Some of the items you should have are: window
f Check engine oil level, add if necessary. Make scraper, snow brush, container or bag of sand or
it a habit to check the engine oil with every salt, emergency light, small shovel, first-aid kit,
refueling. etc.
f Check all fluid levels such as windshield
washer and brake fluid levels.
4
On the road… grass, brush, spilled fuel or other flammable Break in brake pads and brake disks
f Never drive after you have consumed alcohol
material.
f Make it a habit to check the engine oil with
New brake pads and disks have to be ”broken in“,
or drugs. and therefore only attain optimal friction when the
f
every refueling. car has covered several hundred miles or km.
Always have your safety belt fastened.
f Always drive defensively. Break in hints for the first The slightly reduced braking ability must be
Expect the unexpected. compensated for by pressing the brake pedal
f Use signals to indicate turns and lane changes.
2,000 miles (3,000 kilometers) harder. This also applies whenever the brake pads
f Turn on headlights at dusk or when the driving The following tips will be helpful in obtaining and brake disks are replaced.
conditions warrant it. optimum performance from your new Porsche.
f Despite the most modern, high-precision
New tires
Always keep a safe distance from the vehicle
manufacturing methods, the moving parts must New tires do not have maximum traction. They
in front of you, depending on traffic, road and
tend to be slippery.
f Break in new tires by driving at moderate
weather conditions. still wear in with each other. This wearing-in occurs
f Reduce speed at night and during inclement mainly in the first 2,000 miles (3,000 km).
speeds during the first 60 to 120 miles (100
weather. Therefore: to 200 km). Longer braking distances must be
f Preferably take longer trips.
Driving in wet weather requires caution and
anticipated.
f Avoid frequent cold starts with short-distance
reduced speeds, particularly on roads with
standing water, as the handling characteristics
driving whenever possible.
Engine oil and fuel consumption
f Avoid full throttle starts and abrupt stops.
of the vehicle may be impaired due to hydro- During the break-in period oil and fuel consump-
f Do not exceed maximum engine speed of
planing of the tires. tion may be higher than normal.
f Always observe speed limits and obey road As always, the rate of oil consumption depends on
4,200 rpm (revolutions per minute).
f Do not run a cold engine at high rpm either in
signs and traffic laws.
f
the quality and viscosity of oil, the speed at which
When tired, get well off the road, stop and take the engine is operated, the climate and road
Neutral or in gear.
f Do not let the engine labor, especially when
a rest. Turn the engine off. Do not sit in the conditions, as well as the amount of dilution and
vehicle with engine idling. oxidation of the lubricant.
driving uphill. Shift to the next lower gear in
Please see the chapter “ENGINE EXHAUST”
time (use the most favorable rpm range). f Make a habit of checking engine oil with every
f Never lug the engine in high gear at low
on page 3.
f
refueling, add if necessary.
When parked, always put the electric parking
speeds. This rule applies at all times, not just
brake on and put the PDK selector lever in
during the break-in period.
f Do not participate in motor racing events,
position P or the gearshift lever to reverse or
first gear.
sports driving schools, etc. during the first
On hills also turn the front wheels twwoward
2,000 miles (3,000 kilometers).
the curb.
f When emergency repairs become necessary, There may be a slight stiffness in the steering,
move the vehicle well off the road. Turn on the gear-shifting or other controls during the break-in
emergency flasher and use other warning period which will gradually disappear.
devices to alert other motorists. Do not park
or operate the vehicle in areas where the hot
exhaust system may come in contact with dry
5
Contents
Dear Owner ....................................................1 Seats, Mirrors and Steering Wheel ..... 29 Turn Signal/High Beam/
Driving on Race Circuit (e.g. Sports Driving Headlight Flasher Stalk/Parking Light Switch ...71
Seat Adjustment and Head Restraints .............30
Schools, Club Sport Events) ............................2 Emergency Flasher .......................................72
Seats ...........................................................30
Setting and operating vehicle Interior/Reading Lights ..................................73
Comfort Entry Function..................................32
components when driving ................................3 Brief Overview – Windshield wipers ..............74
Seat Heating.................................................33
Engine Exhaust ...............................................3 Windshield Wiper/Washer Stalk ......................75
Seat Ventilation ............................................33
Portable Fuel Containers .................................3
Safety Belts..................................................34
Ground Clearance ...........................................3 Instrument Panel and
Airbag Systems ............................................36
Porsche Ceramic Composite Brake (PCCB).......3 Multi-Function Display ....................... 77
Child Restraint Equipment ..............................40
Dear Porsche Owner .......................................4
Exterior Mirrors ............................................42 Instrument Panel USA Models.........................78
Before driving off… ........................................4
Interior Mirror ...............................................44 Instrument Panel Canada Models....................79
In the driver’s seat….......................................4
Steering Wheel Heating .................................45 Displays on the Instrument Panel ....................80
On the road… ................................................5
Steering Wheel Adjustment ............................46 Battery/Alternator .........................................81
Break in hints for the first 2,000 miles
Multi-function Steering Wheel .........................47 Check Engine (Emission Control) ....................82
(3,000 kilometers) ..........................................5
Sun Visors....................................................48 Acoustic Signals ...........................................82
Vanity Mirror.................................................48 Operating the Multi-Function Display on the
Contents ............................................. 6 Instrument Panel ...........................................83
Driver’s Cockpit ..............................................8 Air Conditioning................................. 49 Vehicle Menu ................................................87
Steering Wheel and Instrument Panel................9 Audio Menu...................................................89
Manual Air Conditioning .................................50
Center Console.............................................10 Phone Menu..................................................90
Automatically Controlled 2-zone Air
Control Panel................................................11 Map Menu ....................................................90
Conditioning .................................................53
Overhead Console ........................................12 Navigation Menu ...........................................91
Air Vents ......................................................58
Trip Menu .....................................................92
Heated Rear Window/Exterior Mirror Heating ..58
Opening and Locking ......................... 13 Tire Pressure Menu (Tire Pressure Monitoring
System, TPMS) .............................................93
Never invite car theft! ....................................14 Windows and Convertible Top............. 59 Chrono Menu (Stopwatch) ............................100
Notes on the Key and Central Locking System 15
Power Windows ............................................60 Gear Shift Assist Menu ................................102
Central Locking System ................................16
Convertible Top ............................................61 G-Forces Menu............................................103
Brief Overview – Opening and Locking from
Windstop......................................................63 ACC Menu ..................................................103
Outside ........................................................17
Emergency Operation of Convertible Top ........64 Vehicle Settings on the
Opening and Locking from Outside.................18
Multi-Function Display ..................................104
Opening and Locking from Inside ...................21
Opening and Closing Luggage
Lights, Turn Signals and Overview of Warning and
Compartment Lids ........................................22
Windshield Wipers ............................. 67 Information Messages..............................116
Malfunctions when Opening and Closing..........24 Light Switch .................................................68
Trunk Entrapment .........................................28 Instrument Lighting .......................................71
6 Contents
Personal Settings ............................ 127 Ashtray ......................................................179 Minor Repairs.................................. 219

Cigarette Lighter.........................................180
Brief Overview – Personal Settings ............128 Exercise Extreme Caution when
Sockets .....................................................180
Storing personal settings.............................129 Working on your vehicle .............................. 220
Front Luggage Compartment .......................182
Checking the Coolant Level and
Loading Information ....................................184
Driving and Driving Safety ................ 131 Adding Coolant .......................................... 222
Brake Fluid ................................................ 223
Diagnostic Socket.......................................132 Parking ........................................... 186 Electromechanical Power Steering............... 224
Ignition Lock...............................................132
ParkAssist ..................................................187 Changing Air Cleaner .................................. 224
Starting and Stopping the Engine .................133
Reversing Camera.......................................189 Changing Particle Filters ............................. 224
Auto Start Stop Function .............................135
Swivelling Down Mirror Glass as Parking Aid..190 Tires and Wheels........................................ 224
Electric Parking Brake .................................137
Garage Door Opener HomeLink® Changing Wheels........................................ 234
Brakes .......................................................138
(Universal Remote Control)...........................190 Wheel Attachment Faces............................. 237
Cruise Control ............................................141
Wheel Bolts ............................................... 237
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)......................142
Alarm System and Theft Protection .. 195 Flat Tire..................................................... 238
Car Audio Operation/Tips ............................153
Spacers .................................................... 239
Porsche Communication Management (PCM) 155 Alarm System and
Electrical System ....................................... 241
USB/iPod® and AUX ...................................155 Passenger Compartment Monitoring.............196
Battery (12 volt) ......................................... 245
Voice Control..............................................156 Immobilizer.................................................197
External Power Supply,
Manual Transmission, Clutch........................156 Theft Protection ..........................................197
Emergency starting with jumper cables........ 247
Porsche Doppelkupplung (PDK) ....................157
Changing Car Key (Remote Control) Battery . 249
Selector-lever Positions ..............................159 Maintenance and Car Care............... 198 Replacing bulbs.......................................... 249
Reduced Driving Programme .......................164
Exercise Extreme Caution when Headlights ................................................. 250
Transmission and Chassis Control Systems ..165
Working on your vehicle...............................199 Headlight Adjustment.................................. 254
Porsche Stability Management (PSM)............166
Engine Oil ...................................................202 Towing ...................................................... 255
HOLD Function: Drive-Off Assistant, Standstill
Checking Engine Oil Level ............................202 Fire extinguisher......................................... 259
Management .............................................168
Topping up Engine Oil..................................203
ABS Brake System (Anti-Lock Brake System) 170
Washer Fluid ..............................................204 Tire Pressure and Technical Data ..... 260
Porsche Active Suspension
Wiper Blades ..............................................205
Management (PASM) ...................................171 Vehicle Identification Data ........................... 261
Emission Control System .............................205
Porsche Torque Vectoring (PTV) Functional Engine Data ............................................... 262
How Emission Control Works .......................206
Description.................................................172 Wheels, Tires ............................................. 263
Fuel Economy .............................................207
Dynamic Engine Mounting (PADM) ................172 Tire Pressure for Cold Tires (68 °F/ 20 °C) .. 264
Operating Your Porsche in other Countries....207
“Sport” and “Sport Plus” mode.....................172 Weights ..................................................... 266
Fuel ...........................................................208
Sports Exhaust System ...............................174 Filling Capacities ........................................ 267
Portable Fuel Container ...............................210
Retractable Rear Wing.................................175 Driving Performance................................... 268
Fuel Recommendations ...............................210
Dimensions................................................ 268
Fuel Evaporation Control .............................211
Storage and Luggage Compartment.. 176 Car Care Instructions ..................................211
Storage .....................................................177 Index .............................................. 269
Drinks Holder/Cupholder .............................178
Contents 7
Driver’s Cockpit
A Door opener
See page 22.
B Memory buttons, personal settings
See page 32.
C Exterior-mirror setting
See page 42.
D Light switch
See page 68.
E Overhead console
F Power windows
See page 60.
G Diagnostic socket (OBD)
H Electric parking brake
See page 137.
I Ignition lock
See page 132.
J Front and rear lid release
See page 22.
K Steering wheel adjustment
See page 46.
L Seat adjustment
See page 30.
8 Overview Illustrations
Steering Wheel and

Instrument Panel
A PDK shift buttons
See page 162.
B Turn signal lights
See page 71.
C Speedometer
See page 80.
D Tachometer
See page 80.
E Multi-function display
See page 80.
F Windshield wipers
See page 74.
G Cruise control
See page 141.
H Telephone controls, multi-function display
See page 84.
I Horn
Overview Illustrations 9
Center Console
A Air vents
See page 58.
B Emergency flasher switch
See page 72.
Central locking button
See page 16.
C Sport Chrono clock
See page 100.
D Drinks holder/cupholder
See page 178.
E Glove box
See page 177.
F Operating panel for air conditioning
See page 50.
G Porsche Communication Management (PCM)
See page 155.
H Control panel
See page 11.
I Ashtray, cigarette lighter, storage tray
See page 179.
J Storage tray
See page 178.
Control Panel
A Heated seats/seat ventilation
See page 33.
B Control panel for air conditioning
See page 50.
C Rear wing
See page 175.
D Sports exhaust system
See page 174.
E Auto Start Stop function/coasting mode
See page 135.
F “Sport” mode
See page 172.
G “Sport Plus” mode
See page 172.
H Porsche Active Suspension Management
(PASM)
See page 171.
I Porsche Stability Management (PSM)
See page 166.
J Convertible top control panel
See page 61.
Overview Illustrations 11
Overhead Console
A Button for interior/reading lights
See page 73.
B PASS AIR BAG OFF warning light
See page 39.
C Interior light
See page 73.
D Reading lights
See page 73.
E ParkAssist
See page 187.
F Garage door opener (HomeLink®)
See page 190.
G Button for interior/reading lights
See page 73.
Opening and Locking

Never invite car theft! ....................................14
Notes on the Key and Central Locking System 15
Central Locking System.................................16
Brief Overview – Opening and Locking from
Outside ........................................................17
Opening and Locking from Outside .................18
Opening and Locking from Inside....................21
Compartment Lids ........................................22
Malfunctions when Opening and Closing..........24
Trunk Entrapment .........................................28
Opening and Locking 13

Never invite car theft! h WARNING

To protect your vehicle and your possessions
Unattended vehicle
from theft, you should always proceed as
An unlocked car with the key in the ignition lock Never leave your vehicle unattended with the key follows when leaving your vehicle:
f Close windows.
invites car theft. in the ignition lock, especially if children and/or
A gong alarm is standard equipment in your pets are left unattended in the vehicle. They can f Activate the electric parking brake.
Porsche. The gong alarm will sound if you open operate power windows and other controls. If the f Remove ignition key (switch ignition off in
the driver's door while the key is still in the ignition engine is left running, they may accidentally vehicles that have Porsche Entry & Drive).
lock. It is your reminder to pull the key out of the engage the shift lever. Serious personal injury or f Remove valuables (e.g. car documents, radio
ignition lock and to lock the doors. death could result from loss of control of the control module, cell phones, house keys) from
vehicle. the car.
f Always remove the ignition key. f Lock doors.
f Always set the electric parking brake. f Lock the glove compartment.
f Lock the doors with the key or with the remote f Close storage trays.
control.
14 Opening and Locking

Notes on the Key and Central Emergency operation

Locking System f Please see the chapter “EMERGENCY
OPERATION – UNLOCKING THE IGNITION KEY/
Key CONTROL UNIT” on page 26.
You are provided with two car keys with integrated
emergency key. These keys operate all the locks Replacement keys
on your vehicle. Car keys can only be ordered through an
f Be careful with your car keys: do not part with authorized Porsche dealer. Sometimes, this may
them except under exceptional circumstances. take a long time.
f Remove and take the ignition key with you, You should therefore always keep a spare key
even if leaving the vehicle only briefly. convenient. Keep it in a safe place, but under no
Do not leave the ignition key in the vehicle. circumstances in or on the vehicle.
f Inform your insurance company of any loss or The key codes of new keys have to be “taught”
theft of car keys or if extra or replacement to the vehicle control unit by an authorized
keys have been cut. Porsche dealer. All keys belonging to the vehicle
f Third parties can still operate the mechanical must also be taught again for this purpose.
locks with a lost key. “Teach-in” can be carried out for a total of
8 vehicle keys. Panic button
Information In dangerous situations or when one's own safety
Different vehicle settings are stored on the Information is threatened, it is possible to draw attention to
respective key when the vehicle is locked, Third parties can continue to operate the the situation by triggering an alarm.
provided the vehicle is fitted with the relevant mechanical locks using the lost key.
f Please consult an authorized Porsche dealer
To trigger an alarm
f Press button.
equipment.
For information on storing vehicle settings on for blocking the lost key.
f Furthermore, it is recommended having the
The horn sounds and the emergency flasher
the key:
f Please see the chapter “COMFORT ENTRY
flashes.
mechanical locks replaced by an authorized
FUNCTION” on page 32. Porsche dealer. To stop the alarm
f Press button again or unlock the vehicle.
The horn becomes silent and the emergency
flasher goes out.

Central Locking System Your vehicle is equipped with a central locking

system. The following are unlocked or locked
USA: KR55WK50138 together:
Canada: 7812D-5WK50138 – Doors
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC – Filler flap
Rules and RSS-210 of Industry Canada. The central locking system is always activated
Operation of this device is subject to the following when the vehicle is unlocked and locked.
two conditions: On the multi-function display of the instrument
1. This device may not cause harmful panel, you can set different variants for locking
interference, and and unlocking. You can open all doors irrespective
2. this device must accept any interference of the setting made.
received including interference that may cause The vehicle cannot be locked if the driver’s door is
undesired operation. not completely closed.
Changes or modifications not expressly approved If one of the following components is not
by the party responsible for compliance could void completely closed when you try to lock the vehicle
the user's authority to operate the equipment. the door is not locked:
– vehicle doors
Emergency key – luggage compartment lid
Information
Removing emergency key The indication by the emergency flasher and by
The manufacturer is not responsible for any radio the acoustic signal will be provided after all doors
1. Push the release button to the side. or TV interference caused by unauthorized and the luggage compartment lid are closed.
2. Pull out the key. modifications to this equipment.
Inserting emergency key Such modification could void the user's authority
f Slide in the key until the release button
to operate the equipment. Information
When locking the vehicle with only the driver's
audibly engages. Any changes or modifications not expressly
door closed, the vehicle will be pre-locked. Make
approved by Porsche could void the user’s
sure that the key is not inside the vehicle when
authority to operate this equipment.
closing the open passenger's door/luggage
compartment lid.

Brief Overview – Opening and

Locking from Outside
The Porsche Entry & Drive option can be
recognized by the buttons A in the door handles.
This brief overview does not replace the
information provided under “OPENING AND
LOCKING FROM OUTSIDE”.
Warnings, in particular, are not replaced by this
brief overview.
Key Porsche Entry & Drive
What do I want to do? What do I have to do? What happens?
Unlocking Using the key:

Press the button on the key once. The emergency flasher flashes once.
The driver’s door can be opened.
Press the button on the key twice within The emergency flasher flashes once.
5 seconds. Both vehicle doors can be opened.
With Porsche Entry & Drive:

Grip the door handle fully. The driver’s door can be opened.
Locking Using the key:

Press the button on the key.
The emergency flasher flashes twice.
The doors are locked.
Press the button A on the door handle.
Lock if persons/animals Please see the chapter “SWITCHING OFF INTERIOR

are remaining in vehicle SURVEILLANCE AND INCLINATION SENSOR”
(Switch off the alarm system’s interior surveillance) on page 196.
Switching off alarm Using the key:

Press the button on the key to unlock the
vehicle. The alarm stops.
Grip the door handle fully.

Information
If you unlock the vehicle with the emergency key in
the door lock, you must switch the ignition on
(ignition lock position 1) within 10 seconds of
opening the door in order to prevent the alarm
system from being triggered. The passenger’s
door remains locked.
Information
If button A is pressed and a door or the
luggage compartment lid is not opened, the
vehicle is locked again automatically after
30 seconds.
A - Unlocking the vehicle With Porsche Entry & Drive

B - Locking the vehicle
On vehicles with Porsche Entry & Drive, you can
C - Unlocking the front luggage compartment lid
and doors unlock, lock and start the vehicle without using
D - Unlocking the rear luggage compartment lid the key.
and doors You simply have to carry the key with you, e.g. in
E - Emergency key your trouser pocket.
F - Panic button
f Do not expose the car key to a high level of
Opening and Locking from Outside electromagnetic radiation. This could
adversely affect Porsche Entry & Drive.
Depending on your vehicle equipment, you can
unlock and lock the vehicle either with the car key
or without a key by means of Porsche Entry & Information
Drive. The factory settings of the vehicle are described
With the key in this section.
In the multi-function display in the instrument
Use the buttons on the key to unlock and lock the
panel, you can change the settings and store them
vehicle.
on the respective key for vehicles with memory.
For information on modifying the opening and
locking settings:
f Please see the chapter “LOCKING SETTINGS”
on page 109.

Information
The vehicle is locked automatically after
30 seconds if none of the doors or the luggage
compartment is opened.
If the interior surveillance system and inclination
sensor have been switched off (restricted anti-
theft protection), this also remains the case after
automatic relocking.
As a result, the doors can be opened from inside
by pulling the door opener.
f Inform any persons remaining in the vehicle
that the alarm system will be triggered if the
door is opened.
When locked again, the interior surveillance
system and inclination sensor are activated once
more.
Unlocking and opening doors Unlocking with Porsche Entry & Drive
(keyless) Switching off operational readiness
Unlocking with the key
Either door can be unlocked if you position (for vehicles with Porsche Entry & Drive)
1. Press button once.
yourself on the side of the vehicle (driver’s side, Operational readiness of Porsche Entry & Drive is
The emergency flasher flashes once.
passenger’s side) that you wish to open together switched off after 96 hours for the driver’s door
The driver’s door is unlocked.
with the key. and after 36 hours for the passenger door if the
or
1. Grip the door handle fully. vehicle is not unlocked within this time.
Press button twice within 5 seconds.
The emergency flasher flashes once. 1. Pull the door handle once to activate the
The emergency flasher flashes once.
The doors are unlocked. system again.
Both vehicle doors are unlocked.
2. Pull the door handle. 2. Pull the door handle again to open the door.
2. Pull the door handle.
Side-selective door unlock function
When unlocking the vehicle, you can choose to
unlock only the driver's door or also the
passenger's door. You can unlock both doors
irrespective of the selected setting.
f Press button on the key twice within
5 seconds.
locking settings:
on page 109.

Locking doors 3. Inform any persons remaining in the vehicle

Locking with the key
door is opened.
1. Close the door.
2. Press button once.
The emergency flasher flashes twice and an Information
acoustic signal will sound twice. The vehicle cannot be locked if any of the doors
The doors cannot be opened from outside. or the luggage compartment are not completely
or closed.
If persons or animals are remaining in the A warning signal sounds in the passenger
vehicle, press button twice within 2 compartment and a warning message appears
seconds. on the multi-function display.
The emergency flasher emits one long flash. The key must be outside the vehicle when locking
The alarm system’s interior surveillance is the vehicle doors, otherwise the vehicle doors
switched off. cannot be locked.
The doors can be opened from inside by If the key is out of range, the vehicle doors and the
pulling on the door opener.
luggage compartment can no longer be opened
after the vehicle is locked.
that the alarm system will be triggered if the Locking with Porsche Entry & Drive (keyless)
door is opened. You must carry the key with you. Automatic door locking and automatic door
1. Close all doors. unlocking
2. Press the locking button A on the door handle.
Information
The emergency flasher flashes twice and an h WARNING Emergency auto lock
When locking the vehicle with only the driver's acoustic signal will sound twice. override
door closed, the vehicle will be pre-locked. Make The doors cannot be opened from outside. In an emergency situation where you need to exit
sure that the key is not inside the vehicle when or the car through an automatically locked door,
closing the open passenger's door/luggage If persons or animals are remaining in the remember the following procedure to open the
compartment lid. vehicle, press the locking button A on the door door.
handle twice within 2 seconds. f Unlock the doors by pressing the central
The emergency flasher emits one long flash. locking button or
f Pull the inner door handle to open the door.
Information
The alarm system’s interior surveillance is
The emergency flasher indicates that the vehicle switched off.
has been locked successfully only when all the The doors can be opened from inside by
doors and the luggage compartment lids are pulling on the door opener.
closed. f Inform any persons remaining in the vehicle
door is opened.

In the multi-function display of the instrument Unlocking doors

panel, you have the option of selecting diverse f Press the central locking button.
variants of automatic door locking and automatic The indicator light on the button goes out.
door unlocking. Both vehicle doors will be unlocked.
locking settings: Automatic with Auto Unlock
f Please see the chapter “LOCKING SETTINGS” The vehicle is automatically unlocked when the
on page 109. ignition key is removed.
For more information on modifying the opening
Opening and Locking from Inside and locking settings:
The factory settings of the vehicle are described f Please see the chapter “LOCKING SETTINGS”
in this section. on page 109.
In the multi-function display in the instrument
panel, you can change the settings and store them
on the respective key for vehicles with memory. Information
If the vehicle was locked using the car key or the
locking settings:
emergency key, it cannot be unlocked with the
Central locking button central locking button.
on page 109.
Locking doors
f Press the central locking button.
When the ignition is switched on, the indicator Information
light in the button lights up. In the event of an accident with airbag
Both vehicle doors will be locked (only if all deployment, the doors are unlocked automatically
doors are closed). to facilitate fast access for helpers. The
The doors can be opened from inside by emergency flasher is also activated automatically.
pulling on the door opener.
Automatic with Auto Lock
If this function is activated, the vehicle is locked
automatically when a speed of approximately
2 mph (5 km/h) is exceeded.
locking settings:
on page 109.


Compartment Lids
h DANGER Unsecured luggage
compartment lids
If the luggage compartment lids are not secured
properly, they could fly up, blocking your vision
and causing loss of control.
f Should you notice at any time while driving that
one of the lids is not secured properly, please
stop immediately in a suitable place and close
it.
Opening front luggage compartment lid

NOTICE
Risk of damage to front luggage compartment lid
A - Door opener or windshield wipers. A - Front Luggage compartment lid
B - Door storage tray B - Rear Luggage compartment lid
If the windshield wipers are pulled forward when
Opening doors you open the front luggage compartment lid, the 1. Open the driver’s door.
f Pull door opener (arrow) once. wipers or the luggage compartment lid could be 2. Pull the release lever A next to the driver‘s
damaged. seat.
Door storage tray f Make sure that the windshield wipers are not The front luggage compartment lid is now
Opening storage tray pulled out forwards when opening the luggage unlocked.
f Open the cover (arrow). compartment lid.
Keep the storage tray closed while driving for f Always switch off windshield wipers before
safety reasons. opening the luggage compartment lid
(wiper switch in position 0).
For information on windshield wipers:
f Please see the chapter “WINDSHIELD WIPER
AND HEADLIGHT WASHER SYSTEM”
on page 75.

Opening the rear luggage compartment

lid
1. Opening the driver’s door.
2. Pull the release lever B next to the driver‘s seat
The rear lid is unlocked.
3. Lift up the lid slightly and open.
Closing the rear luggage compartment lid
1. Pull down the lid and allow it to fall into the
lock. Then press down on the lock area with
the palm of your hand.
2. Check that the lid has correctly engaged in the
lock.
When the vehicle is in motion, a message will
appear on the multi-function display in the
instrument panel if the rear lid is not closed
properly.
3. Raise lid slightly and unlatch the safety catch Unlocking and opening luggage
with the red lever (arrow). compartment lids with the key
4. Open the luggage compartment lid fully.
Closing front luggage compartment lid Information
1. Lower the lid and let it fall into the lock. Push When the front luggage compartment lid and/or
the lid closed with the palm of your hand in the rear luggage compartment lid is unlocked, the
area of the lock. vehicle doors are also unlocked.
2. Check that the lid has correctly engaged in the 1. Press the or button.
lock. The lid is unlocked.
When the vehicle is in motion, a message will 2. Lift up the lid slightly and open.
appear on the multi-function display in the For the front luggage compartment lid,
instrument panel if the lid is not closed properly. additionally unlatch the safety catch with the
red lever.

Malfunctions when Opening and

Closing
Emergency operation of front luggage
compartment lid
If the vehicle battery is discharged, the front
luggage compartment lid can be opened only by
connecting an external electrical power source.
f Please see the chapter “EMERGENCY
UNLOCKING OF FRONT LUGGAGE
COMPARTMENT LID” on page 244.
Only one door is unlocked
The setting for locking and unlocking the doors
has been changed on the multi-function display in
the instrument panel.
f Please see the chapter “SETTING DOOR
UNLOCKING” on page 109.
Unlocking and opening luggage Rear luggage compartment lid
You can open both doors irrespective of the
compartment lids with The rear luggage compartment lid can be opened selected setting.
Porsche Entry & Drive (keyless) if you are in the rear area of the vehicle with the f Press button on the key twice within
Front luggage compartment lid key. 5 seconds.
The front luggage compartment lid can be opened 1. Hold your hand between the rear wing and the
if you are in the front area of the vehicle with the license plate (illustration).
key. The rear lid is unlocked via a sensor and pops
1. Hold your hand between the Porsche Crest and open.
the license plate (illustration). 2. Lift up the rear lid slightly and open.
The lid is unlocked via a sensor and pops open.
2. Raise lid slightly, unlatch the safety catch with
the red lever and open the lid.

3. Unlock and open the driver’s door with the Switching off operational readiness
emergency key. (for vehicles with Porsche Entry & Drive)
For this purpose, lift and hold the door handle. Operational readiness of Porsche Entry & Drive is
Insert the emergency key in the door lock, turn switched off after 96 hours for the driver’s door
90° anti-clockwise and remove the emergency and after 36 hours for the passenger's door,
key again. if the vehicle is not unlocked within this time.
4. Release the door handle and open the door by 1. Pull the door handle once to activate the
pulling the door handle again. system again.
5. Switch on the ignition within 10 seconds to 2. Pull the door handle again to open the door.
prevent the alarm system from triggering.
Further procedure for vehicles with
Porsche Entry & Drive: Information
If the ignition cannot be switched on or if the If the vehicle is unlocked using the button and
engine will not start, the message “Key not no door/luggage compartment lid is opened, the
found or key fault Change key position” vehicle is locked again automatically after 30
will appear on the multi-function display. seconds.
6. Turn control unit back to ignition lock
position 0.
The vehicle cannot be unlocked 7. Try to start the engine again.
Remote control of the vehicle key may If the engine will not start, the message “Key
– fail due to a fault, not found or key fault Change key
– due to a flat key battery, position” will appear again.
– not function correctly due to radio waves The message “Operating device: turn left,
(also radio contact between remote pull off, insert key“ appears after approx. 1
control and vehicle in the case of second.
Porsche Entry & Drive). 8. Turn control unit back to ignition lock
If the vehicle cannot be opened, then: position 0 and remove it from the ignition lock.
1. Place the vehicle key at the outside edge of the Switch on the ignition using the ignition key
windshield on the passenger’s side and, at (not the emergency key).
the same time, press button (illustration).
If the vehicle still cannot be opened, then:
2. Remove the emergency key from the vehicle
key.
Please see the chapter “EMERGENCY KEY”
on page 16.

Emergency operation – unlocking the 3. Use metal hook A to remove the plastic 4. Turn control unit/ignition key to ignition lock
ignition key/control unit cover B from the ignition lock. position 0 (initial position).
If the vehicle battery is discharged, the ignition key Make sure not to lose the plastic cover B. 5. Press metal hook A into opening C.
can be removed only if the emergency operation You will hear an unlocking noise.
is performed. 6. Remove the control unit/ignition key in initial
Emergency operation must also be performed in position 0.
order to remove the control unit from the ignition 7. Re-fit the plastic cover B.
lock on vehicles with Porsche Entry & Drive.
1. Grasp the fuse box cover on the driver’s side
at the finger hole and pull it off.
2. Unclip metal hook A on the inside of the fuse
box cover.

3. Lift the door handle on the driver’s door

(ILLUSTRATION).
Insert the emergency key in the door lock, turn
90° clockwise and remove the emergency key
again.
Successful locking is indicated by the
emergency flasher flashing twice.
4. Release the door handle and shut the door.
The driver's door is now locked.
5. To lock the passenger’s door using the
emergency procedure, insert the emergency
key in the door lock in the driver’s door again,
turn 90° clockwise and remove the emergency
key again.
The passenger’s door is now locked.
6.
Door lock under door handle (driver‘s side) Information Emergency key
The vehicle cannot be locked The passenger’s door cannot be locked using
Removing emergency key
This is recognizable by the fact that the the emergency procedure if the central locking
system is defective. 1. Push the release button to the side.
emergency flasher does not flash and there is no
2. Pull out the key.
locking noise.
The remote control of the key may Insert emergency key
f Push in the key until the release button
Information
– fail due to a fault,
If the central locking system is defective,
– due to a discharged key battery, engages audibly.
operating the lock cylinder in the driver’s door will
– not function correctly due to radio waves (e.g.
lock all functioning locking elements of the central
mobile phone) in the vicinity of the vehicle (also Information
locking system.
f Have the fault in the central locking system
radio contact between remote control and
Different vehicle settings are stored on the
vehicle in the case of Porsche Entry & Drive).
remedied at your nearest authorized Porsche respective key when the vehicle is locked,
Emergency locking if the central locking dealer. provided the vehicle is fitted with the relevant
system has failed equipment.
If the vehicle cannot be locked, then:
1. Remove the emergency key from the vehicle
key.
Please see the chapter “EMERGENCY KEY”
on page 27.
2. Open the driver’s door.

h DANGER Unsecured luggage

compartment lids
If the warning message in the multi-function
display lights up when the vehicle is in motion, the
lid may impact in front of the windshield and can
tear off.
f Stop the vehicle immediately when the warning
message lights up.
f Check the luggage compartment.
f Close the lid.
Information
The lid cannot be opened from the inside if the
battery is disconnected or empty.
Safety reasons require that you unscrew the
latch striker of the lid lock if you plan to put
Unlocking handle in the front luggage compartment Unlocking handle in the rear luggage compartment the vehicle out of operation for an extended
Function period.
f Please consult your authorized Porsche
Trunk Entrapment
Your vehicle is equipped with an internal trunk If the luggage compartment lid is unlocked with
unlocking the handle, the lid can be opened from dealer.
release mechanism. They will advise you about the necessary
the inside immediately.
A person trapped in the luggage compartment measures.
can release the lid from the inside using the A warning message in the multi-function display
lights up when unlocking handle is operated.
f Stop the vehicle immediately when the warning
unlocking handle.
The handle is fluorescent and glows in the dark.
message lights up.
f Check the luggage compartment.
Information f Close the lid.
f When loading the luggage compartment, make
sure that items of luggage or other objects
cannot become caught on the handle.
This could cause the luggage compartment to
open unintentionally.

Seats, Mirrors and Steering Wheel

Seat Adjustment and Head Restraints ............ 30
Seats .......................................................... 30
Comfort Entry Function ................................. 32
Seat Heating................................................ 33
Seat Ventilation ........................................... 33
Safety Belts ................................................. 34
Airbag Systems............................................ 36
Child Restraint Equipment ............................. 40
Exterior Mirrors............................................ 42
Interior Mirror............................................... 44
Steering Wheel Heating................................. 45
Steering Wheel Adjustment ........................... 46
Multi-function Steering Wheel......................... 47
Sun Visors ................................................... 48
Vanity Mirror ................................................ 48
Seats, Mirrors and Steering Wheel 29

Seat Adjustment and Head f Do not leave children in the vehicle unattended, Seats
since they may depress the setting buttons
Restraints and crush themselves or another occupant. Seat position
h DANGER Improper safety belt use An ergonomically correct sitting position is
NOTICE important for safe and fatigue-free driving. We
Safety belts only offer protection when the recommend the following procedure for adjusting
backrest is upright and the belts are properly Risk of damage to windshield, sun visor, etc. when the driver’s seat to suit individual requirements:
positioned on the body. the seat is adjusted or folded back or forward. 1. Adjust the seat height to give yourself enough
Improperly positioned safety belts or safety belts f Adjust the seat so that the seat backrest is not headroom and a good overview of the vehicle.
worn by passengers in an excessively reclined in contact with any other object. 2. Adjust the seat in fore-and-aft direction so that
position can cause serious personal injury or your leg is not fully straight and your entire foot
death in an accident. The driver and passenger seats provide
f Do not operate the car with the driver or
is on the pedal when pressing the pedals fully.
integrated head restraints in the backrests. The
3. Grip the top half of the steering wheel. Set the
passenger backrests excessively reclined. head restraints are not adjustable.
f Please see the chapter “SEAT POSITION”
backrest angle and the steering wheel position
h WARNING Failure to adjust head so that your arms are almost outstretched.
on page 30. However, your shoulders must still rest on the
and backrests
All occupants, including the driver, should not backrest.
h WARNING Seat adjustment while 4. Adjust the seat fore-and-aft setting if
operate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s seat until the
driving necessary.
headrests and backrests are placed in their
The seat may move further than desired if you proper positions so that the risk of neck injuries is
adjust it when driving. You could lose control of the
Adjusting the seat
minimized in the event of a crash.
vehicle. f Adjust the backrest's inclination such that the h WARNING Seat adjustment while
f Do not adjust seats while the vehicle is in mo- headrest is in an upright position. driving
tion.The backrest locks must be engaged at all f Driver and passengers should be seated The seat may move further than desired if you
times while the vehicle is in motion. upright and in the center of their seats. adjust it when driving. You could lose control of the
vehicle.
h CAUTION Seat adjustment f Do not adjust seats while the vehicle is in mo-
If persons or animals are in the movement range tion.The backrest locks must be engaged at all
of the seat during seat adjustment, parts of the times while the vehicle is in motion.
body could get trapped or crushed.
f Adjust the seat so that no-one is put a risk. h CAUTION Seat adjustment
f Do not activate the comfort memory button if If persons or animals are in the movement range
there is any risk of the seat crushing the of the seat during seat adjustment, there is a risk
occupant.
f Cancel automatic adjustment by pressing any
of parts of the body being squeezed or crushed.
f Adjust the seat so that no-one is put at risk.
of the seat adjustment buttons.
30 Seats, Mirrors and Steering Wheel

Sports seat/Sports seat plus Fully-electric sports seat Adaptive sports seat plus
1 Height adjustment 1 Seat angle adjustment 1 Seat angle adjustment
f Use lever 1 in a pumping movement: 2 Height adjustment 2 Height adjustment
Upwards = seat moves upwards 3 Thigh support adjustment 3 Thigh support adjustment
Downwards = seat moves downwards 4 Fore-and-aft adjustment 4 Seat cushion side bolster adjustment
2 Backrest angle 5 Backrest angle adjustment 5 Backrest side bolster adjustment
Operate switch 2 until the desired backrest 6 Lumbar support adjustment 6 Fore-and-aft adjustment
angle is reached. f Press each control in the direction indicated by 7 Backrest angle adjustment
3 Fore-and-aft adjustment the arrows until the desired setting is reached. 8 Lumbar support adjustment
f Pull up locking lever 3. f Press each control in the direction indicated by
Move seat to desired position and release the arrows until the desired setting is reached.
lever.
Ensure that the seat engages correctly.

Storing seat settings Comfort Entry Function

For information on storing and retrieving the seat (on vehicles with fully-electric or adaptive
settings:
f Please see the chapter “STORING PERSONAL
sports seat)
The Comfort Entry or Easy Entry function makes it
SETTINGS” on page 129.
easier for you to get in and out of the vehicle.
h CAUTION Easy entry function
If persons or animals are within the range of
movement of the seat, they could be trapped or
crushed when the seat moves into or out of easy
entry position.
f Switch off the Easy Entry function if a person
is behind the driver’s seat.
Prerequisite
– The function must be activated on the multi-
function display.
Seat backrest For information on switching the Easy Entry
Folding forward function on and off:
f Pull up lever in the side part of the backrest f Please see the chapter “SWITCHING
and fold the backrest forward. COMFORT ENTRY ON AND OFF” on page 110.
Folding back Leaving the vehicle
f Tilt back and engage the backrest so that it The steering wheel moves upwards:
cannot tip forward when you brake. – After removing the ignition key or, on vehicles
with Porsche Entry & Drive, after switching off
the ignition and opening the driver’s door.
The driver’s seat moves to the rear:
– After opening the driver’s door and removing
the vehicle key or, on vehicles with Porsche
Entry & Drive, after switching off the ignition
and opening the driver's door.
Entering the vehicle
Driver’s seat and steering wheel are in their
Comfort Entry positions.
The steering wheel moves downwards:
– After turning on the ignition.

The driver's seat moves to the stored position:

– After closing the driver's door and inserting the
ignition key or, in the case of vehicles with
Porsche Entry & Drive, turning on the ignition.
Information
When the key is changed, the seat may move to
its new, key-specific entry position.
Information
Manual intervention in the seat setting interrupts
the Easy Entry function.
The driving position must then be set manually.
Seat Heating Seat Ventilation

The seat heating is ready for operation when The seat ventilation is ready for operation when
the engine is running. The heating power can be the engine is running. The seat ventilation can be
adjusted to one of three settings by repeatedly adjusted to one of three settings by repeatedly
pressing the heated seat button. pressing the seat ventilation button.
Switching on Switching on
f Press heated seat button (repeatedly). f Press the seat ventilation button (repeatedly).
The number of illuminated indicator lights The number of illuminated indicator lights
shows the selected heat setting. shows the selected ventilation setting.
Switching off Switching off
f Press the heated seat button (repeatedly) f Press the seat ventilation button (repeatedly)
until all indicator lights go out. until all indicator lights go out.
Seat heating is not available when the interior Below 59 °F (15 °C), the seat ventilation cannot be
temperature is high. switched on, in order to prevent excessive
If the charging condition of the battery is critical, cooling.
the seat heating function is restricted initially and If the charging condition of the battery is critical,
then switched off. the seat ventilation function is restricted initially
and then switched off.

Safety Belts f Two occupants must never share the same Safety-belt pretensioner
belt at the same time. Safety safety-belts are tightened in an accident,
h DANGER Failure to use safety depending on the force of the collision.
belts h DANGER Using damaged safety The safety-belt pretensioners are triggered:
Safety belts cannot protect the body if they are belts – In the event of front and rear impact
not fastened. Improperly worn safety belts Damaged, heavily stressed or worn safety belts – In the event of side impact
increase the risk of injury in the event of an cannot protect the body sufficiently in the event of – If the vehicle turns over
accident. an accident.
Always make sure your and your passengers f Keep belt buckles free of any obstruction that Information
safety belt are properly fastened when seated in may prevent a secure locking.
the vehicle. f Belts that have been subjected to excessive The safety-belt pretensioner system can be
f For your and your passengers protection, use stretch forces in an accident must be triggered only once; the system must then be
safety belts at all times while the vehicle is in inspected or replaced to ensure their replaced.
motion. continued effectiveness in restraining you. Work may be carried out on the safety-belt
f Use appropriate child restraint systems for all The same applies to belt tensioner systems pretensioner system only by an authorized
small children. which have been triggered. In addition, the Porsche dealer.
f Safety belts must be positioned on the body as anchor points of the belts should be checked. Smoke is released when the safety-belt
to restrain the upper body and lap from sliding f If safety belts do not work properly, see your pretensioners are triggered. This does not
forward. Improperly positioned safety belts authorized Porsche dealer immediately. indicate a fire in the vehicle.
can cause serious personal injury in case of an f If the belts show damage to webbing, bindings,
accident. buckles or retractors, they should be replaced Warning light and warning message
f The shoulder belt should always rest on your to ensure safe operation. An audio-visual warning system is
upper body. The shoulder belt should never be f Do not modify or disassemble the safety belts interconnected with the driver’s safety belt.
worn behind your back or under your arm. in your vehicle. Every time the ignition is turned on, the gong will
f For maximum effectiveness, the lap belt f The belts must be kept clean or the retractors sound for about 6 seconds to remind driver and
should be worn low across the hips. may not work properly. passenger to buckle up.
f Pregnant women should position the belt as Please see the chapter “CLEANING THE In addition, the gong will sound for approximately
low as possible across the pelvis. Make sure it SAFETY BELTS” on page 217. 90 seconds if vehicle speed exceeds 15 mph
is not pressing against the abdomen. f Never bleach or dye safety belts. (24 km/h).
f Belts should not be worn twisted. f Do not allow safety belts to retract until they The safety belt warning lights in the instrument
f Do not wear belts over rigid or breakable are completely dry after cleaning or this may panel and multi-function display will go off as soon
objects in or on your clothing, such as eye cause damage to the belt. as the driver has buckled up.
glasses, pens, keys, etc. as these may cause
injury.
f Several layers of heavy clothing may interfere
with proper positioning of belts.
f Belts must not rub against sharp objects or
damage may occur to the belt.

5. Make sure that belts are not trapped or twisted

and that they are not rubbing on sharp edges.
6. The horizontal section of the belt should
always fit snugly across the pelvis. Therefore,
after fastening the belt, always pull the
diagonal part of the belt upward.
Pregnant women should position the belt as
low as possible across the pelvis, and ensure
that it is not pressing against the abdomen.
7. Also pull on the diagonal section of the belt
now and again during the journey to ensure
that the horizontal section remains tight.
Fasten safety-belt Opening belt buckle and removing belt

1. Assume a comfortable sitting position. 1. Hold the belt tongue.
2. Adjust the seat backrest so that the belt 2. Press the red button on the belt buckle.
always rests on your upper body and runs 3. Guide the belt tongue to approx. 2.7 in. (7 cm)
across the middle of your shoulder. below the deflection bracket of the strap reel
3. Grasp the belt tongue and pull the belt in a (figure) and lock using the plastic slide
slow, continuous motion across your chest (figure). The function of the plastic slide is to
and lap. hold the belt tongue in an easily accessible
position.
Information
The belt may be blocked if the vehicle is standing
at an angle or the belt is pulled out using a jerking
movement.
The belt cannot be pulled out while accelerating
and slowing down, when cornering and when
driving uphill.
4. Insert the belt tongue into the appropriate
buckle on the inboard side of the seat until it
locks securely with an audible click.

Airbag Systems The front airbags are located under the padded f Always keep feet in the footwell while driving.
steering wheel panel on the driver’s side, in the Do not put feet on the dashboard or the seat
The vehicle is equipped with airbag and lap/
dashboard on the passenger's side, and in the area. Do not lean against the inside of the door
shoulder belt at both seating positions. The airbag
knee area for both the driver and the passenger. or outside the window while the vehicle is
is a supplemental restraint at those seating
The side airbags are installed on the side in the moving.
positions.
seat backrests.
The airbags in combination with the safety belts
The head airbags are installed in the door linings. h DANGER Safe storage of objects
make up a safety system which offers the driver
and the passenger the greatest known protection Objects and load have to be stored securely to
from injuries in case of accident. Information keep from causing injury.
Your vehicle is equipped with occupant sensing for To minimize the risk of severe injury or death in the f Do not transport heavy objects on or in front of
the passenger's seat in accordance with event of a crash, all occupants, including the the passenger seat. These could impair the
U.S. Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 208. driver, should always wear their safety belts function of the airbags, the safety belts, and
Even if your vehicle is equipped with airbags, the whether or not an airbag is also provided at their occupant sensing.
safety belts must be worn at all times, seating position. f Do not hang objects (e.g., jackets, coats, coat
because the front airbag system is only actuated hangers) over the backrest.
by frontal collisions with an impact of sufficient h DANGER Safety belts and f Objects must not protrude out of the door
severity. positioning storage compartment.
Below the deployment threshold of the airbag Airbags only can offer protection, if all occupants
f Do not add any additional coverings or stickers
system, and during types of collisions which do to the steering wheel or in the area of the
fasten their safety belts and retain a proper sitting
not cause the actuation of the system, the safety passenger airbag, side airbags, knee airbags,
position.
belts provide the primary protection to the and head airbags. Doing so may adversely
To provide optimal occupant protection, airbags
occupants when correctly worn. Therefore, all affect the functioning of the airbag system or
must inflate at very high speed. If you are not
persons within the vehicle must wear safety cause harm to the occupants if the airbag
wearing your safety belt or are too close to the
belts at all times (in many states, state law system should deploy.
airbag when it is deployed, inflating airbags can
requires the use of safety belts) to minimize the Do not use protective seat covers.
f No objects should be placed over or near the
result in serious personal injury or death.
risk of severe injury or death in the event of a f Always fasten safety belts.
crash. f Make sure there are no people, animals or airbag on the instrument panel, because any
f Please see the chapter “SAFETY BELTS” objects between the driver or passenger and
such objects could cause harm if the vehicle is
on page 34. in a crash severe enough to cause the airbag
the area into which the airbags inflate.
f Sit back as far from the dashboard or steering to inflate.
wheel as is practical, while still maintaining full
f Give your passenger all of the information in
this chapter.
vehicle control.
f Always hold the steering wheel by the outer
rim. Never rest your hands on the center of the
steering wheel where the airbag module is
located.

h DANGER
vehicle. Other accidents where the airbags are
Modification to airbag
Information designed not to deploy are those where the risk of
system
Airbag components (e.g. steering wheel, door injury from the airbag deployment could exceed
A modified airbag system cannot offer protection. any protective benefits, such as in low speed
lining, seats) may be disassembled only by an
They may not trigger or could trigger in an accidents or higher speed accidents where the
authorized Porsche dealer.
f When disposing of a used airbag unit, our
uncontrolled way. An uncontrolled triggering of the vehicle decelerates over a longer time. Since
airbag system can result in serious personal injury airbag deployment does not occur in all accidents,
safety instructions must be followed. These
or death.
f Do not modify the seat coverings, since such instructions can be obtained at any authorized this further emphasizes the need for you and your
Porsche dealer. passengers to always wear safety belts.
changes can block the seat-mounted side
Your Porsche vehicle is equipped with
airbag. Do not attach additional cushions,
Function of the airbag system electronically controlled systems that help to
protective coverings, or pillows to the seats.
Airbags are a supplemental safety system. Your ensure your vehicle operates properly. These
Do not affix things to the seats or cover them
primary protection comes from your safety belts. systems monitor the operation of various systems
with other materials. Do not cover the back of
and electronically store information that is useful
the backrest. Do not make changes to the The front airbags are triggered during a frontal
to service technicians when they need to diagnose
seats, the cushion or foam, the occupant collision of sufficient force and direction.
and repair these systems.
sensor, and to the seat base frame. In the event of a side impact of corresponding
f No changes must be made to the wiring or force, the side airbag on the impact side is Your vehicle is equipped with crash-sensing
triggered. and diagnostic devices that may record
components of the airbag system. Doing so
information at the time of a collision,
may disable the airbag system or cause The inflation process generates the amount of gas
including whether the airbag and seatbelt
inadvertent inflation. required to fill the airbags at the necessary
f Do not install any wiring for electrical pressure in fractions of a second.
pretensioners deployed and whether the
safety belt was in use.
accessory equipment in the vicinity of the Airbags help to protect the head and body, while
airbag wiring harnesses. Doing so may disable To retrieve this information, special equipment is
simultaneously damping the motion of the driver
the airbag system or cause inadvertent needed and access to the vehicle or feature that
and passenger in the impact direction in the event
inflation. stores that data is required. Some states only
of a frontal impact or side impact.
f If the warning light comes on, the airbag In order to help provide protection in severe
allow access to such information under restricted
system should be repaired immediately by circumstances, including:
collisions which can cause death and serious
your authorized Porsche dealer. – In response to a request of police or other
injury, airbags must inflate extremely rapidly. Such
f Using accessories not approved by Porsche high speed inflation has a negative but
government office; or
can cause the occupant sensing to be – with the consent of the registered owner, or if
unavoidable side effect, which is that it can and
impaired. the vehicle is leased, with the lessee, or
does cause injuries, including facial and arm
f Do not squeeze objects, such as the fire abrasions, bruising and broken bones. You can
– through a discovery process in litigation; or as
extinguisher, or first aid kit under the seat. otherwise permitted or required by law.
help minimize such injuries by always wearing your
f Only have seats removed and installed by an safety belts.
Your rights with respect to the information
authorized Porsche dealer so that occupant discussed above may vary from state to state.
There are many types of accidents in which
sensing components will not be damaged. Check your state law for further information.
airbags are not expected to deploy. These include
accidents where the airbags would provide no
benefit, such as a rear impact against your

Advanced airbag Seat adjustment for the passenger’s seat Automatic deactivation of the passenger
Your vehicle is equipped with occupant sensing for airbag
h WARNING Reclining passenger
the passenger's seat in accordance with Before transporting a child on the passenger seat:
f Please see the chapter “CHILD RESTRAINT
seatback
U.S. Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 208.
Depending on the weight, body positioning and Safety belts only offer protection when the EQUIPMENT” on page 40.
shape acting on the passenger's seat, the backrest is positioned at an upright seating angle – When an up to one-year old child is seated
and the belts are properly positioned on the body.
f Do not operate the car with the driver or
passenger’s airbag will automatically be switched in the child restraint system, the front airbag is
on and off. automatically deactivated on the passenger
passenger backrests excessively reclined. side.
Depending on the angle and force of impact, the
passenger's airbag which is switched-on will be – When an adult is seated in the passenger’s
triggered during a collision. Vehicle modifications to accommodate seat the front airbag is automatically activated.
Precondition for switching the passenger's airbag
persons with disabilities
on and off, depending on weight, body positioning Because modifications to your vehicle could
and shape: compromise your advanced airbag system,
– Ignition is switched on. please call 1-800-PORSCHE prior to having your
vehicle modified.
h WARNING Improper passenger
h DANGER Inflating airbags
seating
Improper seating can unintentionally impair To reduce risk of injury or death to a child from an
operation of occupant sensing of the passenger’s inflating airbag in an accident, Porsche strongly
airbag. recommends:
If the weight of an adult on the passenger's seat is f Please see the chapter “PASS AIR BAG OFF
not properly maintained, the passenger's airbag INDICATOR LAMP DOES NOT LIGHT UP”
on page 39.
f Before transporting a child on the passenger‘s
may be switched off.
f Select an upright seat position, and do not
support weight on the armrests or center seat:
console, or lean out of the window while Please see the chapter “CHILD RESTRAINT
driving. EQUIPMENT” on page 40.
Always keep feet positioned on the floor in the
footwell while driving. Do not put feet on the
dashboard or the seat area.

PASS AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp lights up Airbag Warning light
– The passenger airbag is switched off. Faults are indicated by a warning light on the
PASS AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp does not tachometer.
light up The airbag warning light illuminates when the
electronic monitoring of the airbag system
– The passenger airbag is active and ready for
detects a malfunction of the sensors, safety belt
operation.
system, occupant detection system, PASS AIR
h DANGER Unintentional passenger BAG OFF indicator lamp, related wiring, airbag
airbag triggering modules and control units.
Risk of serious personal injury or death due to the f In the following cases you should
passenger airbag triggering unintentionally. immediately consult an authorized
When the ignition is on and the up to one-year old Porsche dealer in order to assure the
child is seated in the child restraint system on the airbag system is functioning properly:
passenger seat the indicator lamp “PASS AIR BAG – If the warning light does not light up when the
OFF“ must be on. ignition is switched on or
– If the warning light does not go out once the
If the “PASS AIR BAG OFF” indicator lamp does not
engine is running or
light up, it could indicate a fault in the system, and
PASS AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp – If the warning light appears while driving.
the airbag could inflate in a collision, placing the
child at risk of death or severe injury from the
Information inflating airbag. Information
Depending on the weight, body positioning and In this case: If you sell your Porsche, notify the purchaser that
shape acting on the passenger's seat, it can occur f Do not install a child restraint system on the the vehicle is equipped with airbags, and refer
in the case of heavier children that the passenger passenger‘s seat. them to the chapter “Airbag systems“ in the
airbag is active or, in the case of very light adults f Have the fault remedied at your nearest Owner’s manual (safety and disposal rules).
or young persons, that the passenger airbag is authorized Porsche dealer. Further information on the airbag system can be
deactivated. found on stickers attached to the sun visors, as
The condition of the passenger airbag system is well as on all airbag components.
shown by the indicator lamp in the overhead For special recommendations on the use of child
operating console. restraints:
f Please see the chapter “CHILD RESTRAINT
EQUIPMENT” on page 40.
Information
f After switching on the ignition, the PASS AIR
BAG OFF warning light lights up for a few
seconds as a check.

Child Restraint Equipment A statement by the seat manufacturer of f Children could be endangered in a crash if their
compliance with this federal standard can be child restraints are not properly secured in
Porsche recommends that all infants and children
found on the instruction label on the restraint and vehicle.
f Do not affix objects to child restraint systems
be restrained in child restraint systems at all times
in the instruction manual provided with the
while the vehicle is in motion in accordance with
restraint. or cover them with other materials.
applicable laws.
When possible, use only child restraint systems h DANGER Child restraint in Direction of installation for child restraint
recommended by Porsche. These systems have passenger‘s seat systems.
been tested and adjusted to the interior of your The use of a child restraint system in the Group 0 and 0+: Children up to 29 lbs
Porsche and the appropriate child weight groups. passenger’s seat can result in serious personal (13 kg)
Other systems have not been tested and could injury or death to the child from an airbag Children of this weight must be transported in a
entail an increased risk of injury. deployment. restraint system which is installed on the
The use of infant or child restraints is required by To reduce risk of injury from an inflating airbag in passenger‘s seat facing rearward.
law in all 50 US states and the Canadian an accident, Porsche strongly recommends:
provinces. The child restraint system should be f Please see the chapter “PASS AIR BAG OFF Group I: Children in between 20 lbs (9 kg)
one that complies with U.S. Federal/Canadian INDICATOR LAMP DOES NOT LIGHT UP” and 40 lbs (18 kg)
Motor Vehicle Safety Standards and should be on page 39. Children of this weight are transported in child
secured by a lap belt portion of a lap-shoulder belt restraint systems facing forward.
or for child seats equipped with the LATCH system h DANGER Improper use of child Group II: Children in between 33 lbs (15 kg)
(Lower Anchorage and Tether for Children, also restraint and 55 lbs (25 kg)
known as ISOFIX) to the LATCH anchorages. f Follow all child restraint instructions and Children of this weight are transported in child
All child restraint systems are designed to be warnings in this manual. restraint systems facing forward.
secured in vehicle seats by lapbelts or the lapbelt
portion of a lap-shoulder belt. f When using an infant or child restraint system, Group III: Children in between 49 lbs (22 kg)
You can obtain child seats that are LATCH be sure to follow all manufacturer's and 80 lbs (36 kg)
instructions on installation and use. Children of this weight are transported in child
f
compatible at your authorized Porsche dealer.
f Always observe the separate installation Infants and small children should neither be restraint systems facing forward.
instructions for your child seat. held on the lap, nor should they share a safety f The passenger’s seat must be adjusted to the
belt with another occupant while the vehicle is upper rear position.
h DANGER Improper use of child in motion.
restraint f Children too big for child restraint systems
Children could be endangered in a crash if their must use regular safety belts. A shoulder belt
child restraints are not properly secured in the can be used providing it does not cross the
vehicle. face or the neck of the child.
f Make sure that all child restraints are properly f Choose a child restraint system according to
secured. the weight of the child.
f Child restraint systems that are damaged or
have been heavily stressed in an accident must
be replaced immediately.

Using child restraint systems in the f Do not install a child restraint system on the Automatic locking retractor
passenger seat passenger‘s seat.
f Have the fault remedied at your nearest
The safety belt for the passenger seat is equipped
h DANGER
with an automatic locking retractor for securing
Child restraint in authorized Porsche dealer. the child restraint system. When activated, this
passenger seat
retractor allows you to securely fasten the child
The use of a child restraint system in the Child restraint system for children older than restraint system in place so that inadvertent
passenger seat can result in serious personal one year movements will not occur.
injury or death to the child from an airbag Your vehicle is equipped with occupant sensing for Before transporting a child on the passenger seat:
deployment. the passenger's seat in accordance with f Please see the chapter “CHILD RESTRAINT
To reduce risk of injury from an inflating airbag in U.S. Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 208. EQUIPMENT” on page 40.
an accident, Porsche strongly recommends: Depending on the weight, body positioning and
f Please see the chapter “PASS AIR BAG OFF shape acting on the passenger's seat, the h DANGER Adjusting child seat
INDICATOR LAMP DOES NOT LIGHT UP” passenger's airbag will automatically be switched after fastening
on page 39. on or off. f After fastening the child restraint system, do
f Please see the chapter “CHILD RESTRAINT not adjust the seat in any direction.
Small adult passengers
f Make sure that the PASS AIR BAG OFF indicator
EQUIPMENT” on page 40. Moving the seat could adjust the safety belt
lamp does not light up. against the child restraint and cause the “PASS AIR
Child restraint system for up to one-year old
BAG OFF” indicator lamp to go off and activate the
children h CAUTION Adult use of front seats airbag system.
When an up to one-year old child is seated in
When the ignition is on and the small adult f Check the condition of the passenger airbag
the child restraint system, the front airbag is system shown by the indicator lamp in the
automatically deactivated on the passenger side. passenger is seated on the passenger seat, the
f Make sure that the “PASS AIR BAG OFF” indicator lamp “PASS AIR BAG OFF” must be off. overhead operating console.
indicator lamp lights up. If the “PASS AIR BAG OFF” indicator lamp lights up,
f Adjust the passenger’s seat as far away from it could indicate a fault in the system.
the airbag as possible. In this case:
f Have the fault remedied at your nearest
h DANGER Child seat detection authorized Porsche dealer.
fault
When the ignition is on and the up to one-year old
child is seated in the child restraint system on the
passenger seat the indicator lamp “PASS AIR BAG
OFF” must be on.
If the “PASS AIR BAG OFF” indicator lamp does not
light up, it could indicate a fault in the system, and
the airbag could inflate in a collision, placing the
child at risk of death or severe injury from the
inflating airbag.
In this case:

Releasing the safety belt Exterior Mirrors

1. Unbuckle the safety belt latch. The convex mirror on the passenger’s side and the
2. Then make certain that the belt has fully aspherical mirror on the driver’s side provide
retracted. At this point the automatic locking a larger field of view.
feature will be disengaged.
Seek appropriate advice from your authorized h WARNING Judging distance in
Porsche dealer about the possible installation convex side mirror
of a Porsche child restraint system. Vehicles or objects appear smaller in convex
mirrors and further away than they are in reality.
f Bear this distortion in mind when estimating
the distance of vehicles behind you and when
reversing into a parking space.
f Also make use of the interior mirror for judging
distance.
NOTICE
Risk of damage to the exterior mirrors when
PASS AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp
washing the vehicle in a car wash.
Activating the automatic locking retractor f Fold in exterior mirrors before using the car
1. If a child restraint system must be fastened to wash.
the passenger's seat, adjust the passenger's
seat as far away from the airbag as possible.
2. Position child seat according to the child seat’s
manufacturer instructions.
3. Pull the safety belt retractor completely out. At
this point the locking mechanism is activated.
4. Insert the safety belt tongue into the buckle
and make certain that it is properly latched.
Make no more adjustments to the seat.
5. Allow the safety belt to retract until it is tight on
the child restraint system. You may further
tighten the belt by pulling on it to allow more of
it to retract.
Make sure that excessive safety belt forces do
not occur by moving the seat with the child
seat installed.

Folding exterior mirrors in and

out electrically
f Press button D.
Both exterior mirrors fold in and out
automatically.
If the electrical adjustment facility fails
f Fold mirror in or out manually.
Folding exterior mirrors in and out
automatically
The exterior mirrors are folded in automatically
after the vehicle is locked.
Prerequisite:
– The function is activated on the multi-function
display.
Folding exterior mirrors out automatically
A - Exterior mirror selection – driver’s side 1. Press selection button A for the driver’s side f Switch on ignition.
B - Exterior mirror selection – passenger's side and selection button B for the passenger’s The exterior mirrors fold out.
C - Adjusting exterior mirrors
side.
D - Folding in exterior mirrors electrically (where
equipped) The indicator light on the pressed button Information
lights up.
Adjusting exterior mirrors The exterior mirrors do not fold out automatically
2. Move the exterior mirrors to the correct
after the ignition is switched on if they were folded
The electrical exterior mirror adjuster is ready for position by pressing the adjustment button C.
in manually using the button D.
operation:
f Adjust the mirror by pressing on the mirror
– With ignition switched on.
f Fold the mirror outwards by hand as far as
– After the ignition is switched off and before the
driver’s or passenger’s door is first opened, face.
but for a maximum of 10 minutes. it will go.
Folding in exterior mirrors manually
f Swivel the mirror housing inwards by hand as
far as it will go. Information
The exterior mirrors can not be fold in from a
Folding out exterior mirrors manually speed of approx. 30 mph (50 km/h).
f Swivel the mirror housing outwards by hand as
far as it will go.

Storing exterior mirror settings

On vehicles with memory, individual exterior mirror
settings can be stored on the person buttons on
the driver’s side and on the vehicle key.
For further information on retrieving and storing
vehicle settings:
f PLEASE SEE THE CHAPTER “STORING
PERSONAL SETTINGS” ON PAGE 129.
Exterior mirror heating
The exterior mirror heating is activated
automatically when the heated rear window is
switched on while the engine is running.
For information on switching on the heated rear
window:
f Please see the chapter “HEATED REAR
WINDOW/ EXTERIOR MIRROR HEATING”
on page 58. Automatic anti-dazzle interior mirror
If the charging condition of the battery is critical,
Interior Mirror
The interior mirror’s reflection is undistorted. Sensors on the front and rear sides of the interior
the exterior mirror heating function is restricted
When the mirror is being adjusted, the anti-dazzle mirror measure the incident light. The mirror
initially and then switched off.
lever A must point forwards. automatically changes to anti-dazzle position or
Swivelling down mirror glass as f Normal position – lever forward. reverts to its normal state, depending on the light
parking aid f Anti-dazzle position – swivel lever back. intensity.
When reverse gear is engaged, the mirror on the
passenger’s side swivels down slightly to show Information
the curb area.
f Please see the chapter “SWIVELLING DOWN
The incident light within the detection area of light
sensor C must not be restricted (e.g. by stickers
MIRROR GLASS AS PARKING AID” on the rear window).
on page 190.
Switching off automatic anti-dazzle function
f Press button B.
The indicator light A goes out.

Information
The anti-dazzle function switches off
automatically if:
– Reverse gear is engaged or
– Interior lighting is switched on.
Switching on automatic anti-dazzle function

f Press button B.
The indicator light A lights up.
h CAUTION Electrolyte fluid may

escape if the mirror
glass is broken
Electrolyte fluid may escape from broken mirror
glass. This fluid irritates the skin and eyes.
f If the electrolyte fluid should come into contact
with the skin or eyes, rinse it off immediately Steering Wheel Heating
with clean water.
The steering wheel heating can be switched on
Seek medical attention if necessary.
and off using the button on the rear of the steering
wheel when the ignition is switched on.
NOTICE
Switching steering wheel heating on/off
f Press button.
Risk of damage to paintwork, leather, plastic
parts and clothing.
Electrolyte fluid can be removed only while it is The message “Steering wheel heating
still wet. switched on” or “Steering wheel heating
f Clean the affected parts with water. switched off” appears on the multi-function
display for 2 seconds.
Automatic anti-dazzle exterior mirror
The exterior mirrors change to anti-dazzle position
automatically in synchronization with the interior
mirror.

Steering Wheel Adjustment

The steering wheel can be adjusted manually or
electrically in four directions depending on the
vehicle equipment.
h WARNING Steering wheel
adjustment while driving
The steering wheel may move further than desired
if you attempt to adjust it when driving.
You may lose control of the vehicle.
f Do not adjust the steering wheel when driving.
h CAUTION Memory steering wheel

movement
If persons or animals are in the movement range
of the steering wheel during adjustment or if the
person buttons are pressed unintentionally when
Manual steering wheel adjustment Electric steering wheel adjustment
the vehicle is at a standstill, parts of the body
could get trapped or crushed. Adjusting steering wheel manually Adjusting steering wheel electrically
f Do not leave children in the vehicle unattended. 1. Insert the ignition key fully into the ignition lock. f Move the control switch under the steering
2. Push locking lever downwards. column in the relevant direction until the
3. Adjust steering wheel to suit the chosen desired setting is reached.
backrest angle and your seat position by The steering wheel setting is stored in the vehicle
moving the steering wheel up or down and settings.
longitudinally. For further information on storing and retrieving
4. Swivel locking lever back until you feel it the steering wheel setting:
engage. f PLEASE SEE THE CHAPTER “STORING
If necessary, move the steering wheel slightly PERSONAL SETTINGS” ON PAGE 129.
in a longitudinal direction.

Multi-function Steering Wheel Function buttons on the multi-function

Setting and operating steering wheel
h WARNING
when driving
You may be distracted from paying attention to Information
the road if you set or operate the multi-function The rotary buttons at the top left and right of the
display, radio, navigation system, telephone or steering wheel can also be pressed.
other equipment when driving. You may lose
control of the vehicle. Turn volume control
f Operate the equipment when driving only if the Upwards – increase volume.
traffic situation allows you to do so safely. Downwards – decrease volume.
f Carry out any complicated operating or setting Press volume control
procedures only whilst the vehicle is stationary. Switch volume/mute on and off.
Depending on the equipment in your vehicle, you Turn rotary knob

can use the function keys of the multi-function Select/highlight the main menu or menu
steering wheel to operate the following Porsche item in the multi-function display. To do
communication systems: this, turn the rotary knob upwards or
– Telephone downwards.
Readiness of the multi-functional steering
– PCM Press rotary knob
wheel for operation
– CDR-31 Go to submenu or activate selected
– With ignition switched on.
f Please observe the operating instructions
– Multi-function display in the instrument panel function.
supplied for the Porsche communication Press diamond button
systems before operating the function Call up the stored function.
buttons. The button can be assigned the desired
function in the multi-function display on the
Information instrument panel.
The Porsche communication systems cannot Press Back button
be switched on and off using the multi-function Return to the menu.
steering wheel.
Press Handset Pickup button
Accept a telephone call.
Press Handset Hangup button

End or refuse a telephone call.

Sun Visors Vanity Mirror

f Swivel the sun visor down to prevent dazzle The vanity mirror on the rear of the sun visor is
from the front. closed with a cover.
The vanity mirror illumination is switched on
automatically when the cover is opened.
h CAUTION Cover of vanity mirror
open
The mirror glass may break in the event of an
accident and may enter the passenger
compartment if the cover is open.
f Keep the cover closed when driving.
NOTICE
Risk of damage to the vanity mirror cover.

f Do not force the cover beyond its end position.

Air Conditioning
Manual Air Conditioning................................. 50
Automatically Controlled 2-zone Air
Conditioning................................................. 53
Air Vents...................................................... 58
Heated Rear Window/Exterior Mirror Heating.. 58
Air Conditioning 49
Information on air-conditioning
compressor
The air-conditioning compressor
– Can switch off briefly to ensure sufficient
engine cooling if the engine is operating under
extreme load.
– Automatically switches off at temperatures
below approx. 36 °F (2 °C) and cannot be
switched on, even manually.
– Operates most effectively with the windows
closed.
If the vehicle has been in the sun for a long
time, it is a good idea to ventilate the interior
briefly with the windows open.
– Depending on the outside temperature and
humidity, condensation can drip from the
evaporator and form a pool under the vehicle.
This is normal and not a sign of leakage. A/C mode
Manual Air Conditioning
The air quantity, air distribution and temperature Information on automatic load switch-off At outside temperatures above approx.
can be set manually on the manual air-conditioning If the charging condition of the battery is critical, 36 °F (2 °C), the air-conditioning compressor can
system in order to influence the interior climate. the following air-conditioning or heating functions be switched on or off manually.
are restricted initially and then switched off: The air-conditioning compressor is switched off
– Seat heating automatically at outside temperatures below
– Seat ventilation approx. 36 °F (2 °C).
– Heated rear window/Exterior mirror heating Switching A/C mode on
– Fresh-air blower If you wish to cool the passenger compartment to
– Air-conditioning compressor a temperature lower than the outside
temperature, A/C mode must be activated.
f Press button A/C OFF.
The indicator light on the button goes out.
The air-conditioning compressor is switched
on.
The cooling function is activated.
50 Air Conditioning
Switching A/C mode off

A/C mode can be switched off manually to save
fuel, for example.
The indicator light on the button lights up.
The air-conditioning compressor is switched
off.
The cooling function is deactivated.
A/C MAX mode Defrosting windshield

In A/C MAX mode, the passenger compartment is Activating defrosting function
cooled at maximum power. f Press button .
Switching A/C MAX mode on The indicator light on the button lights up.
f Press button A/C MAX. The air flows to the windshield and the side
The indicator light on the button lights up. windows.
The windshield is demisted or defrosted as
Switching A/C MAX mode off quickly as possible.
f Press button A/C MAX.
Deactivating defrosting function
f Press button
.
Air Conditioning 51
Setting air quantity

The selected air quantity is shown in a bar display
next to the symbol. The more bars that are
displayed, the more air flows into the passenger
compartment.
Increasing air quantity
f Press button upwards.
Reducing air quantity
f Press button downwards.
If the air quantity was reduced so much that
OFF appears on the air-conditioning display,
the outside-air supply is interrupted and
the air-conditioning compressor is switched off.
h WARNING
Impaired vision with air
quantity OFF
A - Set temperature
The windows can mist up if the air quantity setting
Air-recirculation mode is OFF.
f Press button
B - Set air quantity
Switching on air-recirculation mode upwards (increase air
f Press button . Setting temperature quantity).
The indicator light on the button lights up. The selected temperature is shown on the display
The outside-air supply is interrupted and only by a bar display.
the inside air is recirculated. Increasing temperature
Switching air-recirculation mode off f Press button TEMP upwards.
f Press button . If all bars can be seen, the temperature is set
The indicator light on the button goes out. to maximum heat (hot).
Reducing temperature
Information f Press button TEMP downwards.
If the air-conditioning compressor is switched off If no bars can be seen, the temperature is set
manually or automatically, air-recirculation mode to maximum coldness (cold).
ends automatically after approx. 3 minutes.
52 Air Conditioning
Setting air distribution manually Automatically Controlled 2-zone

f Press button . Air Conditioning
The air flows to the windshield and the side
The temperature can be set individually for the
windows.
f Press button .
driver’s and passenger’s side.
In automatic mode the air conditioning system
The air flows from the central and side vents.
exercises full control over the air temperature, air
The air vents must be open.
f Press button distribution, and air quantity. A number of factors
.
(such as ambient air temperature, amount of
The air flows to the footwell.
sunlight, etc...) are used by the system to
determine the optimum settings for the current
Cancelling manual air distribution situation.
Press the relevant air distribution button again. Automatic mode is deactivated as soon as the
The indicator light on the button goes out. settings are adjusted manually. In this case,
automatic climate control still regulates the
air-conditioning functions that have not been
modified manually.
Air Conditioning 53
Information on air-conditioning
compressor
The air-conditioning compressor
– Can switch off briefly to ensure sufficient
engine cooling if the engine is operating under
extreme load.
– Switches off automatically at temperatures
below approx. 36 °F (2 °C) and cannot be
switched on, even manually.
– Operates most effectively with the windows
closed.
If the vehicle has been in the sun for a long
time, it is a good idea to ventilate the interior
briefly with the windows open.
– Depending on the outside temperature and
humidity, condensation can drip from the
evaporator and form a pool under the vehicle.
Interior temperature sensor This is normal and not a sign of leakage. A/C mode
Sensors Information on automatic load switch-off In automatic mode, A/C mode is activated by
To avoid impairing the function of the air If the charging condition of the battery is critical, default.
conditioning system, the interior temperature the following air-conditioning or heating functions The power for the air conditioning compressor is
sensor for the air-conditioning system must not are restricted initially and then switched off: fully controlled by the air conditioning system
be covered or taped over. – Seat heating depending on the current operating requirements.
– Seat ventilation The air-conditioning compressor is switched off
– Heated rear window/Exterior mirror heating automatically at outside temperatures of less
Information than approx. 36 °F (2 °C).
– Fresh-air blower
Additional air conditioning settings can be made
– Air-conditioning compressor Switching A/C mode on
on the multi-function display on the instrument
panel: If you wish to cool the passenger compartment
f Please see the chapter “SETTING AIR to a temperature lower than the outside
temperature, A/C mode must be activated.
CONDITIONING” on page 110.
All air-conditioning system settings are stored on
the respective vehicle key when the vehicle is
The air-conditioning compressor is
locked, on vehicles with memory.
switched on.
or
Press button AUTO/SYNC.
The cooling function is activated.
54 Air Conditioning
Switching A/C mode off

A/C mode can be switched off manually to save
fuel, for example.
The air-conditioning compressor is
switched off.
The cooling function is deactivated.
SYNC mode
In SYNC mode, the temperatures on the driver’s
and passenger’s side are synchronized and are
regulated via button TEMP on the driver’s side.
Switching on SYNC mode
f Press button AUTO/SYNC and hold until
SYNC appears on the display.
f Regulate the temperature on the driver’s and
passenger’s side via button TEMP on the A/C MAX mode Defrosting windshield
driver’s side. In A/C MAX mode, the passenger compartment Activating defrosting function
Switching off SYNC mode is cooled at maximum power. f Press button .
f Press button AUTO/SYNC or button TEMP The interior temperature is not regulated The indicator light on the button lights up.
on the passenger’s side. automatically. The air flows to the windshield and the front
If the vehicle has been in the sun for a long side windows.
time, it is a good idea to ventilate the interior The windshield is demisted or defrosted as
briefly with the windows open. quickly as possible.
Switching A/C MAX mode on Deactivating defrosting function
f Press button A/C MAX. f Press button .
The indicator light on the button lights up. The indicator light on the button goes out.
or
Switching A/C MAX mode off
f Press button A/C MAX.
or
Air Conditioning 55
Setting automatic air-recirculation mode

In automatic air-recirculation mode, the fresh air
supply is adjusted depending on the air quality.
Automatic air-recirculation mode can be switched
on and off on the multi-function display.
Air-recirculation mode is deactivated automatically
to prevent the windows from misting at outside
temperatures of less than approx. 41 °F (5 °C).
For information on adjusting automatic
air-recirculation mode on the multi-function
display:
f Please see the chapter “SETTING AIR
Information
The recommended operating mode is automatic
Air-recirculation mode air-recirculation mode (default setting). A - Set temperature left/right
B - Set air quantity
Switching on air-recirculation mode
f Press button . Setting temperature
The indicator light on the button lights up. For personal comfort, the interior temperature
The outside-air supply is interrupted and only can be adjusted individually for the driver’s and
the inside air is recirculated. passenger’s side between 61 °F (16 °C) and
85 °F (29.5 °C). Recommendation: 72 °F (22 °C).
Switching air-recirculation mode off
f Press button
The selected temperature is shown on the display.
.
The indicator light on the button goes out. Increasing temperature
f Press button TEMP upwards.
The preset temperature value is shown on
Information
the air-conditioning display.
If the air-conditioning compressor is switched off
manually or automatically, recirculated air mode
ends after approx. 3 minutes. Information
Pressing button AUTO/SYNC selects the preset
temperature.
56 Air Conditioning
Information
The air-conditioning system always cools and
heats the passenger compartment to the preset
temperature at maximum cooling or heating
temperature.
Setting the temperature temporarily to a lower or
higher value does not cool or heat the passenger
compartment to the desired temperature more
quickly.
Set air quantity

The selected air quantity is shown in a bar display
above the button . The more bars that are
displayed, the more air flows into the passenger
compartment.
Increasing air quantity
f Press button
Setting air distribution manually Extended ventilation panel
f Press button
upwards.
. With the automatically controlled 2-zone
Reducing air quantity The air flows to the windshield and the side airconditioning system, the extended ventilation
f Press button downwards. windows. panel on top of the dashboard can be activated or
Pressing button AUTO/SYNC switches back to f Press button . deactivated separately in the multi-function display
automatic mode. The air flows from the central and side vents. on the instrument panel.
If the air quantity was reduced so much that OFF The air vents must be open.
f Press button
The air flow in the passenger compartment is less
appears on the air-conditioning display, the . direct.
outside-air supply is interrupted and the air- The air flows to the footwell. The automatic control of the air-conditioning
conditioning compressor is switched off. The indicator light on the button lights up. system adjusts the air flow quantity automatically.
h WARNING
Air shut-off impairing Cancelling manual air distribution
f Press the relevant air distribution button again.
vision
The windows can mist up if the air quantity setting The indicator light on the button goes out.
is OFF.
f Only select air quantity setting OFF for short
or
periods.
f Press button
Air quantity and distribution are controlled
upwards (increase air automatically and variations are compensated.
quantity).
Air Conditioning 57
Air-conditioning settings on the

multi-function display
With the automatically controlled 2-zone
airconditioning system, additional settings relating
to vehicle air conditioning can be adjusted in the
multi-function display on the instrument panel.
For information on air-conditioning settings on
the multi-function display:
f PLEASE SEE THE CHAPTER “SETTING AIR
Air flow
Three air flow settings are available in automatic
mode:
– “Soft”:
Recommended for passengers sensitive to
draughts with a preference for gentle air
conditioning.
– “Normal”: Air Vents Heated Rear Window/
Default setting. Air vents are located on the dashboard that can be Exterior Mirror Heating
– “Strong”: opened and closed manually. The direction of the Heated rear window/exterior mirror heating is
Stronger ventilation in the passenger air flow can also be adjusted. ready for operation when the engine is running.
compartment. Opening vents Switching on
f Turn the thumb wheel on the air vent upwards.
The air flow is clearly noticeable.
f Press button .
Auto air-recirculation mode The indicator light on the button lights up.
f Auto air-recirculation mode can be switched
Closing vents
on and off.
f Turn the thumb wheel on the air vent Depending on the outside temperature,
downwards. the heating switches off automatically after
approx. 5 to 20 minutes.
f The heating can be switched back on by
Information pressing the button again.
f For optimal air conditioning, we recommend
Switching off
f Press button
keeping the center air vents closed during the
cold season and to only open them as required .
for the purpose of warming the hands. The indicator light on the button goes out.
If the charging condition of the battery is critical,
Changing air flow direction the heated rear window/exterior mirror heating
f Swivel vent vanes in the desired direction. function is restricted initially and then switched off.
58 Air Conditioning
Windows and Convertible Top

Power Windows............................................ 60
Convertible Top............................................ 61
Windstop ..................................................... 63
Emergency Operation of Convertible Top ....... 64
Windows and Convertible Top 59

Power Windows
Information
h WARNING
Opening and closing the
windows The switches have a two-stage function. Both
detent positions can be felt clearly when you
When opening or closing the windows, particularly
actuate the switch.
in one-touch mode, parts of the body may get
trapped between the moving window and fixed – First setting – manual operation
vehicle parts. If the relevant switch is moved to the first
f Take care to ensure that nobody can be injured position, the window is opened or closed
when the windows open or close. manually.
f Always remove the ignition key when leaving The window stops when the switch is released.
the vehicle or switch off the ignition on vehicles – Second setting – one-touch operation
with Porsche Entry & Drive. Always take the If the relevant switch is moved fully to the
ignition key with you when leaving the vehicle. second position, the window is opened or
Uninformed persons could injure themselves closed automatically.
by operating the power windows. Actuate the switch again to stop the window at
f In case of danger, immediately release the button the desired position.
on the ignition key or the button in the door
handle on vehicles with Porsche Entry & Drive. A - Power window, driver’s side
f Do not leave children in the vehicle unattended.
B - Power window, passenger’s side Information
Opening/closing windows If a door window is blocked during closing, it will
stop and open again by several inches/
Readiness for operation of power windows Opening window with the switch centimeters.
The power windows are ready for operation: f Press the relevant switch until the window If the window is blocked a second time within
– With ignition switched on. has reached the desired position. approx. 10 seconds, one-touch operation is
– After the ignition is switched off and before the disabled for this window.
driver’s or passenger's door is first opened, Closing window with the switch
but for a maximum of 10 minutes. f Pull the relevant switch until the window has The window can be closed manually. The window
reached the desired position. then closes with its full closing force.
One-touch operation for closing the door
windows is available only when the ignition is One-touch operation is enabled again once the
switched on. window has been closed completely using the
manual closing function.
60 Windows and Convertible Top

h WARNING
Closing the windows Convertible Top Door windows
f Please see the chapter “CAR CARE
manually The door windows are automatically opened and
If one-touch operation is disabled after the window INSTRUCTIONS” on page 186. automatically closed again during opening and
is blocked, the window will close with its full closing of the convertible top if convertible top
closing force when the manual closing function is NOTICE operation is continued after it has reached its final
used. position.
f Ensure that nobody can be injured, pinched or
There is a risk of damage to the convertible top
and convertible-top drive. Conditions for operating the
f Do not operate convertible top:
crushed when the windows close.
convertible top
– At temperatures below 32 °F (0 °C). With the switch
Storing end position of the windows after – When one side of the vehicle is on a curb,
connecting the vehicle battery – The ignition must be switched on
a lifting platform or a jack. (engine running or switched off).
The end positions of the windows are lost when – When items of luggage or other objects hinder
the battery is disconnected and reconnected. – Maximum speed up to approx. 30 mph
the movement of the convertible top.
f Ensure that no objects are located behind the
One-touch operation of the windows is disabled. (50 km/h).
Opening/closing of the convertible top will
Perform these steps for all windows: roll-over bars.
f Avoid frequent operation of the convertible top
be interrupted if the maximum speed is
1. Close window completely once by pulling the
exceeded.
rocker switch. with the engine off; the vehicle battery will
2. When the window is completely closed, briefly rapidly discharge. Opening convertible top
pull the rocker switch again three times. f When opening or closing the convertible top, h WARNING
Opening the
3. Open the window completely once by pressing ensure that there is sufficient clearance above convertible top
the rocker switch. it (e.g. in the garage).
f To prevent damp stains and abrasion damage,
When opening the convertible top, parts of the
body can become trapped between the
retract the convertible top only when it is in a convertible top mechanism and fixed vehicle
dry, clean state.
f Park the vehicle in the shade if possible,
parts.
f When opening the convertible top, make sure
since continuous exposure to the sun that no one is at risk of injury from the
weathers textiles, rubber and colors.
f The convertible top may only be operated
convertible top mechanism.
f In order to interrupt convertible-top operation
when driving on a level surface. in the event of danger, immediately release the
switch.
f Please see the chapter “OVERVIEW OF
WARNING AND INFORMATION MESSAGES”
on page 114.

Closing convertible top

h WARNING
Closing convertible top
When closing the convertible top, parts of the

body can become trapped between the
convertible-top mechanism and fixed vehicle
parts.
f When closing the convertible top, make sure
that no one is at risk of injury from the
convertible-top mechanism.
f In order to interrupt convertible-top operation
in the event of danger, immediately release the
switch.
f Keep the lids of the vanity mirrors in the sun
visors closed when closing the convertible top.
Opening convertible top with the switch on page 114. Closing convertible top with the switch
f Pull and hold the switch until the convertible f Pull and hold the switch until the convertible
top has reached its end position or until the top has reached its final position or until the
door windows are in their desired position. windows are in their desired position.
The message on the multi-function display The message on the multi-function display
goes out. goes out.
In case of danger, release the switch. In case of danger, release the switch.
Convertible top operation stops. Convertible top operation stops.

Messages on multi-function display Windstop

f Make sure that all windstop parts are properly
Convertible top status
and securely fastened, particularly when
driving with the convertible top open.
on page 114. Information
Remove the center part of the windstop to ensure
good ventilation in the interior compartment and
near the rear window when the convertible top is
closed. This applies in particular when the weather
is wet and cold.
Installing outer windstop parts

1. Insert windstop part from the rear at the
bottom into the roll-over bar (illustration).
2. Bend the windstop part slightly (illustration)
and engage at the top in the roll-over bar.
f Make sure that the windstop parts engage
completely in the roll-over bar.
Removing outer windstop parts
f Push windstop part at the top to the front out
of the roll-over bars and remove.

Emergency Operation of
Convertible Top
h WARNING
Moving convertible top
parts during emergency
operation
f Always carry out emergency operation with the
greatest care.
f During emergency operation, do not operate
the convertible top using the switch.
NOTICE
There is a risk of damage to the convertible top

and convertible-top drive.
f During and after emergency operation, do not
operate the convertible top using the switch.
f Drive slowly to an authorized Porsche dealer.
Installing center windstop Accessing the convertible top drive
f Insert windstop from above into mounting A Before emergency operation 1. Move the driver’s and passenger’s seat
(illustration) and then push successively Before carrying out emergency operation, please forward and fold the backrests forwards.
downwards until the windstop engages audibly check:
into place at the clip points B. 1. Was the ignition switched on during operation h CAUTION
Sharp edges
Removing middle windstop of the convertible top via the switch?

Sharp edges on the belt reel trim may cause
f Press one of the clip points B and pull the
2. Are the fuses defective?
f Please see the chapter “CHANGING FUSES” grazes or cuts to the skin.
windstop upwards out of the mounting A.
on page 217.
f Exercise caution when touching these trims.
3. Remove the ignition key so that the convertible
top is not activated unintentionally. 2. Insert your hand between the gap in the
carpet (illustration) and carefully pull out the
carpeting from below along the belt reel trim
and fold over.

Releasing convertible top drive Closing the convertible top 4. Carefully lever the plastic cover of the
1. Take open-ended spanner from the tool kit. f Enter the vehicle. convertible-top lock out of the clip points
2. Using the open-ended spanner (13 A/F), 1. Lift the convertible top with one hand on the (illustration) using the open-ended spanner
turn the emergency release screw A approx. right or left-hand side. and remove.
3 times through 360° clockwise until the guide 2. Grasp the convertible top at the center with the
pin B is in position C. other hand.
3. Repeat the procedure on the opposite side. 3. Pull the convertible top upwards out of the
storage compartment, until it is approximately
half closed.

5. Remove the key F for emergency operation of 7. Using your hand, grasp the convertible top at 8. To fully close the convertible top, turn the key
convertible top from the tool box. the convertible top motor (illustration) and F clockwise until the latching hook fully
f Please see the chapter “TOOLS” on page 160. pull it to the windshield frame. engages in the catch and the convertible top is
6. Insert the key F into the convertible top lock Risk of injury due to completely closed (noticeable resistance when
h CAUTION
and turn counter-clockwise until the latching crushing during closing turning).
hook is fully extended (noticeable resistance 9. Drive slowly to an authorized Porsche dealer
If body parts are located within the range of
when turning). and have the fault corrected.
movement of the convertible top or in the area of
the convertible top lock during closing, there is a
risk of pinching or crushing.
f Make sure that:
– no persons are within the range of movement
of the convertible top during closing.
– hands are not pinched or crushed by parts of
the convertible top lock.

Lights, Turn Signals and Windshield Wipers

Light Switch..................................................68
Instrument Lighting .......................................71
Turn Signal/High Beam/
Headlight Flasher Stalk/Parking Light Switch ...71
Emergency Flasher .......................................72
Interior/Reading Lights ..................................73
Brief Overview – Windshield wipers ..............74
Windshield Wiper/Washer Stalk ......................75
Lights, Turn Signals and Windshield Wipers 67

Daytime driving lights

Information If the light switch is set to position (light off),
If the ignition key is removed and the door is the daytime driving lights come on automatically
opened while the lights are on, an audible signal when the ignition is switched on.
(gong) warns of possible battery discharge. If the light switch is set to position , the
– In some countries, differences are possible daytime driving lights come on automatically in
due to legal requirements. bright conditions and when the ignition is switched
The vehicle’s exterior lights can mist up due to on.
temperature and humidity. This misting will dry off The daytime driving lights are not active when the
after a sufficient distance has been driven. light switch is set to position (low beam/
driving light).
Low beam/driving light
Automatic driving light assistant
If the light switch is set to the position ,
The automatic driving light assistant is a comfort
the low beam is switched on automatically in the
function. The driving light (low beam) is switched
following situations:
on and off automatically depending on the ambient
– Dusk
brightness.
– Darkness
– Driving through tunnels The automatic driving light assistant also controls
Light Switch the daytime driving lights, low beam, Automatic
– Rain
Light is switched off Coming Home lights and the equipment-
– Highway driving (on vehicles with
Daytime driving lights are switched on Porsche Dynamic Light System PDLS) dependent dynamic cornering light.
when the ignition is switched on. When the low beam is switched on, the indicator The automatic driving light assistant is activated
Automatic driving light assistant light on the speedometer lights up. when the light switch is set to the position .
Side lights Despite possible support by the driving light
assistant, it is the responsibility of the driver to
License plate light, instrument lighting, Information switch on the driving light using the conventional
daytime driving lights switched off. Fog is not automatically recognized. light switch in accordance with the relevant
Low beam/driving light f In the event of fog, the driving light must be national regulations.
Only with ignition on. switched on manually. Activating the headlights using the driving light
Fog light function and highway light are assistant therefore does not absolve the driver
switched off. of responsibility for correct operation of the
Rear fog light driving light.
Pull the switch in the low beam position.
Indicator light lights up.
68 Lights, Turn Signals and Windshield Wipers

h WARNING
Driving without lights Automatic Coming Home lights Porsche Dynamic Light System (PDLS)
(Welcome Home function/Entry function) The dynamic cornering light as well as the highway
If you drive without lights, this may significantly
Switching on Automatic Coming Home lights function in darkness are activated when the light
restrict your visibility and also the ability of other
road users to see your vehicle. f Set light switch to . switch is set to the position .
f Always carefully monitor the automatic driving The following lights remain switched on for Dynamic cornering light
light control. a certain period to allow you to get in and out of Above a speed of approx. 5 mph (8 km/h), the low
your vehicle safely and with improved visibility in beam light is swiveled in the direction of the curve
darkness: to illuminate the road more clearly, depending on
Information – Daytime driving lights, the speed of the vehicle and the extent to which
In the event of a fault in the automatic driving light – Courtesy lights in the folded out exterior the steering wheel is turned.
assistant/Porsche Dynamic Light System (PDLS), mirrors (on vehicles with electrically foldable In the event of a fault in the dynamic cornering
the PDLS warning light in the instrument panel mirrors), light, the PDLS warning light in the instrument
flashes. – Rear side marker lights, panel flashes.
For information on indicator lights and warning – License plate lights.
Highway function in darkness
lights on the instrument panel: Welcome Home function (off delay)
f Please see the chapter “INSTRUMENT PANEL When the vehicle is locked, the lights remain
The distribution characteristics of the driving light
change when driving in darkness at vehicle
USA MODELS” on page 78.
switched on for the duration of the off delay preset speeds above approx. 80 mph (130 km/h).
on the multi-function display. The light beam becomes longer and the field of
WARNING AND INFORMATION MESSAGES” For information on adjusting the off delay of the vision increases.
on page 116. external lights on the multi-function display:
f Please see the chapter “ADJUSTING EXTERIOR Fog lights
Rain function LIGHTS” on page 108. The distribution characteristics of the driving light
The driving light is switched on automatically after change when the rear fog light is switched on at
Entry function/Exit function
five seconds of continuous wiper operation. vehicle speeds below approx. 43 mph (70 km/h).
If the wipers have not been used for approx. When the vehicle is unlocked, the area around The light beam becomes wider and reduces glare.
4 minutes, the driving light is switched off. the vehicle is illuminated for the duration of the
off delay preset on the multi-function display.
The lights are switched off when the ignition is
switched on or the light switch is set to a position
other than .
For information on adjusting the off delay of the
external lights on the multi-function display:
f PLEASE SEE THE CHAPTER “ADJUSTING
EXTERIOR LIGHTS” on page 108.

– High Beam Assistant on is selected on the high Lack of attention

beam stalk. h WARNING
Please see the chapter “ACTIVATING AND The driver remains responsible while driving,
DEACTIVATING HIGH BEAM ASSISTANT” e.g. manually operating the high beam according
on page 108. to light, visibility and traffic conditions, regardless
As an anti-glare precaution for built up areas, High of High Beam Assistant. The system is no
Beam Assistant is not available at speeds below substitute for careful attention on the part of the
20 mph (30 km/h). driver.
The lights also switch from high to low beam Manual intervention may be required in the
automatically as soon as a built up area is following situations:
detected. – In unfavorable weather conditions, e.g. rain,
For information on warning messages on the snow, ice, heavy spray.
multi-function display: – On roads where oncoming traffic is partly
f Please see the chapter “OVERVIEW OF obscured, e.g. highways.
WARNING AND INFORMATION MESSAGES” – Where there are road users with poor lights,
on page 116. e.g. cyclists.
– On tight bends, or on sharp humps or dips.
Porsche Dynamic Light System Plus – In poorly lit built up areas.
Information
f To help make sure that nothing interferes with
(PDLS Plus) – Where there are strong reflections, e.g. signs.
– Where the windshield in the camera area is
High Beam Assistant camera operation: misted, dirty, icy or covered with stickers.
When High Beam Assistant is switched on, a Do not block the camera area A with objects f Drive with extreme care.
camera A detects the light sources of oncoming (e.g. stickers). f Always pay attention to the traffic situation and
vehicles and vehicles in front, and automatically f The camera A must always be kept free of dirt, the area around the vehicle.
selects between low beam and high beam. ice and snow to ensure that it is fully functional. f Change to using the high beam manually
The function activates in darkness if the following For car care instructions: according to light, visibility and traffic
conditions are present: Please see the chapter “MAINTENANCE AND conditions.
– Light switch position is selected. CAR CARE” on page 198.
– Vehicle speed is more than approx. 37 mph
(60 km/h).
– High Beam Assistant is activated on the
multi-function display in the instrument panel.
Please see the chapter “ACTIVATING AND
DEACTIVATING HIGH BEAM ASSISTANT”
on page 108.

High-beam headlight
Switching on and off
(on vehicles WITHOUT High Beam Assistant)
f Switching on: Push the stalk once to the front
pressure point 3.
The indicator light lights up on the
tachometer.
f Switching off: Push the stalk once to the rear
pressure point 4.
Activating/deactivating High Beam Assistant
The following conditions must be met before High
Beam Assistant is activated:
– Darkness
– Light switch position is selected.
– Vehicle speed is more than approx. 37 mph
(60 km/h).
– High Beam Assistant is activated on the multi-
Instrument Lighting Turn Signal/High Beam/Headlight function display in the instrument panel.
The lighting is automatically adjusted to the Flasher Stalk/Parking Light Switch Please see the chapter “ACTIVATING AND
ambient brightness via light sensors. Turn signals, low beam and high beam are ready DEACTIVATING HIGH BEAM ASSISTANT”
In addition, when the vehicle lighting is switched for operation when the ignition is on. on page 108.
on, the instrument and switch brightness can be 1 – Turn signal light, left f Activating: Push the stalk once to the front
adjusted manually. 2 – Turn signal light, right
f Turn adjustment button A in the appropriate
pressure point 3.
3 – High beam, High Beam Assistant The indicator light in the speedometer
direction and hold until the desired brightness 4 – Headlight flasher lights up. The vehicle automatically selects
has been reached. Stalk in center position – low beam between low beam and high beam.
h WARNING
Adjusting the brightness If the high beam is switched on, the indicator
Operating the turn signal light
f Push the stalk once to the lower or upper
while driving light on the tachometer lights up.
Adjusting the brightness while driving may cause f Deactivating: Push the stalk once to the rear
pressure point 1 or 2. pressure point 4.
you to lose control of the vehicle.
f Do not reach through the steering-wheel
The turn signal lights flash three times. The High Beam Assistant can only be
spokes whilst driving. deactivated if the indicator light on the
tachometer is lit.

Switching on and off h DANGER Emergency stopping

(on vehicles WITH High Beam Assistant)
If the High Beam Assistant was deactivated or if Other vehicles could collide with your vehicle if you
are parked in a dangerous position.
f Whenever stalled or stopped for emergency
the requirements are not met, high beam can be
switched on and off manually.
repairs, move the car well off the road. Switch
The following conditions must be met:
on the emergency flasher and mark the car
– Darkness
with road flares or other warning devices.
f Do not remain in the car. Someone
– The light switch position is selected.
f Switching on: Push the stalk twice to the front
approaching from the rear may not realize your
pressure point 3.
vehicle is stopped and cause a collision.
The indicator light on the tachometer
lights up.
f Switching off: Push the stalk once to the rear h WARNING Hot exhaust system and
pressure point 4. tailpipe
Exhaust fumes and the exhaust system are very
Operating the headlight flasher hot when the engine is running. The exhaust
f Push the stalk once to the rear pressure system (including the tailpipe) remains hot for
point 4. some time after the vehicle is turned off.
f Do not park or operate the vehicle in areas
The indicator light on the tachometer Emergency Flasher
lights up briefly. The emergency flasher can be switched on where the hot exhaust system may come in
For information on High Beam Assistant: regardless of the position of the ignition lock. contact with dry grass, brush, fuel spill or
f Please see the chapter “HIGH BEAM Switching on and off other flammable material.
f Press the emergency flasher button on the
ASSISTANT” on page 70.
h WARNING Engine heat danger
Parking light dashboard.
All turn signal lights and the indicator light in the when working
The parking light can only be switched on when
the ignition is switched off. button flash when the button is operated. The engine and surrounding components become
f Move the stalk up 2 or down 1 to switch on the very hot when the engine is running.
f Before working on any part in the engine
If the emergency flasher remains active for longer
right or left parking light. periods, the illumination phase of the flashing
If the parking light is switched on, the message interval is shortened to preserve the lights. compartment, turn the engine off and let it cool
“Parking light on” will appear on the multi- down sufficiently.
function display in the instrument panel after the
ignition is switched off.
For information on warning messages on the multi-
function display:
on page 116.

Switching automatic interior/ The off delay for the interior/reading lights when
reading lights on and off both doors are closed can be set on the
multifunction display:
f Please see the chapter “SETTING INTERIOR
Depending on equipment, the interior/reading
lights can be switched on and off using button B
or in the multi-function display menu. LIGHTING OFF DELAY” on page 109.
Using button “B“: Switching off of interior/reading lights to

f Press button B. protect the battery
When automatic interior/reading lights are In darkness, the interior lighting is switched off
switched off, the indicator light in the button 16 minutes after the engine stops to preserve
lights up. the vehicle battery.
When the automatic interior lighting is switched In daylight conditions, interior lights that were
on in darkness, the interior lighting is switched on manually are switched off
– switched on: when a door is unlocked or automatically after 1 minute.
opened, or when the ignition key is removed Orientation lighting
from the ignition lock. Lights in the overhead operating console and at
– switched off: when both doors have been the ignition lock help vehicle occupants to locate
A - Button for interior/reading lights closed, after a delay of approx. 120 seconds. important controls in the vehicle in darkness and
B - Switching automatic interior/reading lights on/off The off delay time can be preset on the multi- ensure better overall orientation. The lights are
function display. switched on when the vehicle is unlocked and
Interior/Reading Lights The interior lighting goes out as soon as the switched off again automatically when the vehicle
ignition is switched on or the vehicle is locked.
f Please see the chapter “SETTING INTERIOR
Interior/reading lights is locked.
Switching interior/reading lights on and off LIGHTING OFF DELAY” on page 109. Dimming (brightness adjustment)
f Press button A. The brightness of the orientation lighting is
In the multi-function display menu:
Dimming (brightness adjustment) adjusted on the multi-function display.
f Press button A for at least 1 second and hold
On the multi-function display, you can set whether f Please see the chapter “ADJUSTING
the interior/reading lights should be switched on BRIGHTNESS OF ORIENTATION LIGHTING”
until the desired level of brightness is or remain switched off when a door is unlocked or on page 108.
achieved. opened or when the ignition key is removed from
the ignition lock: Ambient lighting
f Please see the chapter “ACTIVATING OR If the vehicle is driven at night, a discreet light
DEACTIVATING INTERIOR LIGHTS WHEN THE provides subtle illumination for the passenger
DOOR IS OPENED (DEPENDING ON compartment. The ambient lighting is switched off
EQUIPMENT)” on page 108. automatically when the vehicle is locked.

Brief Overview – Windshield wipers

information provided under “WINDSHIELD WIPER/
WASHER STALK”.
Warnings, in particular, are not replaced by
this brief overview.
Windshield wiper stalk Switch for rain sensor sensitivity (A)
What do I want to do? What do I have to do?
Wipe automatically Press the stalk to detent position 1.

(rain sensor operation)
Adjusting the rain sensor Adjust switch A on the right of the stalk upwards (wipe more often) or downwards (wipe less often).
operation sensitivity
Wipe Slow: Press the stalk to detent position 2.

Fast: Press the stalk to detent position 3.
Once: Briefly move stalk to position 4 (holding stalk in position 4 accelerates wiping action).
Spray and wipe Pull stalk towards the steering wheel at position 5 and hold.

Windshield Wiper/Washer Stalk 4 – One-touch operation

Windshield wipers
h CAUTION Cleaning windshield f Press the wiper stalk downwards.
In rain sensor operation, the windshield wipers The windshield wipers carry out one wiping
wipe automatically if moisture is detected on the cycle.
5 – Windshield wiper and washer system
f Pull wiper stalk towards the steering wheel.
windshield.
f Always switch off windshield wipers before
cleaning the windshield to avoid unintentional The system wipes as long as the stalk is pulled
operation (rain sensor operation). towards the steering wheel.
When the wiper stalk is released, a few drying
wipes are performed.
NOTICE
After every 10 wipes on the windshield,
Risk of damage to the luggage compartment lids, the headlights are cleaned automatically.
windshield, rear window and wiper system.
f Only wipe the windshield when sufficiently wet,
Information
f If heavily soiled, repeat wash.
otherwise it could become scratched.
f Loosen frozen wiper blades before starting
to drive. f Persistent dirt (e.g. insect residues) should
f Do not operate a frozen headlight washer Windshield wiper and headlight washer be removed regularly.
system. system For information on car care:
f Always switch off windshield wipers in car 0 – Windshield wipers off f Please see the chapter “CAR CARE
washes to prevent them wiping unintentionally When the windshield wipers are switched off and INSTRUCTIONS” on page 211.
(rain sensor operation). also occasionally after the ignition is switched off, Windshield wiper blades that are in perfect
f Do not operate headlight washer system in car the wipers move up slightly from their rest position condition are vital for a clear view.
washes. so that the wiping edges are aligned correctly. f Please see the chapter “WIPER BLADES”
f Always switch off windshield wipers before 1 – Rain sensor operation, on page 205.
cleaning the windshield to avoid unintentional Windshield wipers
operation (rain sensor operation). f Press the wiper stalk upwards to the first click. Fitting ice or sun shields and wiper blade
f Always hold the wiper arm securely when 2 – Windshield wipers – slow replacement
replacing the wiper blade. f Press the wiper stalk upwards to the second f After switching off the ignition, press the wiper
f Always switch off windshield wipers before click. stalk once downwards 4.
opening the luggage compartment lids 3 – Windshield wipers – fast The wipers move upwards to an angle of
(wiper switch in position 0). f Press the wiper stalk upwards to the third approx. 45°.
f When replacing wiper blades, observe different click.
lengths of the wiper blades.

Information
f If the wiper stalk is in position 1 when the
ignition is switched on, the rain sensor is
activated as soon as the vehicle speed
exceeds approx. 2.5 mph (4 km/h).
f If the wiper stalk is in position 2 or 3 when the
ignition is switched on, the windshield wipers
remain switched off until the wiper stalk is
actuated.
Information
The wiper is stopped when the luggage
compartment lid is opened.
After closing the luggage compartment lid, the
wiper stalk must be operated in order to switch
Rain sensor operation, windshield wipers the wiper back on. Headlight washer system
In rain sensor mode, the amount of rain on the (on vehicles with Bi-XenonTM headlights and
windshield is measured. The wipe interval is Adjusting the rain sensor sensitivity PDLS/PDLS Plus)
automatically controlled accordingly. f Move switch A upwards – The washer sprays only while low beam or
Rain sensor operation is activated automatically at high sensitivity. high beam is activated.
speeds of less than approx. 2.5 mph (4 km/h). The setting is confirmed by one wipe of f Press button B under the wiper stalk.
when the windshield wipers are switched on. the windshield.
f Move switch A downwards –
After every 10 wipes on the windshield, the
If a speed of approx. 5 mph (8 km/h) is exceeded, headlights are cleaned automatically as well.
the system switches to the preselected wiper low sensitivity. The wipe count starts from zero again when the
speed. Activating and deactivating automatic rain low beam is switched off.
sensor operation in the multi-function display
For information on automatic rain sensor
operation:
f Please see the chapter “ACTIVATING AND
DEACTIVATING RAIN SENSOR OPERATION”
on page 109.

Instrument Panel and Multi-Function Display

Instrument Panel USA Models.........................78
Instrument Panel Canada Models....................79
Displays on the Instrument Panel ....................80
Battery/Alternator .........................................81
Check Engine (Emission Control) ....................82
Acoustic Signals ...........................................82
Operating the Multi-Function Display on the
Instrument Panel ...........................................83
Vehicle Menu ................................................87
Audio Menu...................................................89
Phone Menu..................................................90
Map Menu ....................................................90
Navigation Menu ...........................................91
Trip Menu .....................................................92
Tire Pressure Menu (Tire Pressure Monitoring
System, TPMS) .............................................93
Chrono Menu (Stopwatch) ............................100
Gear Shift Assist Menu ................................102
G-Forces Menu............................................103
ACC Menu ..................................................103
Vehicle Settings on the
Multi-Function Display ..................................104
Overview of Warning and
Information Messages..............................116
Instrument Panel and Multi-Function Display 77

Warning and indicator lights on the

tachometer
Emission control warning light
(Check Engine)
Airbag warning light
Safety belt warning light
PSM warning light
PSM OFF warning light
ABS warning light
Turn signal, left
Turn signal, right

Instrument Panel USA Models Brake warning light
A Speedometer D Reset button for trip counter display/
B Tachometer brightness setting for instrument panel High beam indicator light
C Multi-function display E Odometer
F Digital speedometer Electric parking brake warning light
G Upshift indicator
H PDK transmission: Indicator for selector-lever
position
PDK transmission/manual transmission:
speedometer
Gear display Rear fog light indicator light
I Marking showing position of filler flap
J Fuel gauge HOLD function indicator light
Low beam indicator light
High Beam Assistant indicator light
PDLS warning light
Tire pressure warning light
78 Instrument Panel and Multi-Function Display


tachometer
Emission control warning light
(Check Engine)
Airbag warning light
Safety belt warning light
PSM warning light
PSM OFF warning light
ABS warning light
Turn signal, left
Turn signal, right

Instrument Panel Canada Models Brake warning light
A Speedometer D Reset button for trip counter display/
B Tachometer brightness setting for instrument panel High beam indicator light
C Multi-function display E Odometer
F Digital speedometer Electric parking brake warning light
G Upshift indicator
H PDK transmission: Indicator for selector-lever
position
PDK transmission/manual transmission:
speedometer
Gear display Rear fog light indicator light
I Marking showing position of filler flap
J Fuel gauge HOLD function indicator light
Low beam indicator light
High Beam Assistant indicator light
PDLS warning light
Tire pressure warning light

Displays on the Instrument Panel E – Odometer H – PDK indicator for selector-lever

The displays for the total mileage and individual position
A – Speedometer
trips are integrated in the speedometer on the When the engine is running, the selector-lever
The analogue display A is located on the left next instrument panel. position is indicated in gates D or M.
to the tachometer in the instrument panel.
The upper display counts the total mileage, the Warning messages
B – Tachometer lower display shows individual trips.
After exceeding 6,213 miles or 9,999 kilometers, If the selector lever is between two positions
The start of the red zone on the tachometer or rev-
counter scale is a visual warning of the maximum the trip counter returns to 0. – Effects:
permissible engine speed. The corresponding selector-lever position in
F – Digital speedometer the instrument panel flashes and the warning
If the red zone is reached during acceleration, fuel
The digital speedometer F is integrated in the “Engage gear selector properly” appears
feed is interrupted in order to protect the engine.
tachometer on the instrument panel. on the multi-function display.
C – Multi-function display G – Upshift indicator – Action required:
For information on the multi-function display: Operate the footbrake and engage the
f Please see the chapter “OPERATING THE
The consumption-oriented shift indicator to the selector lever properly.
right of the digital speed display on the
MULTI-FUNCTION DISPLAY ON THE If there is a fault in the transmission
tachometer helps you to develop a fuel-saving
INSTRUMENT PANEL” on page 83. – Depending on priority, either the “Transm.
driving style.
D – Reset button for trip counter display/ The upshift indicator lights up - prompting you to failure Park vehicle safely” or “Transm.
brightness setting for instrument lighting shift up to the next-higher gear - depending on the fault Poss. no R gear Drive on poss.”
selected gear, engine speed and accelerator warning or the “Drive temperature too high
Resetting trip counter display
f Press rotary switch D for approx. 1 second.
pedal position. Reduce load” warning will appear on the
f Change to the next-higher gear when the multi-function display.
The trip counter display is reset to “0”.
upshift indicator lights up. “Transm. fault Poss. no R gear Drive
Adjusting brightness of instrument lighting on poss.”
For information on adjusting the brightness of the – Effects:
instrument lighting:
f Please see the chapter “ADJUSTING INTERIOR
Restricted gearshift comfort,
reverse gear may not be available.
LIGHTS” on page 108. – Action required:
Have the fault corrected immediately.
Please contact a qualified specialist workshop.
We recommend that you get an authorized
Porsche dealer to do this work as they have
trained workshop personnel and the necessary
parts and tools.

“Transm. failure Park vehicle safely” J – Fuel gauge Battery/Alternator

The fuel gauge displays the contents of the tank, Warning message
– Effect: and depending on the settings, the fuel range
Vehicle can be driven only until it comes to when the ignition is on. The warning message “Generator fault
a stop. For information on adjusting the fuel gauge: Park vehicle safely” will appear on the multi-
– Action required: f Please see the chapter “ADAPTING FUEL function display in the instrument panel if the
It is not possible to continue driving. Stop the GAUGE” on page 107. vehicle electrical system voltage drops
vehicle immediately in a suitable place. Have For information on fuel quality and refill capacities: significantly.
the fault corrected immediately. f Please see the chapter “FILLING CAPACITIES” f Stop at a safe place and switch the engine off.
Please contact a qualified specialist workshop. on page 267. For information on warning messages on the
We recommend that you get an authorized For information on fuel and refueling: multi-function display:
Porsche dealer to do this work as they have f Please see the chapter “FUEL” on page 208. f Please see the chapter “OVERVIEW OF
trained workshop personnel and the necessary WARNING AND INFORMATION MESSAGES”
If the vehicle’s inclination changes (e.g. uphill/
parts and tools. on page 116.
downhill driving), minor deviations in the gauge
If the vehicle has to be towed:
f Please see the chapter “TOWING”
may occur. Possible causes
on page 255. Fuel reserve warning – Defect in the battery charging system
“Drive temperature too high Reduce If less than approximately 2.6 U.S. gallons – Broken drive belt
load” (10 liters) remains in the tank, the warning light on
NOTICE
– Effects: the multi-function display lights up when the
ignition is switched on or the engine is running. Risk of engine damage.
f Refuel at the next opportunity.
“Warning jerks” can be felt when driving off and
the engine power may be restricted. The engine cooling does not function if the drive
– Action required: belt is torn.
Do not hold the vehicle with the accelerator on
NOTICE
f Do not continue driving.
a hill, for example. Hold the vehicle with the A shortage of fuel may damage the emission f Have the fault corrected.
brake. Reduce engine load. Stop the vehicle in control system. f Please contact a qualified specialist workshop.
a suitable place if possible. Allow the engine to f Never drive the tank dry. We recommend that you get an authorized
run in selector-lever position P or N until the f If the warning lights have come on, do not take Porsche dealer to do this work as they have
warning disappears. bends at high speed. trained workshop personnel and the necessary
f Please see the chapter “REDUCED DRIVING parts and tools.
For information on the emission control system:
f Please see the chapter “EMISSION CONTROL
PROGRAMME” on page 164.
PDK transmission/manual transmission SYSTEM” on page 205.
gear display
When the engine is running, the display shows the
currently engaged gear.

Check Engine NOTICE

(Emission Control) Risk of damage to the emission control system.
Warning light If the warning light on the instrument panel
The emission control system detects malfunctions continues flashing even when you have eased off
that could cause increased pollutant emissions or the accelerator pedal, the emission control
consequential damage, etc. well in advance. system may overheat.
Faults are indicated by the warning light on the f Stop as soon as possible in a safe place.
instrument panel which then either lights up Make sure that combustible materials, such as
continuously or flashes. dry grass or leaves, cannot come into contact
The faults are recorded in the control unit’s fault with the hot exhaust system.
memory. f Switch off the engine.
The warning light on the instrument panel lights up f Have the fault corrected.
when the ignition is switched on as a lamp check
and goes out approx. 1 second after the engine Acoustic Signals
starts. A speaker in the instrument panel generates
The warning light on the instrument panel flashes acoustic signals.
to indicate operating states (e.g. engine misfiring) The warning message “Instrument cluster/
which may cause damage to certain parts of the Park Assist audio fault Service required” will
emission control system. appear on the multi-function display in the
f In this case, immediately reduce the engine instrument panel if a speaker fault occurs.
load by easing off the accelerator pedal. The speaker cannot generate acoustic signals.
In order to avoid consequential damage to the f Please see the chapter “OVERVIEW OF
engine or the exhaust-gas cleaning system WARNING AND INFORMATION MESSAGES”
(e.g. catalytic converter): on page 116.
f We recommend that you get an authorized
Porsche dealer to do this work as they have
trained workshop personnel and the necessary
parts and tools.

Operating the Multi-Function

Display on the Instrument Panel
On the multi-function display, you can view
information relating to the relevant vehicle
equipment, operate the audio source (radio, CD,
iPod, etc.), check the oil level, check the tire
pressure, use the stopwatch or operate the
navigation system.
You can also modify different vehicle settings in
the “Vehicle” menu.
It is not possible to describe all details of the
functions in this Owner’s Manual. The examples
clearly demonstrate the functional principle and
clarify the menu structure.
h WARNING
Operation of the multi-
function display, radio,
navigation system, Multi-function display
telephone etc. during
Operating principle on vehicles without
driving.
multi-function steering wheel
Information The multi-function display is operated with the
You may be distracted from paying attention to the
The multi-function display is only active when the lower lever on the right of the steering column.
road if you set or operate the multi-function
display, radio, navigation system, telephone or ignition is on. Selecting menu, function, setting option
other equipment when driving. You may lose Certain menus are only available when the vehicle
f Push the lever downwards (position 3) or
control of the vehicle. has stopped, e.g. the adjustment menu for tire
upwards (position 4).
f Operate the equipment while driving only if the pressure monitoring system.
Confirming selection (Enter)
f Push the lever forward (position 1).
traffic situation allows you to do so safely.
procedures only whilst the vehicle is stationary. Moving back one or several selection levels
f Pull the lever towards the steering wheel
(position 2) once or several times.

Individual assignment of the diamond

button
Porsche Communication Management (PCM)
functions, CDR functions or multi-function display
functions can be assigned to the ◊ button in the
multi-function display on the instrument panel.
Audio source selection is preset by default.
For information on individual assignment of the
◊ button:
f Please see the chapter “CHANGING BUTTON
ASSIGNMENT ON MULTI-FUNCTION STEERING
WHEEL” on page 114.
For information on Porsche Communication
Management (PCM) and CDR:
f Please refer to the separate operating
instructions.
Operating principle on vehicles with A - Fuel gauge

multi-function steering wheel B - Title area with menu indicator
C - Information area
The multi-function display is operated using the D - Status area
rotary knob A, the Back button B and the diamond
◊ button C, which can be assigned as required. Areas on the multi-function display
f Please see the chapter “FUNCTION BUTTONS A – Fuel gauge
ON THE MULTI-FUNCTION STEERING WHEEL” The fuel gauge A displays the contents of the tank,
on page 47. and depending on the settings, the fuel range
Selecting menu, function, setting option when the ignition is on.
f Turn rotary knob A upwards or downwards. For information on adjusting the fuel gauge:
f Please see the chapter “ADAPTING FUEL
Confirming selection (Enter) GAUGE” on page 107.
f Press rotary knob A. For information on fuel quality and refill capacities:
Moving back one or several selection levels f Please see the chapter “FILLING CAPACITIES”
f Press button B (Back button).
on page 267.
For information on fuel and refueling:
f Please see the chapter “FUEL” on page 208.
If the vehicle’s inclination changes (e.g. uphill/
downhill driving), minor deviations in the gauge
may occur.

Fuel reserve warning D – Status area Activating functions, opening submenus

If less than approximately 2.6 U.S. gallons Basic information, such as time and temperature, and accessing setting options from the
(10 liters) remain in the tank, the warning light on as well as warnings are displayed in the status main menu areas
the multi-function display lights up when the area D. Press the rotary knob A or push the right lower
ignition is switched on or the engine is running. The display contents of the status area can be lever on the steering wheel forwards (position 1)
f Refuel at the next opportunity. individually adapted. to access menus, other functions and setting
For information on adapting the multi-function options regardless of the main menu area.
NOTICE
display:
f Please see the chapter “ADAPTING
1. Select main menu
A shortage of fuel may damage the emission
and confirm.
control system. APPEARANCE OF MULTI-FUNCTION DISPLAY”
f Never drive the tank dry. on page 104. 2. Select function, submenu or setting option
f If the warning lights have come on, do not take and confirm.
bends at high speed.
Browsing through long lists
For information on the emission control system:
f Please see the chapter “CAR CARE
When searching for an entry in long telephone and
audio lists on vehicles with PCM, you can skip
INSTRUCTIONS” on page 211. directly to other entries with the same first letter.
B – Title area with menu indicator f Briefly press the rotary knob A or hold the
The menu item currently selected is displayed in control stalk in position 3 or 4.
the title area B . A letter selection screen appears.
The menu indicator (gray bar) on the right shows Select the desired first letter and confirm.
the position of the current menu item in the overall The marking skips to the first list entry beginning
menu and displays the number of other menu with the letter selected.
items on this menu level.
The wider the menu indicator, the fewer menu
items the current menu contains.
C – Information area
The information area C displays the menu items
currently available for selection or after a menu
item is selected, information relating to this menu
item or other selection options.

Info Messages Current speed

Oil measurement Setting the speed
Limits Service interval
Menu scope
Settings Audio
Vehicle menu
Station/Track Limit 1/Limit 2
Upper line
PCM display
Answer/Reject/End
Lower line
Phonebook Display
Shift request
Previous calls
Received calls Light & Visibility Brightness
Exterior lights
Locking
Manual zoom Interior lights
Auto zoom Air conditioning Wiper
3D map Revers. opt.
Date & Time
North up Door locking/unlocking
Show destination/position Units Comfort Entry
Language Auto memory
Destination input Air flow
Volume
Vehicle Start/Stop route guidance Vent. panel
Audio Steering wheel op. Auto air circ.
Since Time
Telephone Fact. settings
Total
Date
Map To destination
Summer time
Navigation Time Chrono
Fill info Last destination
Speedometer
Trip Tire type
Stored destinations Temperature
TPMS Partial/full load
Comfort/standard pressure POIs Tire pressure
Chrono Consumption
Gearshift assistant Start German/French...
Stop ParkAssist
G-Force Cont.
Round Warn. tones
ACC Int. Reset ◊- button

Vehicle Menu Displaying service intervals

A large amount of vehicle information can be The internal mileage counter indicates when the
displayed and vehicle settings made in the next vehicle service is due.
“Vehicle” main menu. 1. Main menu “Vehicle”
1. Select “Vehicle” > “Info”
main menu. 2. Select “Service intervals”
and confirm.
The vehicle information display can be adapted
individually. 3. Select the desired service interval
For information on adapting the vehicle menu: and confirm.
f Please see the chapter “ADAPTING DISPLAY Available service interval displays:
CONTENTS IN VEHICLE INFORMATION AREA”
– “Service”
on page 105.
– “Interm. service”
Displaying vehicle information – “Oil change”
Pending warning messages, information on
forthcoming service intervals and the average fuel
consumption can be viewed in the “Info” sub-menu Displaying messages
of the “Vehicle” main menu area. All current warning messages and vehicle
messages can be viewed on the multi-function
1. Main menu: Select “Vehicle” display.
> “Info” The warning symbol in the lower status area
and confirm. indicates the number of pending warning
messages.
If several warning messages are pending, you can
browse through the message list.
1. Main menu “Vehicle”
> “Info”
2. Select “Messages”
and confirm.

Display and measurement of the engine The message “Oil level below min. Refill oil at
oil level once Do not drive on” appears on the multi-
function display.
NOTICE f Add engine oil immediately.
Risk of engine damage due to inadequate Top-up quantity
lubrication.
f Regularly check the oil level each time before
The difference between the minimum and
maximum marks on the segment display is
refuelling.
f Do not allow the oil level to fall below the
approx. 1.8 quarts (1.7 liters).
f Never add more engine oil than required to
minimum mark. reach the maximum mark.
If the segments are shown in yellow up to the top
Prerequisites for the oil-level gauge:
edge (illustration D), this indicates that the
1. Park the vehicle on a level surface. maximum engine filling capacity has been
2. Switch off engine, which is now at operating exceeded. Exceeding the maximum capacity may
temperature. result in blue smoke formation and cause long-
3. Wait for approx. 1 minute. term damage to the catalytic converters
4. Select the “Oil measurement” function on the depending on the overfill quantity and various
multi-function display. Example displays for oil level external influences.
A - Maximum oil level reached
Selecting the Oil measurement function on B - Minimum oil level reached If too much engine oil was added, the message
the multi-function display C - Oil level below minimum “Oil level above maximum Consult a
D - Oil level above maximum workshop Driving permitted” appears on the
1. Main menu: Select “Vehicle”
Measured oil level multi-function display.
f Have the oil quantity corrected at the next
> “Oil measurement”
and confirm. The oil level reading is shown on the segment
opportunity.
display in the Oil measurement menu.
f Please see the chapter “OVERVIEW OF If the segments are filled in green up to the top line
Please contact an authorized Porsche dealer.
WARNING AND INFORMATION MESSAGES” (illustration A), the oil level has reached the
on page 116. maximum mark.
f Under no circumstances add engine oil.
If the bottom segment is shown in yellow
(illustration B), the oil level has reached the
minimum mark.
The message “Oil level minimum reached
Refill oil” appears on the multi-function display.
f Add engine oil immediately.
If the bottom segment is red (illustration C), the oil
level has dropped below the minimum mark.

Measuring the oil level after topping up Setting a speed limit Audio Menu
engine oil or opening the rear lid
1. Main menu “Vehicle” In the “Audio” main menu, you can select a radio
The oil level can be checked after waiting for station either from the station list or the list of
> “Limits”
approx. 1 minute with the vehicle parked on a level stored stations, depending on the settings, or a
surface and the engine at operating temperature. 2. Select track from the active audio source, e.g. disc.
If the rear lid is opened when the engine is cold “Limit 1: ---” or
(e.g. in order to top up engine oil), the oil level “Limit 2: ---” 1. Main menu: Select “Audio”
cannot be displayed for a certain time. and confirm. and confirm.
The message “No inform./oil level available 3. Select “Current speed” or 2. Select the desired radio station or track
now” appears on the multi-function display. “---” and confirm.
f Engine oil should therefore only be topped up and confirm.
with the engine at operating temperature. This For information on adjusting audio menu settings:
ensures short waiting times for the soonest You can either adopt the current speed of the f Please see the chapter “ADAPTING DISPLAY
possible oil level display. vehicle or specify your own speed limit. CONTENTS OF AUDIO MAIN MENU”
on page 104.
Failure Activating and deactivating speed limits
If the oil-level indicator fails, the message “Oil 1. Main menu “Vehicle”
level measurement fault Consult a workshop > “Limits”
Driving permitted” appears on the multi-function
display. 2. Select
“Limit 1: ---” or
Setting speed limits “Limit 2: ---”
If a speed limit is preset and activated on the multi- and confirm.
function display, a warning message appears if 3. Select “Active”
the speed limit is exceeded.
A speed limit can be used to remind the driver to 4. Confirm your selection.
keep to the maximum speed permitted for the tire Limit is active.
type fitted to the vehicle, for example. Limit is not active.
1. Main menu: Select “Vehicle” Adjusting vehicle settings

> “Limits” Various vehicle settings can be modified in the
and confirm “Settings” submenu.
For information on modifying vehicle settings:
f Please see the chapter “VEHICLE SETTINGS
ON THE MULTI-FUNCTION DISPLAY”
on page 104.

Phone Menu Ending a call Map Menu

In the “Phone” main menu, you can retrieve 1. Main menu “Phone” In the “Map” main menu, you can view and modify
telephone numbers stored in the phonebook or in the map display of the navigation system.
lists of most recently dialled or received calls. 2. Select “End call”
and confirm. 1. Main menu:
1. Main menu: Select “Phone” Select “Map”.
and confirm. Making multiple calls simultaneously
During an active telephone conversation, you have Modifying map display
Dialling telephone number the option of starting another telephone 1. Main menu: Select “Map”
conversation.
1. Main menu “Phone” and confirm.
You can have a separate conversation with the
2. Select person you have called or alternatively start a 2. Select display option
“Phonebook” or conference call together with the other caller. and confirm.
“Previous calls” or
Making additional calls 3. Confirm your selection.
“Received calls”
During a current call: Function is active.
and confirm.
Function is not active.
3. Select the desired telephone number 1. Main menu “Phone”
and confirm. 2. Select “New call”
and confirm.
Answering calls
1. Main menu “Phone” Switching between callers
2. Select “Answer” 1. Main menu “Phone”

and confirm. 2. Select “Swap”
and confirm.
Rejecting calls
Adding a caller to a conference call
1. Main menu “Phone”
2. Select “Reject” 1. Main menu “Phone”
and confirm. 2. Select “Conference”
and confirm.

Available display options: Navigation Menu Starting route guidance

– “Auto zoom” If route guidance is inactive and you have entered
In the “Navigation” main menu, you can enter a
The scale of the map is set automatically from a new navigation destination you can then start
navigation destination, start route guidance and
the current position of the vehicle to the next route guidance.
view the navigation information for an active route.
navigation maneuver point.
– “3D map” 1. Main menu: Select “Navigation” 1. Main menu “Navigation”
Three-dimensional map display. and confirm. 2. Select “Start route guidance”
– “North up” and confirm.
The map always faces north. Entering navigation destination
Enlarging and reducing map display You can enter a navigation destination in the multi- Stopping route guidance
function display. You can stop route guidance while in progress.
The zoom factor of the map display can be
Only navigation destinations from the list of
adapted individually. 1. Main menu “Navigation”
previous destinations or from the list of preset
1. Main menu: Select “Map” POIs or stored destinations can be selected. 2. Select “Stop route guidance”
> “Manual zoom” and confirm.
1. Main menu “Navigation”
and confirm.
> “Destination input”
2. Select the desired zoom setting
2. Select
and confirm.
“Last destination” or
“Stored destination” or
Displaying current location or destination
“POIs”
You can view the navigation destination or current
and confirm.
vehicle position on an enlarged section of the
map. 3. Select the desired navigation destination
and confirm.
1. Main menu “Map”
2. Select
“Show destination” or
“Show position”
and confirm.

Available driving data:

– “Since”
Driving data since the last vehicle start.
The driving data is reset automatically once
the vehicle has remained stationary for 2 hours
(with the ignition switched off).
– “Total”
Cumulative driving data.
The driving data is added progressively until a
reset is performed. The data is retained even
if the ignition key is removed.
– “To destination”
Driving data up to navigation destination.
If route guidance is active, the driving data is
calculated and displayed up to the navigation
destination.
Resetting driving data
Trip Menu The selected driving data display can be reset.
In the “Trip” main menu, the driving data: 1. Main menu “Trip”.
– Ride time
– Distance 2. Select the relevant driving data display
– Average fuel consumption and confirm.
– Average speed 3. Select “Reset”
can be retrieved and reset. and confirm.
1. Main menu:
Select “Trip”.
Displaying driving data

There are three driving data displays available.
1. Main menu “Trip”.
2. Select
“1 – Since” or
“2 – Total” or
“3 – To destination”
and confirm.

Tire Pressure Menu (Tire Pressure and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s nearest authorized Porsche dealer.
handling and stopping ability. The maximum permitted speed is 50 mph
Monitoring System, TPMS) (80 km/h).
The display as well as the settings for the Tire
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Pressure Monitoring System take place on the f Do not drive with tires in which the tire
Rules and RSS-210 of Industry Canada. multi-fuction display. pressure drops again very quickly. In case of
Operation of this device is subject to the following However, the tire pressure must still be set doubt, have tires checked by an authorized
two conditions: manually on the wheel. Porsche dealer.
1. This device may not cause harmful f Please see the chapter “TIRE PRESSURE FOR f Defective tires must be replaced immediately
interference, and COLD TIRES (68 °F/ 20 °C)” on page 264. at an authorized Porsche dealer.
2. This device must accept any interference Tires must never be repaired under any
received including interference that may cause h WARNING Maintaining tire pressure circumstances.
undesired operation.
Driving the vehicle with low tire pressure increases f If Tire Pressure Monitoring System is defective
Changes or modifications not expressly approved the risk of a tire failure and resulting loss of (e.g. defective wheel transmitter), contact an
by the party responsible for compliance could void control. Furthermore, low tire pressure increases authorized Porsche dealer immediately and
the user's authority to operate the equipment. rate of wear of the affected tires. have the damage repaired.
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should Please note that the Tire Pressure Monitoring The tire pressure will not be monitored at all
be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the System is not a substitute for proper tire or will be monitored only partially when Tire
inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle maintenance, and it is the driver's responsibility to Pressure Monitoring System is defective.
manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire maintain correct tire pressure, even if under- For information on warning messages on the multi-
inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires of inflation has not reached the level to trigger function display:
a different size than the size indicated on the illumination of Tire Pressure Monitoring System f Please see the chapter “OVERVIEW OF
vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you low tire pressure telltale. Low tire pressure WARNING AND INFORMATION MESSAGES”
should determine the proper tire inflation pressure reduces the road safety of the vehicle and on page 116.
for those tires.) destroys the tire and wheel. f Incomplete entries or selection of the wrong
Tire Pressure Monitoring System gives a warning tires on the multi-function display affect the
For information on the tire inflation pressure label:
f Please see the chapter “TIRES AND WHEELS” about tire damage caused by a natural loss in accuracy of warnings and messages.
pressure as well as about a gradual loss of The settings in the tire pressure menu must be
on page 224.
pressure caused by foreign objects. updated following a wheel change or changes
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
Tire Pressure Monitoring System cannot warn you in vehicle loading.
f Use only the pressure differences shown in the
equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale about tire damage that occurs suddenly (e.g. flat
tire due to abrupt external effects). “Fill info” display in the Tire pressure menu
f When a red tire pressure warning appears,
(warning light) when one or more of your tires is
or from the corresponding tire pressure
significantly under-inflated.
stop immediately in a suitable place and check warning when correcting the tire pressure.
f Tires can lose air over time without a tire
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale
illuminates, you should stop, check your tires as the tires for damage. If necessary, remedy the
damage with a tire sealant. defect being present. A tire pressure warning
f Do not by any means continue to drive with
soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper
will then appear on the multi-function display.
pressure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated
defective tires. Check the tire pressure at the next opportunity.
f Sealing the tire with tire sealant is only an
tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire
failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency
emergency repair so you can drive to the

Warning light The warning light in the instrument panel lights up:
– When a loss in pressure has been detected.
h WARNING Attention to TPMS – In the event of a defect in Tire Pressure
malfunction indicator Monitoring System or a temporary fault.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS – When learning new fitted wheels/wheel
malfunction indicator to indicate when the system transmitters, as long as the vehicle’s own
is not operating properly. wheels have not yet been recognized.
The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with The tire pressure warning light on the instrument
the low tire pressure telltale. panel goes out only when the cause of the fault
When the system detects a malfunction, the has been rectified.
telltale will flash for approximately one minute and
then remain continuously illuminated. This Overview of Tire Pressure Monitoring
sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle System functions
start-ups as long as the malfunction exists. Tire Pressure Monitoring System offers the
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the following functions:
system may not be able to detect or signal low tire – Display of the actual tire pressure while the
pressure as intended. vehicle is in motion.
TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of – “Fill info” display:
Tire pressure display on the multi-function display
reasons, including the installation of replacement Display of the deviation from the required
or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that pressure (refilling pressure) at standstill. Selecting the TPMS function on the
prevent the TPMS from functioning properly. – “Tire type” display: multi-function display
f Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale Display of current settings
1. Select main menu “TPMS”
after replacing one or more tires or wheels on (when the vehicle is stationary).
your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or – Tire pressure warnings in two stages The “TPMS” function displays the temperature-
alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to (yellow and red warning). dependent tire pressures (actual pressures) in the
continue to function properly. four wheels.
You can watch the tire pressure rise as the
temperature increases while driving.
Information
This display is only for information.
f Under no circumstances should the tire
pressures be changed based on this display.

The tire pressure to be corrected (refill pressure)

is indicated on the displayed wheel.
Example: If
“–1.5 psi (–0.1 bar/ –10 kPa)”
is displayed for the front right tire,
1.5 psi (0.1 bar/ 10 kPa)
must be added to this tire.

The displayed pressures take into account the tire
temperature.
f Use only the pressure values shown in the
“Fill info” display in the “TPMS” main menu or
from the corresponding tire pressure warning
when correcting the tire pressure.
Viewing Fill info in the Tire pressure menu Viewing current settings in the
(only when vehicle is stationary) Information TPMS menu
You can read the tire pressures to be corrected in After the ignition is switched on, it can take up to 1. Main menu “TPMS”
this display. approx. 1 minute until all tire pressures are
displayed. Dashes (-.-) appear instead of the tire 2. Confirm “TPMS”.
1. Main menu “TPMS”
pressures.
2. Confirm “TPMS”.
3. Select the “Fill info”
menu and confirm.

Selecting comfort/standard pressure h WARNING Low tire pressure loss of

For speeds up to 165 mph (270 km/h), the tire control
pressures can be reduced to increase suspension Prolonged driving at low tire pressure or even
comfort (function can only be selected in short-term driving at high speeds on tires which
conjunction with 20-inch wheels/tires). have too low a pressure is likely to result in a loss
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System must be set of control of your vehicle, either due to a failure to
to the applicable tire pressure (comfort pressure maintain directional control under side loads or
or standard pressure). due to tire failure.
If you select “Comfort pressure”, the TPMS Tires are inflated to comfort pressure at the
system automatically uses lower pressure values factory, which is not suitable for driving at very
when monitoring tire pressure. high speeds.
1. Main menu “TPMS” f Always adjust the pressure in the tires to the
standard pressure setting when driving at
2. Confirm “TPMS”. higher speeds.
3. Comfort press. f Remember to adjust the setting in the Tire
Comfort pressure is selected. Pressure Monitoring System accordingly.
Comfort pressure speed warning

Comfort press.
If the maximum speed of the preset comfort
Standard pressure is selected.
pressure is exceeded and the tire pressure is
below a critical limit, a warning message appears
Change or select comfort pressure/standard
on the multi-function display.
pressure by enabling or disabling the
“Comfort press.” box. h WARNING
Driving at excessive
speeds when the
The comfort tire pressures are included in the comfort pressure is
technical data. active
or Driving at excessive speeds when the comfort
Under “Fill info” in the “TPMS” main menu, you pressure is active will destroy the tires.
can compare the pressure differences with the f Reduce speed to below the displayed
comfort pressures. maximum speed.
If the tires are not yet taught, the new required f Always inflate the tires to the standard tire
pressures are displayed instead of the actual tire pressure when driving at higher speeds.
pressures.
For information on teaching tires:
f Please see the chapter “SYSTEM LEARNING”
on page 97.

Selecting tire type in the TPMS menu The new tire type and tire size must be selected of the selection options shown here may not be
(type and size of fitted tire) even if the settings for the new set of wheels are available on your multi-function display.
the same as for the old wheels.
h WARNING Exceeding maximum System learning
rated tire speed 1. Main menu “TPMS”
Tire Pressure Monitoring System begins to “learn”
Exceeding the maximum tire speed could result in 2. Confirm “TPMS”. the tires after a wheel change, wheel transmitter
a tire burst, causing loss of control of the vehicle. replacement or update of the tire settings. During
f Always observe the permissible maximum
3. Select “Tire type” and confirm.
this process, Tire Pressure Monitoring System
speed of the respective tire. 4. Select recognizes the wheels and their locations.
f Porsche recommends obeying all traffic laws “18" Summer” or The message “No tire pressure monitoring
at all times to maintain the safety of yourself “18" Winter” or System is learning” appears on the multi-
and all vehicle occupants. “19" Summer” or function display.
“19" Winter” or
The wheel learning process takes place
h WARNING Entering tire data and “20" Summer”
exclusively when the vehicle is being driven
display and confirm.
(vehicle speed above 16 mph (25 km/h)).
Incomplete entries or selection of the wrong tires Option is selected. Tire Pressure Monitoring System requires a
on the multi-function display affect correct Option is not selected. certain amount of time to learn the wheels. During
indication of warnings and messages. this time, the current tire pressures are not
f The settings must be updated in the “TPMS”
Tire selection has only been completed
successfully when the following message appears available on the multi-function display:
menu after changing a wheel, filling with tire – The tire pressure warning light remains lit until
on the multi-function display (example):
sealant or adding air (after previous warning all wheels have been learned.
“No tire pressure monitoring System is
“Check tires”). – Lines (-.-) appear on the display of the “TPMS”
f Please see the chapter “RED WARNING –
learning”.
f Please see the chapter “CHANGING A WHEEL function.
“Check tires”” on page 98. – The required pressures for cold tires 68 °F (20
AND REPLACING TIRES” on page 99.
°C) are shown under “Fill info” in the “TPMS”
main menu.
Information Position and pressure information is displayed as
Before fitting tires with dimensions that are not soon as Tire Pressure Monitoring System has
already stored in the multi-function display, the assigned the wheels recognized as belonging to
missing information should be added to the the vehicle to the correct wheel positions.
multi-function display by your authorized Porsche f Check the tire pressure for all wheels under
dealer. “Fill info”.
f Please contact your authorized Porsche f Correct the tire pressure to the required
dealer. pressure if necessary (differential pressure
f Use only tires approved by Porsche. value “0.0”).
The available items in the tire pressure menu
depend on the model type. For this reason, some

Tire pressure warnings

The tire pressure warning light on the instrument
panel and a corresponding message on the multi-
function display warn about loss of pressure in two
stages (yellow and red), depending on the amount
of pressure loss.
Yellow warning – “Top off air“ Red warning – “Check tires”

The pressure in the tire is too low by more than At speeds below 100 mph (160 km/h):
4 to 7 psi/0.3 to 0.5 bar/30 to 50 kPa. The – The pressure in the tire has dropped by 20 %
tire pressure warning specifies the affected tire below the required pressure or by more
and the target tire pressure. than 7 psi/0.5 bar/50 kPa. This significant
f Fill up with air at the next opportunity. pressure loss is a danger to road safety.
This tire pressure warning appears: At speeds above 100 mph (160 km/h):
– for approx. 10 seconds when the vehicle is – The pressure in the tire has dropped by more
stationary and the ignition is switched off or than 6 psi/0.4 bar/40 kPa. This significant
– when the ignition is switched on again. pressure loss is a danger to road safety.
The warning can be acknowledged when the f When the tire pressure warning appears, stop
ignition is switched on. immediately at a suitable location. Check the
The tire pressure warning light on the instrument indicated tire for signs of damage. If
panel goes out only when the tire pressure has necessary, fill in tire sealant and set the
been corrected (differential pressure value “0.0”). correct tire pressure.
This tire pressure warning also appears when
driving and can be acknowledged.
The tire pressure warning light on the instrument
panel goes out only when the tire pressure has
been corrected (differential pressure value “0.0”).

Warning light Changing a wheel and replacing tires

The warning light in the instrument panel lights up: f New wheels must be fitted with radio
– When a loss in pressure has been detected. transmitters for Tire Pressure Monitoring
– In the event of a defect in Tire Pressure System.
Monitoring System or a temporary fault. Before tires are changed, the battery charge
– When learning new fitted wheels/wheel condition of the wheel transmitters should be
transmitters, as long as the vehicle’s own checked.
wheels have not yet been recognized. We recommend that you get an authorized
A warning message also appears on the multi- Porsche dealer to do this work as they have
function display in the instrument panel. trained workshop personnel and the necessary
f Please see the chapter “OVERVIEW OF parts and tools.
WARNING AND INFORMATION MESSAGES” f Switch off the ignition when changing a wheel.
on page 116. The tire settings on the multi-function display must
The tire pressure warning light on the instrument be updated after changing a wheel.
panel goes out only when the cause of the fault If the tire settings are not updated, the message
has been rectified. “Tire change? Update settings” is displayed on
the multi-function display.
Speed warning - “Tire pressure Reduce f Update the multi-function display settings the
speed“ next time the vehicle is stationary.
At speeds above 165 mph (270 km/h): Pressure increase as the result of
– The pressure in the tire has dropped by more temperature increase
than 4 psi/0.3 bar/30 kPa. This pressure
In accordance with physical principles, the tire
loss is a danger to road safety.
f When the tire pressure warning appears,
pressure changes as the temperature changes.
For every 18 °F (10 °C) change in temperature,
reduce speed to below 165 mph (270 km/h)
the tire pressure increases or decreases by
until the warning disappears.
approx. 1.5 psi (0.1 bar/10 kPa).
When driving at very high speeds, increase the
tire pressure to the required pressure
(differential pressure value “0.0”).
For information on tire sealing compound:
f Please see the chapter “FILLING IN SEALANT”
on page 238.

Partial monitoring Stopwatch on the dashboard

Monitoring of the other wheels is continued if there The stopwatch has an analoge and a digital
is a fault in one or two wheel transmitters. display.
– The tire pressure warning light lights up. The large pointer of the analog display measures
– The message “Restricted monitoring” the seconds. The two small pointers measure
appears on the multi-function display. hours and minutes. The display re-starts at zero
– No tire pressures are displayed on the after 12 hours.
multi-function display for wheels with faulty Seconds and increments of
wheel transmitters. 1/10th and 1/100th of a second can be read on
the digital display.
No monitoring The digital display and the multi-function display
In the event of faults, Tire Pressure Monitoring can show up to 99 hours and 59 minutes.
System cannot monitor the tire pressure.
The warning light on the instrument panel lights up Stopwatch timing displays
and a corresponding message appears on the The stopwatch time is displayed at different
multi-function display. positions on the dashboard:
Monitoring is not active: – In the stopwatch on the dashboard.
– If Tire Pressure Monitoring System is faulty. – In the “Chrono” menu in the multi-function
– If wheel transmitters for Tire Pressure Chrono Menu (Stopwatch) display on the instrument panel.
Monitoring System are missing. You can use the stopwatch to measure any times, – In the “CAR” main menu on the PCM.
– During the learning phase after the tire settings e.g. on the race circuit or on work-related
journeys. Measured lap times can be stored and
Displaying the time on the stopwatch
have been updated.
– After a wheel change without updating the tire evaluated if the vehicle is equipped with Porsche You can configure the stopwatch on the
settings. Communication Management (PCM). dashboard to display the time in the multi-function
– If more than four wheel transmitters are f Please observe the chapter “SPORT DISPLAY” display on the instrument panel.
recognized. in the separate PCM operating instructions. For information on displaying the time on the
stopwatch:
f Please see the chapter “DISPLAYING TIME IN
– If there is external interference by other radio
sources, e.g. wireless headphones.
– If tire temperatures are too high. STOPWATCH ON DASHBOARD” on page 113.
on page 116.

Chrono on multi-function display Stopping lap/Starting new lap

All stopwatch displays are started and stopped in The current stopwatch time can be stored as a lap
the “Chrono” menu on the multi-function display. time while the stopwatch is still running.
For instructions on using the multi-function
1. Main menu “Chrono”
display:
f Please see the chapter “OPERATING THE 2. Select “Round”
MULTI-FUNCTION DISPLAY ON THE and confirm.
INSTRUMENT PANEL” on page 83.
The lap counter value A is incremented by the
1. Main menu: Select “Chrono” value of 1.
and confirm. The time of the fastest completed lap is stored
temporarily as a reference value C.
The stopwatch time B and the circle display D turn
Information a different color to indicate whether the current
If you exit the “Chrono” menu while the stopwatch lap time is quicker than, slower than or identical to
is running, measurement will continue. the current fastest lap.
The stopwatch stops after the ignition is switched – Green: Current lap time is faster.
off. If the ignition is switched on again within A - Number of completed laps – Yellow: Current lap time is identical.
approx. 4 minutes, the stopwatch will continue to B - Current stopwatch time – Red: Current lap time is slower.
run. C - Reference time (fastest lap)
The only way to reset the stopwatch to zero is by D - Circle display: Comparison of current lap time
with the reference time Information
selecting “Reset” in the “Chrono” menu.
If a reference time has not been stored yet, the
For information on resetting the stopwatch: Starting timing
f Please see the chapter “RESETTING THE
reference time position C remains blank.
1. Main menu “Chrono” The segment display is not colored.
STOPWATCH TIME” on page 102.
2. Select “Start” A maximum of 63 laps can be stored during each
and confirm. session.
The stopwatch time B is displayed simultaneously

on all stopwatch displays in the vehicle.

Storing intermediate time Resetting the stopwatch time

You can store an intermediate time while the The stopwatch time can be reset to zero.
stopwatch is still running.
1. Main menu “Chrono” > “Stop”
2. Select “Interim” 2. Select “Reset”
and confirm. and confirm.
The intermediate time is displayed temporarily on All stopwatch time displays are reset to zero.
the multi-function display. It is not stored.
Timing continues in the background.
Stopping timing
You can stop the stopwatch at any time.
2. Select “Stop”
and confirm.
Gear Shift Assist Menu
The stopwatch time B stops.
(in vehicles with manual transmission)
Continuing timing In order to provide assistance during
You can resume timing again after stopping the performance-oriented driving, a graphic display of
stopwatch. the upshift indicator is shown in the “Gear shift
assist” main menu.
1. Main menu “Chrono” The gearshift assistant displays a prompt to shift
> “Stop” to the next-higher gear with a pre-indication via
2. Select “Cont.” segments that fill up. The sequence in which the
and confirm. segments are filled with colour is white, yellow,
red.
The stopwatch time B continues.

ACC Menu
For information on how to operate and display
adaptive cruise control (ACC):
f Please see the chapter “ADAPTIVE CRUISE
CONTROL (ACC)” on page 142.
When all the segments are filled in red, a “+” sign G-Forces Menu
appears next to the engaged gear in the display as
In the “G-forces” main menu, the current lateral
a prompt to shift to the next-higher gear.
and longitudinal acceleration forces are shown
graphically (in g) in the form of a circular diagram.
The maximum occurring longitudinal and lateral
acceleration forces are displayed (in g) in the
“Maximum g-force” sub-menu.
The values can be reset via the menu item “Reset”
(illustration).
1. “G-forces” main menu
2. Confirm “Maximum g-force”.
3. Select “Reset”
and confirm.

Vehicle Settings on the Resetting to factory settings 1. Main menu “Vehicle”

Multi-Function Display All settings made in the multi-function display can > “Settings”
be reset to the factory settings: > “Display”
Different settings can be adjusted in the multi-
function display on the instrument panel 2. Select “Menu scope”
depending on the vehicle equipment. Information and confirm.
On vehicles with memory, the settings are stored All personal settings that have already been stored 3. Select the desired main menu item.
on the vehicle key or the person buttons in the will be lost as a result of resetting to factory
driver’s door. settings. 4. Confirm your selection.
For information on the memory: Menu item is displayed.
f Please see the chapter “STORING PERSONAL 1. Main menu “Vehicle” Menu item is hidden.
SETTINGS” on page 129. > “Settings”
Adapting display contents of audio main
Selecting settings menu 2. Select “Fact. settings” menu
and confirm. In the audio main menu, you can display either a
> “Settings” 3. Select “Yes” list of all radio stations currently within range or a
and confirm and confirm. list of all stored radio stations.
Adapting appearance of multi-function 1. Main menu “Vehicle”

Selecting setting options or activating > “Settings”
vehicle functions display
> “Display”
A symbol positioned in front of a setting option The contents and appearance of the multi-function
indicates whether the option is selected or a display can be adapted individually. 2. Select “Audio”
vehicle function is activated. and confirm.
Selecting one of several options > “Settings” 3. Select the desired display contents
> “Display” and confirm.
Option is selected.
Option is not selected. and confirm.
Available display contents:
Activating and deactivating functions Selecting main menu display contents – “Station list”
List of stations currently within range.
Function is activated. Individual elements in the main menu can be
– “Preset list”
Function is deactivated. hidden and shown as required.
List of stored stations.
The main menu items “Vehicle” and “ACC”
cannot be hidden.
.

Adapting display contents in vehicle Available display contents:

information area – “Veh. voltage”
You can select four of the many items of vehicle – “Oil pressure”
information for display in the “Vehicle” menu and – “Oil temperature”
assignment to the display areas 1, 2, 3 and 4. – “Coolant temp.” – Coolant temperature
– “Fuel Range”
1. Main menu “Vehicle” – “Dst: Arrival” – Arrival time at destination
> “Settings” – “Int: Arrival” – Arrival time at intermediate
> “Display” destination
2. Select “Vehicle menu” “Dst: Trip time” – Driving time to destination
and confirm. – “Int: Trip time” – Driving time to intermediate
destination
3. Select – “Compass”
“Field 1:” or – “GPS height”
“Field 2:” or – “Time”
“Field 3:” or – “Date”.
“Field 4:” – “Station/Track” – Current radio station/
and confirm. music track Example configuration of multi-function display
4. Select the desired display contents – “Phone info” – Network strength/network information area
and confirm. name A - Coolant temperature gauge
– “Speed limit” B - Engine oil temperature gauge
– “Blank line” – Line remains empty C - Engine oil pressure gauge
A – Coolant temperature gauge
Information If the cooling system is in any way faulty, consult
an authorized Porsche dealer.
One item of vehicle information cannot be
Bar in left area – engine cold
f Avoid high engine speeds and heavy engine
assigned to several display areas.
loading.
Bar in center area – normal operating
temperature
The bar may move up to the red area when the
engine is under heavy load and the outside
temperature is high.

Coolant temperature warning f Add coolant. C – Engine oil pressure gauge

If the coolant temperature is too high, the If the coolant level is low, warning indicators may The oil pressure is controlled as required and
temperature gauge moves to the maximum mark light up if the vehicle tilts at an extreme angle (e.g. should be at least 51 psi (3.5 bar) at an engine
and the warning message “Engine too hot Park steep slopes) or generates high lateral speed of 5,000 rpm.
vehicle to cool down” appears on the multi- acceleration while travelling round long bends The engine oil pressure varies depending on the
function display in the instrument panel. (e.g. driving in circles). If the warnings do not engine speed, oil temperature and engine load.
f Switch the engine off and let it cool. disappear once the vehicle has assumed “normal” If oil pressure drops abruptly and a message
f Check radiators and air guides in front end of operating state, check the coolant level. is displayed on the multi-function display
vehicle for obstructions. f Please see the chapter “CHECKING THE when the engine is running or while driving:
f Check the coolant level. COOLANT LEVEL AND ADDING COOLANT” f Stop immediately in a suitable place.
Top up with coolant if necessary. on page 222. f Switch off the engine.
f Have the fault corrected. f Please see the chapter “OVERVIEW OF f Check whether there is an obvious oil leak on
f Please see the chapter “CHECKING THE WARNING AND INFORMATION MESSAGES” or under the car.
COOLANT LEVEL AND ADDING COOLANT” on page 116. f Select “Oil level” on the multi-function display.
on page 222. f Please see the chapter “DISPLAY AND
f Please see the chapter “OVERVIEW OF NOTICE
MEASUREMENT OF THE ENGINE OIL LEVEL”
WARNING AND INFORMATION MESSAGES” Risk of engine damage. on page 88.
on page 116. f Do not continue driving if the warning persists f Add engine oil if necessary.
even when the engine coolant level is correct.
Information f Have the fault corrected. NOTICE
To prevent excessive temperatures, the cooling We recommend that you get an authorized Risk of engine damage.
air ducts must not be obstructed by covering Porsche dealer to do this work as they have f Do not continue driving if there is an obvious oil
them (e.g. with film, “stone guards“, etc.). trained workshop personnel and the necessary leak.
parts and tools. f Do not continue driving if the warning message
Coolant level warning appears even when the oil level is correct.
At engine temperatures below 140 °F (60 °C): B – Engine oil temperature gauge f Have the fault corrected.
A low coolant level is indicated by the warning A warning message will appear on the multi- We recommend that you get an authorized
message “Refill coolant Observe engine function display in the instrument panel if the Porsche dealer to do this work as they have
temperature” on the multi-function display in the engine oil temperature is too high. trained workshop personnel and the necessary
instrument panel. f Reduce engine speed and engine load parts and tools.
f Add coolant. immediately if the red zone is reached.
At engine temperatures above 140 °F (60 °C): For information on warning messages on the multi-
A low coolant level is indicated by the warning function display:
message “Refill coolant immediately Please see the chapter “OVERVIEW OF WARNING
Do not drive on” on the multi-function display in AND INFORMATION MESSAGES” on page 116.
the instrument panel. The temperature gauge
moves to the maximum mark.
f Switch engine off and let it cool.

Displaying PCM information on the multi- Adapting fuel gauge Adjusting display brightness
function display The fuel range can be shown or hidden on the fuel The brightness of the multi-function display can be
You can configure the multi-function display to gauge (upper line). adjusted to suit individual requirements.
temporarily display different items of information
relating to Porsche Communication Management 1. Main menu “Vehicle” 1. Main menu “Vehicle”
(PCM). > “Settings” > “Settings”
> “Display” > “Display”
2. Select “Upper line” 2. Select “Brightness”
> “Settings”
and confirm. and confirm.
> “Display”
3. Select display 3. Select the desired brightness
2. Select “PCM display”
contents and confirm. and confirm.
and confirm.
3. Select desired PCM Available display content:
information. – “Fuel Range”
4. Confirm your selection. Adapting status area

Information is displayed. You can assign the current time and/or outside
Information is not displayed. temperature to the status area in the multi-function
display.
Available PCM information:
– “Map info”
> “Settings”
Navigation map appears automatically when
> “Display”
navigation information is available.
– “Phone info” 2. Select “Lower line”
Information on incoming and outgoing calls is and confirm.
displayed.
3. Select the desired display contents
– “Voice control”
and confirm.
Help text appears when the voice control
button is pressed. Available display contents:
– “Arrow info” – “Time”
Navigation arrow appears automatically when – “Temperature”
navigation information is available. – “Time & Temp.”
– “Speed limit”
Speed limits marked on the map in the
navigation system are displayed.

Light and visibility settings Adjusting off delay for Welcome Home and 3. Confirm your selection.
The exterior lights, interior lighting and visual aids Entry functions
Interior lights are activated.
for reversing the vehicle can be adapted The off delay of the Welcome Home and Entry Interior lights are deactivated.
individually. functions can be adapted individually.
1. Main menu: Select “Vehicle” 1. Main menu “Vehicle” Adjusting brightness of orientation lighting
> “Settings” > “Settings” The brightness of the orientation lighting can be
> “Light & Visibility” > “Light & Visibility” adapted individually.
and confirm. > “Exterior lights”
2. Select “Fade-out” > “Settings”
Adjusting exterior lights
and confirm. > “Light & Visibility”
You can adapt the exterior light functions on the
3. Select the desired off delay > “Interior lights”
vehicle e.g. the dynamic high beam and off delays
of the Welcome Home and Entry functions in the and confirm. 2. Select “Orientation”
“Exterior lights” menu. and confirm.
Adjusting interior lights
1. Main menu: Select “Vehicle” Interior light functions on the vehicle can be 3. Select the desired brightness
> “Settings” adapted individually in the “Interior lights” menu. and confirm.
> “Light & Visibility”
1. Main menu: Select “Vehicle” Ambient lighting
> “Exterior lights”
and confirm. > “Settings” The brightness of the ambient lighting can be
> “Light & Visibility” adapted individually.
Activating and deactivating High Beam > “Interior lights”
Assistant and confirm.
> “Settings”
High Beam Assistant can be activated and > “Light & Visibility”
Activating or deactivating interior lights
deactivated. The settings remain stored when the > “Interior lights”
when the door is opened (depending on
ignition is switched on and off.
equipment) 2. Select “Ambient light”
1. Main menu: Select “Vehicle” You can configure the interior lights to be switched and confirm.
> “Settings” on when the door is opened.
3. Select the desired brightness
1. Main menu “Vehicle” and confirm.
> “Exterior lights”
> “Settings”
2. Select “High beam assist.” > “Light & Visibility”
3. Confirm your selection. > “Interior lights”
High Beam Assistant is activated. 2. Select
High Beam Assistant is deactivated. “by opening door”

Setting interior lighting off delay Adjusting reversing options Locking settings
The off delay for the lighting in the passenger You can configure the exterior mirror to lower The locking and unlocking settings on the vehicle
compartment after closing the vehicle doors can automatically when reverse gear is engaged. can be adjusted.
be adapted individually. The Easy Entry function can be switched on and
1. Main menu: Select “Vehicle” off.
> “Settings”
> “Settings”
> “Light & Visibility” 1. Main menu: Select “Vehicle”
> “Revers. opt.” > “Settings”
> “Interior lights”
and confirm. > “Locking”
2. Select “Fade-out” and confirm.
and confirm. Lowering exterior mirror on passenger's side
when parking Setting door unlocking
3. Select the desired off delay
You can configure the exterior mirror on the You can configure specific doors to unlock when
and confirm.
passenger's side to tilt downwards automatically the vehicle is unlocked.
when reverse gear is engaged to provide a better
Activating and deactivating rain sensor 1. Main menu “Vehicle”
view of the kerb.
operation > “Settings”
You can configure the windshield wiper to adjust 1. Main menu: Select “Vehicle” > “Locking”
the wiper speed automatically when it is raining. > “Settings”
2. Select “Door unlock”
1. Main menu “Vehicle” and confirm.
> “Revers. opt.”
> “Settings” and confirm. 3. Select the desired setting
> “Light & Visibility” and confirm.
> “Wiper” 2. Select
“Lowering mirr.”. Available setting options:
2. Select “Rain sensor”
3. Confirm your selection. – “All doors”
and confirm.
Exterior mirror is lowered. All doors are unlocked when the vehicle is
3. Select the desired setting unlocked.
Exterior mirror is not lowered.
and confirm. – “Driver’s door”
The driver’s door is unlocked when the vehicle
Available setting options: is unlocked.
– “Automatic”
The wiper speed is automatically adjusted.
– “Manual”
The wiper speed must be manually adjusted
using the wiper switch.

Setting door locking Switching Auto Memory on and off Setting air conditioning
You can configure the doors to remain unlocked or It is possible to determine whether personal (on vehicles with 2-zone air conditioning)
lock automatically after a delay on entering the settings are to be stored automatically on the The automatic air conditioning can be changed
vehicle. vehicle key when locking the vehicle. individually.
1. Main menu “Vehicle” 1. Main menu “Vehicle” 1. Main menu: Select “Vehicle”
> “Settings” > “Settings” > “Settings”
> “Locking” > “Locking” > “Air conditioning”
2. Select “Door lock” 2. Select and confirm.
and confirm. “Auto Memory”.
Adjusting air flow
3. Select the desired setting 3. Confirm your selection. The strength of the air flow and the air quantity can
and confirm. Auto Memory is activated. be adjusted.
Auto Memory is deactivated.
Available setting options: 1. Main menu “Vehicle”
– “Off” For further information on storing and retrieving > “Settings”
The doors are not locked automatically after personal settings: > “Air conditioning”
entering the vehicle. f Please see the chapter “STORING PERSONAL 2. Select “Air flow”
– “After ign. on” SETTINGS” on page 129. and confirm.
The doors are locked automatically when the
ignition is switched on. Folding exterior mirrors in and out 3. Select the desired setting
– “After drive-off” automatically and confirm.
The doors are locked automatically after You can configure the exterior mirrors to fold in
driving off. automatically when the vehicle is locked. Available setting options:
– “Soft”
Switching Comfort Entry on and off 1. Main menu: Select “Vehicle” – “Normal”
You can configure the driver’s seat and steering > “Settings” – “Strong”
wheel to move back automatically and allow the > “Locking”
driver to get in and out of the vehicle more easily. 2. Select “Mirror retract”.
1. Main menu “Vehicle” 3. Confirm your selection.
> “Settings” Exterior mirrors are folded in.
> “Locking” Exterior mirrors are not folded in.
2. Select
“Comfort Entry”.
3. Confirm your selection.
Comfort Entry is activated.
Comfort Entry is deactivated.

Switching extended ventilation panel Setting date and time Displaying GPS time
on and off The date and time displays on the vehicle can be The time can be synchronised via the GPS signal
The extended ventilation panel on top of the adjusted individually. and displayed.
dashboard can be switched on or off.
1. Main menu “Vehicle” Information > “Settings”
> “Settings” On vehicles with Porsche Communication > “Date & Time”
> “Air conditioning” Management (PCM), the date and time are set and > “Time”
2. Select synchronised automatically by satellite navigation 2. Select
“Vent. panel”. signals (GPS). “GPS time”
Some setting options may be temporarily
3. Confirm your selection. unavailable, depending on satellite signal 3. Confirm your selection.
Ventilation panel is activated. reception. Time synchronised with GPS.
Ventilation panel is deactivated. Time not synchronised with GPS.
Switching automatic air-recirculation mode Setting the time format
> “Settings”
on/off The time can be displayed in 12-hour or 24-hour
> “Date & Time”
You can configure the fresh air supply to adjust and confirm. format.
automatically to the air quality.
Setting the time 1. Main menu “Vehicle”
1. Main menu “Vehicle” > “Settings”
The time, time format and time zone can be set in
> “Settings” > “Date & Time”
the “Time” menu.
> “Air conditioning” > “Time”
2. Select 1. Main menu: Select “Vehicle” 2. Select “Format”
“Auto air circ.“. > “Settings” and confirm.
> “Date & Time”
3. Confirm your selection. > “Time” 3. Select the desired setting
Automatic air-recirculation mode and confirm. and confirm.
is activated
Available setting options:
Automatic air-recirculation mode
– “12h”
is deactivated
– “24h”

Setting current time Setting the date Setting the current date
On vehicles without Porsche Communication The date and date format can be changed in the The day, month and year can be set individually on
Management (PCM), the hours and minutes can be “Date” menu. vehicles without the navigation module.
set separately when setting the time.
1. Main menu: Select “Vehicle” 1. Main menu: Select “Vehicle”
1. Main menu “Vehicle” > “Settings” > “Settings”
> “Settings” > “Date & Time” > “Date & Time”
> “Date & Time” > “Date” > “Date”
> “Time” and confirm. and confirm.
2. Select Setting the date format 2. Select
“Hour/Minute” “Date”.
The date format can be adjusted.
3. Set the desired time 3. Set the desired date
and confirm. 1. Main menu “Vehicle” and confirm.
> “Settings”
Setting time zone > “Date & Time” Setting Daylight Saving Time
The time zone of the vehicle clock can be set > “Date” The vehicle clock can be configured to change to
individually on vehicles with Porsche 2. Select “Format” Daylight Saving Time (DST).
Communication Management (PCM). and confirm.
1. Main menu “Vehicle” 3. Select the desired setting > “Settings”
> “Settings” and confirm. > “Date & Time”
> “Date & Time”
Available setting options: 2. Select
> “Time”
– “DD.MM.YYYY” “DST (+01:00)”
2. Select “Zone” – “MM/DD/YYYY” 3. Confirm your selection.
and confirm. – “YYYY/MM/DD” Daylight Saving Time is activated.
3. Select the desired time zone Daylight Saving Time is deactivated.
and confirm.

Displaying time in stopwatch on dashboard Setting speedometer units Setting unit for Tire Pressure Monitoring
You can configure the stopwatch on the The units of the speed and distance information on System display
dashboard to display the time. the speedometer can be adjusted. The measurement unit for the Tire Pressure
Monitoring System display can be changed.
1. Main menu “Vehicle” 1. Main menu “Vehicle”
> “Settings” > “Settings” 1. Main menu “Vehicle”
> “Date & Time” > “Units” > “Settings”
> “Units”
2. Select 2. Select
“Time – Chrono” “Speedometer”. 2. Select
“TPMS”.
3. Confirm your selection. 3. Select the desired setting
Time is displayed. and confirm. 3. Select the desired setting
Time is not displayed. and confirm.
Setting units – “km / km/h” Available setting options:
– “Miles / mph” – “bar”
You can select the units of measurement for
– “psi”
vehicle displays such as the speed on the digital Setting unit for temperature gauges
speedometer in the instrument panel, the The measurement unit for temperature gauges Setting unit for fuel consumption display
temperature gauge in the air-conditioning displays can be changed. The unit can be set for the fuel consumption
and the tire pressure display on the multi-function display.
display. 1. Main menu “Vehicle”
> “Settings” 1. Main menu “Vehicle”
1. Main menu: Select “Vehicle” > “Units” > “Settings”
> “Settings” > “Units”
2. Select
> “Units”
“Temperature” 2. Select
and confirm.
“Consumpt.”.
3. Select the desired setting
and confirm. 3. Select the desired setting
and confirm.
– “°C” Available setting options:
– “°F” – “l/100km”
– “MPG (US)”
– “MPG (UK)”
– “km/l”

Changing the language Adjusting volume of warning and Changing button assignment on multi-
The language of the display text on the multi- information tones function steering wheel
function display can be changed. The volume of the warning tones and ParkAssist The ◊ button on the multi-function steering wheel
information tones can be adjusted. can be individually assigned the desired functions
1. Main menu “Vehicle” in the multi-function display or PCM/CDR.
> “Settings” Adjusting ParkAssist volume
> “Language” The volume of the ParkAssist information tones
2. Select the desired language can be adjusted.
> “Settings”
and confirm. 1. Main menu “Vehicle” > “Steering wheel op.”
> “Settings” 2. Select “◊ button”
> “Volume” and confirm.
2. Select 3. Select “PCM function” or
“ParkAssist”. “Cluster function”
3. Select the desired setting and confirm.
and confirm. 4. Select the relevant function assignment
and confirm.
– “Loud”
– “Medium” Available PCM functions:
– “Low” – “Source change”
Change audio source.
Adjusting volume of warning tones – “Voice control”
The volume of the warning tones can be adjusted Activate voice control.
individually. – “Dri. instr. (Rep)”
Repeat voice instruction from the navigation
system.
> “Settings”
– “Station/track <”
> “Volume”
Previous radio station/title.
2. Select – “Station/track >”
“Warn. tones”. Next radio station/track.
3. Select the desired setting – “Map”
and confirm. Display navigation map in PCM.
– “Menu change”
Available setting options: Change main menu area.
– “Loud”
– “Medium”
– “Low”

Available instrument cluster functions: Assistance systems Prewarning on

– “Start/Stop Chr.” The latent and prewarning functions are switched
Active Safe (PAS)
Start/stop timing. off by default. The acute warning function is
– “Vehicle menu” The Porsche “Active Safe” functions can be
active.
Display vehicle menu. completely or partly disabled.
Latent and advance warnings can be activated
– “Trip menu” The settings remain stored when the ignition is
under “Prewarning on”.
Display trip menu. switched on and off.
– “TPMS menu” 1. Select “Vehicle”
1. Select “Vehicle”
Display TPMS menu. > “Settings”
> “Settings”
– “Chrono menu” > “Assist. systems”
> “Assist. systems”
Display Chrono menu. > “Active Safe (PAS)”
> “Active Safe (PAS)”
– “Audio menu” and confirm. 2. Select “Prewarning on”.
Display audio menu.
– “Phone menu” System on 3. Confirm selection.
Display phone menu. Prewarning is switched on.
All Porsche “Active Safe” functions can be
– “Navi menu” enabled/disabled using “System on”. Prewarning is switched off.
Display navigation menu.
– “Map menu” 1. Select “Vehicle”
Display navigation map on the multi-function > “Settings”
display. > “Assist. systems”
> “Active Safe (PAS)”
2. Select “System on”.
3. Confirm selection.
Active Safe is switched on.
Active Safe is switched off.
When all Porsche “Active Safe” functions

are switched off, the gray symbol
appears at the bottom of the multi-
function display.

Overview of Warning and Information Messages

If a warning message appears, always refer to the corresponding sections in this Owner’s Manual.
Warning messages are issued only if all measurement prerequisites are met.
Therefore, check all fluid levels regularly – in particular, always check the engine oil level before refuelling.
Warning and information message categories
Red System failure or warning
f Visit or consult an authorized Porsche dealer immediately.
Yellow fault or system failure warning
f Visit an authorized Porsche dealer at the next opportunity.
White Information/message
f Visit an authorized Porsche dealer at the next opportunity or remedy yourself.
Light in Warning and information message in the Meaning/Action required
instrument multi-function display
panel
Oil press. too low Stop immediately in a suitable place and switch engine off. Do not continue driving.
Park vehicle Select “Oil measurement” on the multi-function display. Add engine oil if necessary.
safely Do not continue driving if the warning message is displayed despite the oil level being correct.
Have the fault corrected at an authorized Porsche dealer.
Oil pressure Have the fault corrected at an authorized Porsche dealer.
measurement fault
Driving permitted
Consult a workshop
Oil temperature too high Switch engine off and let it cool. Check oil level and, if necessary, add oil.
Reduce load
Oil temperature Have the fault corrected at an authorized Porsche dealer.
indicator fault
Consult a workshop
Driving permitted
Oil level Have the fault corrected at an authorized Porsche dealer.
measurement fault
Consult a workshop
Driving permitted
No inform. / oil The oil level can be checked after waiting for approx. 1 minute with the vehicle parked on a level surface
level available and the engine at operating temperature. If the rear luggage compartment lid is opened when the engine
now is cold (e.g. to top up engine oil), the oil level cannot be displayed for a certain time.


panel
Oil level minimum Top up engine oil immediately.
reached
Refill oil
Oil level below min. Top up engine oil immediately.
Refill oil at once
Do not drive on
Oil level Visit an authorized Porsche dealer at the next opportunity and have the oil drained to the correct level.
above maximum
Consult a workshop
Driving permitted
Gauge moves to Engine too hot Coolant or engine oil temperature is too high.
maximum mark Park vehicle to cool down Switch off engine and let it cool.
Check coolant or engine oil level. If necessary, top up coolant / engine oil.
Refill coolant Check coolant level. Add coolant if necessary.
Observe
engine temperature
Gauge moves to Refill coolant Switch engine off and let it cool.
maximum mark immediately Check coolant level. Add coolant if necessary.
Do not drive on
Cooling system Have the fault corrected at an authorized Porsche dealer.
fault
Consult a workshop
Service required
Coolant temp Have the fault corrected at an authorized Porsche dealer.
indicator fault
Driving permitted
Consult a workshop
Engine fan failure Have the fault corrected at an authorized Porsche dealer.
Avoid full load
Driving permitted
Generator fault Stop in a suitable place and switch engine off.
Park vehicle Do not continue driving.
safely Have the fault corrected at an authorized Porsche dealer.
Low battery Start the engine immediately so that the battery can be charged.
Start the engine and run for
extended period


panel
Low battery The power supply to various comfort features is deactivated to prevent the battery from discharging.
Consumption off
Battery protection was The power supply to various features was deactivated during parking to prevent the battery from
active during parking discharging.
Battery function Consult an authorized Porsche dealer.
restricted
Consult a workshop
Reduced power Consult an authorized Porsche dealer.
Driving permitted
Consult a workshop
Engine control fault Have the fault corrected at an authorized Porsche dealer.
Consult a workshop
Driving permitted
Please start engine manually Start engine manually at the ignition.
Please To prevent the battery from discharging, switch off the ignition when leaving the vehicle after the engine
switch off was stopped automatically.
the ignition
Display of Engage gear selector PDK transmission:
selector-lever properly Selector lever may be positioned between two settings.
position flashes Engage selector lever properly.
Move gear lever to position P PDK transmission:
Move gear lever to position P before removing key from ignition lock or stopping and securing the
vehicle.
Move gear lever to P or N PDK transmission:
Engine can only be started in selector-lever position P or N.
Activate brake PDK transmission:
Apply the footbrake when starting.
Display of Transm. fault Restricted gearshift comfort, reverse gear not available.
selector-lever Poss. no R gear Have the fault corrected at an authorized Porsche dealer.
position flashes Possible to drive on
Display of Transm. failure No selector-lever position is displayed on the instrument panel.
selector-lever Park vehicle Vehicle can be driven only until it comes to a stop.
position flashes safely It is not possible to continue driving. Stop the vehicle immediately in a suitable place.
Read the instructions in the section “Towing”. Have the fault corrected at an authorized Porsche dealer.


panel
Drive “Warning jerks” can be felt when driving off and the engine power may be restricted.
temperature too high Do not use the accelerator to hold the vehicle, e.g. on a hill. Hold the vehicle with the brake.
Reduce load Reduce engine load. Stop the vehicle in a suitable place if possible.
Allow the engine to run in selector-lever position P or N until the warning disappears.
Transmission Transmission temperature too high.
overheated Park vehicle to Stop the vehicle at a suitable place, switch off engine and allow it to cool down.
cooling Have the fault corrected at an authorized Porsche dealer.
Press clutch Manual transmission:
Depress clutch pedal when starting.
Brake fluid level Stop immediately in a suitable place. Do not continue driving.
Park vehicle Have the fault corrected at an authorized Porsche dealer.
safely
Brake distribution fault Stop immediately in a suitable place. Do not continue driving.
Park vehicle safely Have the fault corrected at an authorized Porsche dealer.
Brake cooling faulty Brake temperature too high.

Stop the vehicle at a suitable place, switch off engine and allow the brake to cool down.
ABS/PSM failure Have the fault corrected at an authorized Porsche dealer.

Adapted driving permitted
Wear limit Have brake pads replaced immediately.

Change brake pads Consult an authorized Porsche dealer.
Driving permitted
Release Pull the electric parking brake switch.

parking brake
flashes
Press brake pedal Press the brake pedal before releasing the electric parking brake.


panel
Fault Have the fault corrected at an authorized Porsche dealer.
parking brake
Electric Have the fault corrected at an authorized Porsche dealer.

parking brake in
service mode
Emergency braking Emergency braking function of the electric parking brake active.
flashes
PSM system error Stop the vehicle in a suitable place.
Park Do not continue driving.
vehicle safely Have the fault corrected immediately at an authorized Porsche dealer.
PSM failure Have the fault corrected at an authorized Porsche dealer.

Consult a workshop
Adapted driving permitted
PSM off Porsche Stability Management was switched off.
PSM on Porsche Stability Management was switched on.
PSM Porsche Stability Management is in diagnostic test mode.

in diagnosis
flashes
Spoiler loss Driving stability is impaired. Reduce speed and adjust driving style.
Reduce Have the fault corrected at an authorized Porsche dealer.
speed


panel
Fuel gauge Mind remaining distance Refuel at the next opportunity.
warning light on
tank display
service necessary
Check Position tank cap correctly and screw on until it locks securely.
tank cap
Refill washer fluid
Fasten seat belt All vehicle occupants must fasten their safety belts.
Loss of airbag Have the fault corrected at an authorized Porsche dealer.

Pilot lamp
Service required
Passenger airbag The passenger airbag is switched on/off.
on/off
Power steering fail. Have the fault corrected at an authorized Porsche dealer.
Increased
effort
Driving permitted
Power steering Steering assistance is temporarily reduced.
restricted Consult an authorized Porsche dealer.
Consult a workshop
Driving permitted
Remove key
from ignition
Remove key from trunk
Key not found / Make sure that you have the driver's key with you.
Key malfunction
Change key position
Replace ignition key battery Replace the battery in the driver's key.
Fault of Porsche Entry&Drive Have the fault corrected at an authorized Porsche dealer.


panel
Multiple keys recognized in Information message:
vehicle Several driver's keys in the vehicle, e.g. in the possession of a passenger.
Close doors to lock vehicle Close all doors and luggage compartment lids before locking the vehicle.
Operating device: turn left, No key detected in the vehicle, ignition cannot be switched on or engine cannot be started.
pull off, insert key Turn control unit back to ignition lock position 0 and remove it from the ignition lock.
Switch the ignition on with the ignition key (not emergency key).
PADM Have the fault corrected at an authorized Porsche dealer.
deactivated
Service required
Driving permitted
Chassis system fault Vehicle handling may be affected. Adapt your speed to the changed conditions.
Adapted driving permitted Have the fault corrected at an authorized Porsche dealer.
Chassis system failure Stop immediately in a suitable place. Do not drive off or continue driving.
Check tires Tire Pressure Monitoring System detects a pressure loss of more than 20% below the required pressure
or more than 7 psi (0.5 bar) at a speed of less than 100 mph (160 km/h), more than 6 psi (0.4 bar) at
a speed greater than 100 mph (160 km/h) and more than 4 psi (0.3 bar) at a speed greater than
165 mph (270 km/h).
Stop in a suitable place and check the tires indicated for damage.
If necessary, fill in tire sealant and set the correct tire pressure.
Fill air Tire Pressure Monitoring System detects a pressure loss of more than 4 psi (0.3 bar).
Correct the tire pressure at the next opportunity.
Restricted monitoring Fault on one or both wheel transmitters.
No tire pressure monitoring Tire Pressure Monitoring System requires a certain amount of time to learn the wheels.
System is learning During this time, the current tire pressures are not available on the multi-function display.
Tire pressure monitoring Fault in Tire Pressure Monitoring System. Tire pressure is not monitored.
fault Have the fault corrected at an authorized Porsche dealer.
Service required
Tire pressure monitoring Temporary fault in the Tire Pressure Monitoring System.
temporarily deactivated Tire pressure is not monitored.


panel
Tire change? The tire settings on the multi-function display must be updated after changing a wheel.
Update settings
Tire pressure Speed too high for actual pressure. Inflate tire to the required pressure.
Reduce speed
Comfort pressure Top speed for the preset comfort pressure exceeded.
Reduce speed
Signal light Driving light/side light on.
switched on
Parking light on Left/right parking light on.
Example: The reported light is faulty.

Check front left indicator Check bulb.
Adaptive headlight Have the fault corrected at an authorized Porsche dealer.
control defective
flashes Service required
Driving light control Have the fault corrected at an authorized Porsche dealer.
defective
lights up Service required
Headlight range regulation Adjust your speed and driving style. Have the fault corrected at an authorized Porsche dealer.
defective
Service required
High beam assistant Have the fault corrected at an authorized Porsche dealer.
not available
Rain/light sensor defective Switch on wipers/light manually. Have the fault corrected at an authorized Porsche dealer.
Service required
Headlight control defective Have the fault corrected at an authorized Porsche dealer.
Service required
flashes
High beam assis Have the fault corrected at an authorized Porsche dealer.
unavailable
Operate full
beam manually


panel
High beam assistant off Have the fault corrected at an authorized Porsche dealer.
No camera view
Clean if necessary
PDLS+ currently restricted, PDLS+ temporarily unavailable due to camera fault.
no camera view
Clean sensor?
PDLS+ fault Have the fault corrected at an authorized Porsche dealer.
Operate high beam
manually
Service required
Assistance sys Have the fault corrected at an authorized Porsche dealer.
camera unavailable
Service required
Front view camera Assistance systems/camera temporarily unavailable due to weather conditions or dirt on the
restricted windscreen. Clean windshield if necessary.
Clean screen?
Wiper defective Have the fault corrected at an authorized Porsche dealer.
Consult a workshop
Doors/lids open Close door/lid indicated.
Example
Launch Control activated Launch Control is activated.
System fault One or more electrical systems may have failed.

Driving permitted Adjust your speed and driving style.
Consult a workshop Have the fault corrected at an authorized Porsche dealer.
Instrument cluster/ Turn signals tones, acoustic warnings and distance signals (e.g. for ParkAssist) are not available.
Front Park Assist Please remember this, e.g. when parking. Have the fault corrected at an authorized Porsche dealer.
audio fault
Service required
Parking Assistant Acoustic warning and distance signals for ParkAssist are not available.
audio fault Please remember this, e.g. when parking. Have the fault corrected at an authorized Porsche dealer.
Service
required
ParkAssist


panel
Distance Insufficient distance from vehicle in front.
Please brake
ACC/PAS unavailable Adaptive cruise control (ACC): Sensor at the front of the vehicle may be adversely affected by dirt, snow,
Service required ice or adverse weather conditions. Adjust your speed and driving style.
Have the adaptive cruise control (ACC) or Porsche “Active Safe” fault rectified at an authorized Porsche
dealer.
Limit 1/2 exceeded Selected speed limit 1 or 2 exceeded.
VTS stepped-up, Enter code using the remote keypad and confirm your entry to deactivate the PVTS
enter code (Porsche Vehicle Tracking System).
and acknowledge
VTS stepped-up, Enter code using the remote keypad and confirm your entry to deactivate the PVTS
enter code within (Porsche Vehicle Tracking System).
X min.
Driver Card Activate driver card again using the key. Contact control centre if necessary.
not detected
Driver Card The battery capacity is too low. Replace driver card battery.
battery empty,
please replace
Remote keypad The battery capacity is too low. Replace remote keypad battery.
battery empty,
please replace
Code wrong, The code you entered using the numeric keys on the remote keypad is incorrect. Enter the code again
please re-insert and confirm your entry in order to deactivate the PVTS (Porsche Vehicle Tracking System).
Theft attempt recognized, Contact Security Operating Center.
VTS alarm active
Fault of the Have the fault corrected at an authorized Porsche dealer.
Warning light on
engine control system
the coolant
temperature
gauge flashes
Outside temp. display Have the fault corrected at an authorized Porsche dealer.
defective
Service required
Decrease speed Open or close convertible top fully.
Move roof cover to end
position


panel
Convertible hood is opening/ Message goes out in limit position.
closing
Roof cover in service
position
Car not ready
Roof control fault Have the fault corrected at an authorized Porsche dealer.
Service required
Example: Service reminder.
Service in xxx km Bring the vehicle in for service no later than after the distance/time shown has elapsed.
The intervals in the “Maintenance” booklet are decisive however.

Personal Settings
Brief Overview – Personal Settings.............128
Storing personal settings.............................129
Personal Settings 127

Brief Overview – Personal Settings

information provided under “PERSONAL
SETTINGS”.
Warnings, in particular, are not replaced by this
brief overview.
Storing settings automatically on the key Storing settings manually on the buttons
(with “Auto Memory” function activated) in the driver's door
Where can I store/ Which settings can I store/retrieve with the memory package?
retrieve the settings?
Automatic when locking/unlocking the Ergonomic settings

vehicle door via the vehicle key. – Driver’s seat, exterior mirrors, electric steering column
Comfort settings
– Air conditioning, multi-function display and Porsche Communication Management (PCM)
Prerequisite: The “Auto Memory“ function must be activated in the multi-function display.
f Please see the chapter “SWITCHING AUTO MEMORY ON AND OFF” on page 110.
Notice: If the “Auto Memory” function is activated, the settings stored on the key or on key button
are overwritten each time the vehicle is locked.
Manually, using buttons 1 and 2. Ergonomic settings

– Driver’s seat, exterior mirrors, passenger's seat, electric steering column
Manually, using key button Ergonomic settings

in the driver's door. – Driver’s seat, exterior mirrors, electric steering column
Comfort settings
– Air conditioning, multi-function display and Porsche Communication Management (PCM)
The settings are stored on key button in the driver’s door and on the vehicle key.
128 Personal Settings

h CAUTION
Retrieving automatic Storing the settings on the vehicle key
settings for seats, Ergonomic and comfort settings can be
mirrors and electric individually assigned to the vehicle keys.
steering column
Parts of the body may be pinched or crushed if the
Information
settings are activated in an uncontrolled manner.
f Automatic retrieval of the settings can be Individual memory information can be stored on a
cancelled by pressing a memory button or any total of 4 vehicle keys. In the case of further
seat adjustment button. vehicle keys, the memory information from key 4
f Do not leave children in the vehicle unattended. is adopted.
Automatic storage through locking of the

Information vehicle.
If the automatic storage function is activated on This function must be activated on the multi-
function display.
f Please see the chapter “SWITCHING AUTO
the multi-function display, the settings will be
automatically stored on the vehicle key when the
vehicle is locked. MEMORY ON AND OFF” on page 110.
– The settings are stored on the vehicle key
Driver's door memory buttons (comfort memory) For information on switching the automatic
being used when the vehicle is locked.
storage function on and off:
Storing personal settings f Please see the chapter “SWITCHING AUTO – On vehicles with Porsche Entry & Drive,
In conjunction with the fully-electric sports seat or settings are stored by pressing the locking
MEMORY ON AND OFF” on page 110.
the adaptive sports seat plus, a memory package button on the door handle.
Regardless of whether the automatic storage
is available. With the memory package, personal function is activated on the multi-function display, In what situation is it useful to activate the
settings can be stored on the vehicle key or on the the settings can be stored on the vehicle key (by “Auto Memory” function?
memory buttons in the driver’s door. pressing key button ) and the memory buttons Each driver uses his or her own key. When locking
Memory package 1 or 2 and retrieved from there. the vehicle, the last selected settings are stored
The memory package includes storage of on the key. When changing drivers, the personal
ergonomic settings for settings can be retrieved via the respective keys.
– driver’s seat
– electric steering column and
– exterior mirrors as well as
comfort settings for
– air conditioning
– multi-function display and
– Porsche Communication Management (PCM).
Personal Settings 129

Retrieving the settings from the Storing settings on buttons 1 and 2

Information vehicle key Ergonomic settings can be individually assigned
If the “Auto Memory” function is activated, the Ergonomic and comfort settings can be to buttons 1 and 2 in the driver’s door.
settings stored manually on the key are individually retrieved from the vehicle key. f The ignition must be switched on.
overwritten each time the vehicle is locked. 1. Press the SET button. The LED in the button
Automatic retrieval through unlocking of the
lights up.
vehicle
Storage by pressing key button in the 2. Press button 1 or 2 or within 10 seconds.
driver’s door The settings are retrieved from the vehicle key 3. The ergonomic settings are stored on the
f The ignition must be switched on. being used when the vehicle is unlocked and the relevant button. Storage is acknowledged
driver's door is opened. acoustically and the LED in the SET button
1. Press the SET button. The LED in the button
lights up. By pressing key button in the driver’s goes out.
door
f Press and hold key button
2. Press key button within 10 seconds.
3. The ergonomic and comfort settings (key- until all Retrieving settings with buttons 1 or 2
specific) are stored. Storage is acknowledged settings are retrieved Retrieve ergonomic settings with buttons 1 or
or 2 in the driver's door.
f With the driver’s door open and the ignition
acoustically and the LED in the SET button
goes out. f Press and hold button 1 or 2 until all settings
switched off, briefly press key button . are retrieved
In what situation is it useful to store the The settings are automatically retrieved. or
f With the driver’s door open and the ignition
settings on key button ?
Why do the settings on key button not
You would like to store/retrieve some of the switched off, briefly press button 1 or 2.
correspond to the ones I have stored?
settings when stationary or during driving and not The settings are automatically retrieved or
only when locking/unlocking the vehicle. Ensure If the “Auto Memory” function is activated in the
that the “Auto Memory” function is deactivated. multi-function display, all the ergonomic and Preventing automatic storage of settings
Otherwise, the settings will be overwritten when comfort settings are stored on the key when on vehicle key when locking
locking the vehicle. locking the vehicle. Settings stored on key This function must be deactivated on the multi-
button are overwritten in the process. function display.
For information on switching the automatic
storage function on and off:
f Please see the chapter “SWITCHING AUTO
MEMORY ON AND OFF” on page 110.
130 Personal Settings

Driving and Driving Safety

Diagnostic Socket .......................................132
Ignition Lock ...............................................132
Starting and Stopping the Engine .................133
Auto Start Stop Function..............................135
Electric Parking Brake .................................137
Brakes .......................................................138
Cruise Control.............................................141
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) ......................142
Car Audio Operation/Tips ............................153
Porsche Communication Management (PCM).155
USB/iPod® and AUX....................................155
Voice Control..............................................156
Manual Transmission, Clutch ........................156
Porsche Doppelkupplung (PDK) ....................157
Selector-lever Positions ..............................159
Reduced Driving Programme .......................164
Transmission and Chassis Control Systems ..165
Porsche Stability Management (PSM) ............166
HOLD Function: Drive-Off Assistant, Standstill
Management ..............................................168
ABS Brake System (Anti-Lock Brake System).170
Management (PASM) ...................................171
Porsche Torque Vectoring (PTV) Functional
Description .................................................172
Dynamic Engine Mounting (PADM) ................172
“Sport” and “Sport Plus” mode .....................172
Sports Exhaust System ...............................174
Retractable Rear Wing .................................175
Driving and Driving Safety 131

Diagnostic Socket
h WARNING Improper interventions
in the vehicle electrical
system
External equipment or devices (e.g. navigation
units, head-up displays, etc.) connected to the
diagnostic socket can impair the function of the
vehicle systems.
f Do not connect any equipment or devices to
the diagnostic socket.
h WARNING Loose equipment/

devices or hanging
cables in the driver's
footwell
Loose equipment/devices or hanging cables in
the driver's footwell can obstruct clearance Ignition Lock Key positions
0 - Initial position
around the pedals or become caught between the The ignition key is inserted into the ignition lock to 1 - Ignition on
pedals when braking or changing direction.
f Do not place any equipment/devices or cables
the right of the light switch at the left of the 2 - Start engine
steering wheel.
in the driver's footwell.
On vehicles with Porsche Entry & Drive, you no Information
longer have to insert the key into the ignition lock, The vehicle battery discharges if the ignition key is
NOTICE but merely keep it with you. The ignition key is left inserted.
The diagnostic socket is for connecting diagnostic replaced by a control unit in the ignition lock,
If the vehicle battery is dead, the key can only be
equipment in qualified specialist workshops. which always remains in the ignition lock, unless
removed from the ignition lock if the emergency
Operating external equipment or devices (e.g. the vehicle is being towed.
operation is performed:
navigation units, head-up displays, etc.) from the The ignition lock has three key positions. f Please see the chapter “EMERGENCY
diagnostic socket when the ignition is switched off OPERATION – UNLOCKING THE IGNITION KEY/
will run down the battery. If the vehicle is parked CONTROL UNIT” on page 26.
for an extended period, the battery can discharge
fully and be damaged (exhaustive discharge).
f Do not connect any equipment or devices to
the diagnostic socket.
132 Driving and Driving Safety

Ignition lock position 0 – Ignition off Emergency operation with Starting and Stopping the Engine
(initial position) Porsche Entry & Drive The immobilizer can be deactivated and
The engine and ignition are off in ignition lock Interference in radio transmission between the the engine started only using an authorized
position 0. The ignition key can be removed in this vehicle and ignition lock or a discharged ignition ignition key.
position. lock battery can disable the Porsche Entry & Drive f Please see the chapter “IMMOBILIZER”
comfort function. on page 197.
Ignition lock position 1 – Ignition on
f Turn ignition key to position 1.
If this happens, the control unit can be removed
h WARNING Exhaust gas
from the ignition lock and the vehicle can be
All electrical equipment can be switched on. The started using the ignition key. Exhaust gas contains colorless and odorless
warning lights on the instrument panel light up for For information on removing the control unit from carbon monoxide (CO), which is toxic even in low
a lamp check.
f Please see the chapter “INSTRUMENT PANEL
the ignition lock: concentrations. Carbon monoxide can cause
f Please see the chapter “EMERGENCY unconsciousness and even death if inhaled.
USA MODELS” on page 78. OPERATION – UNLOCKING THE IGNITION KEY/ f Never start or let the engine running in an
If a load is not switched on for 10 minutes after CONTROL UNIT” on page 26. enclosed, unventilated area. It is not
switching on the ignition, the ignition must be recommended to sit in your car for prolonged
switched on again. periods with the engine on and the car not
Turn the ignition key to ignition lock position 0 moving.
(initial position) first.
The ignition key cannot be removed when the h WARNING Exhaust system fire
ignition is switched on or when the engine has
hazard
been started.
To remove the ignition key:
f Stop the vehicle.
hot when the engine is running. The exhaust
f On vehicles with Porsche Doppelkupplung:
system remains hot for some time after the engine
is turned off.
f Do not park or drive your vehicle where
Move PDK selector lever to position P.
f Switch ignition off.
f Remove the ignition key.
combustible materials, such as dry grass or
leaves, can come into contact with the hot
Ignition lock position 2 – Start engine exhaust system.
f Turn ignition key to ignition lock position 2. f If your car catches on fire for any reason, call
The key is reset automatically from position 2 to the fire department. Do not endanger your life
position 1 when you start the engine. by attempting to put out the fire.

throttle until the engine has reached operating h WARNING

NOTICE Hot exhaust tailpipe
temperature.
An unattended vehicle with a running engine is f If the vehicle battery power is too weak, the The exhaust pipe is hot when the engine is running
potentialy hazardous. If warning lights come on to engine can be started with jump leads. and remains hot for some time after the vehicle is
indicate improper operation, no one would be turned off.
f To prevent injury, make a point of noting where
For information on jump-lead starting:
present to observe the light and turn off the f Please see the chapter “EXTERNAL POWER
engine. your vehicle’s exhaust pipe is, avoid placing
f Never leave the engine idling unattended.
SUPPLY, EMERGENCY STARTING WITH
JUMPER CABLES” on page 247. your legs near the exhaust pipe when loading
and unloading cargo in the rear, and closely
Starting the vehicle supervise children around the vehicle during
f Operate the footbrake.
Information time when the exhaust pipe could be hot.
f Fully depress the clutch pedal and keep it To ensure a good battery charge condition, A hot exhaust pipe can cause painful skin
pressed (vehicles with manual transmission). thereby ensuring that the battery will start the burns.
f Put gearshift lever into neutral or move PDK engine, all electrical loads that are not required
selector lever to the P or N position. should be switched off when the ignition is Radiator fan
f Do not press the accelerator pedal. switched on and when engine revs are low (in
h WARNING
traffic jams, in city traffic or in lines). Radiator fan
The engine control unit will provide the correct
starting mixture. The fan can start running depending on the
f Turn the ignition key or control unit (Porsche Stopping temperature, even with the engine switched off.
Entry & Drive) to ignition lock position 2. f Only remove the ignition key when the vehicle f Exercise extreme care that parts of the body,
The starting process is carried out and is stationary. articles of clothing or jewelry do not get caught
completed automatically as soon as ignition f Only switch the ignition off when the vehicle is in the radiator fan.
lock position 2 (start engine) is reached. stationary, as there is no power steering and f Exercise extreme caution when working in the
The ignition key or control unit is reset brake booster assistance when the engine is area of the radiator fans.
automatically to ignition lock position 1 switched off.
f When leaving the vehicle, always remove the For information on radiator fans:
(ignition on).
f Please see the chapter “RADIATOR FAN,
f Do not operate the starter for more than ignition key, apply the electric parking brake
ENGINE COMPARTMENT BLOWERS”
approx. 10 seconds. If necessary, repeat the and engage selector-lever position P.
on page 201.
starting procedure after a pause of approx. The control unit always remains in the ignition
10 seconds. Turn the ignition key back to lock on vehicles with Porsche Entry & Drive.
ignition lock position 0 (initial position) first.
h WARNING Hot engine parts
The first operation of the starter is ended
automatically when the engine starts. Engine components become very hot when the
If the engine does not start, subsequent engine is running.
starter operations will not be ended f Before working on any part in the engine
automatically. compartment, turn the engine off and let it cool
f Do not warm up the engine when stationary. down sufficiently.
Drive off immediately. Avoid high revs and full

Auto Start Stop Function Manual transmission:

Stopping and starting the engine Information
On vehicles with PDK transmission or manual
transmission, the engine stops automatically Stopping The engine will start automatically in certain
when the vehicle is stopped, e.g. at traffic lights situations, e.g. if the vehicle starts rolling, to
The Auto Start Stop function stops the engine
or in a traffic jam. The Auto Start Stop function ensure passenger comfort via air conditioning,
as soon as the vehicle stops moving:
thus helps to save fuel. or if the brake vacuum is reduced.
1. Use the footbrake to stop the vehicle.
The ignition stays on even when the engine 2. The engine will stop if the gearshift lever is in
Starting the engine after leaving the vehicle
switches off automatically. All functions are still neutral and the clutch pedal is no longer
available. depressed. If you leave the vehicle following an automatic
engine stop, in order to open the garage door for
Preconditions for stopping the engine Starting example, an automatic engine start is performed
automatically The Auto Start Stop function starts the engine: if the following prerequisites are met:
– Auto Start Stop function is switched on. f Fully depress the clutch pedal and engage – Selector-lever position P engaged
– Engine compartment lid closed. gear from neutral. – The driver gets back in within 30 seconds
– Driver detected: driver’s safety belt fastened You can drive off normally. – Safety belt fastened
and driver’s door closed. – Selector-lever position D engaged and
– PDK selector lever in position D, N or P or
PDK transmission: – brake released
transmission range 1 or 2 selected
Stopping and starting the engine
If one of these prerequisites is not met, the engine
manually Stopping must be started manually. The message “Please
or gearshift lever in neutral and clutch pedal The Auto Start Stop function stops the engine start engine manually” will appear on the multi-
not depressed. as soon as the vehicle stops moving: function display in the instrument panel.
– Engine, transmission and battery are at 1. Use the footbrake to stop the vehicle. f Please see the chapter “OVERVIEW OF
operating temperature. 2. Keep the footbrake pressed. WARNING AND INFORMATION MESSAGES”
– Vehicle was driven at a speed of more than or on page 116.
approx. 1 mph (2 km/h) for at least Move PDK selector lever to position P.
1.5 seconds since the engine last stopped Starting
automatically.
The Auto Start Stop function starts the engine:
f In PDK selector-lever position D, N or manually
selected transmission range 1 or 2:
Release the footbrake.
or
Press the accelerator.
or
Move PDK selector lever to position R.
You can drive off normally.

Exceptions for the Auto Start Stop Auto Start Stop function display
function Automatic engine stop and restart
The Auto Start Stop function is not available in readiness
the following situations, for example: If the engine was stopped automatically by the
– When Sport mode is activated. Auto Start Stop function and if the driver is
– When PSM is off. detected in the vehicle (driver’s safety belt
– In Maneuvering mode. fastened and driver’s door closed), the indicator
– When A/C MAX mode is activated. light on the multi-function display in the instrument
– When the “Windshield defrost” function is panel will light up green.
active. No engine stop or restart readiness
– At altitudes above approx. 9,843 ft.
(3,000 meters). If the Auto Stop function is not available or if no
– After engaging a gear without actuating the driver is detected in the vehicle after the engine
clutch during automatic stopping of the has stopped automatically (driver’s safety belt not
engine. fastened or driver’s door open), the indicator light
The Auto Start Stop function is available with on the multi-function display in the instrument
limited functionality in the following situations, panel will light up yellow when the vehicle is
for example: Switching Auto Start Stop function and stationary.
– If the air conditioning or passenger coasting mode on and off The Auto Start Stop system has detected that:
compartment heating is operated at a high – At least one precondition for stopping the
Switching off
f Press button .
setting or if the defrost function is run for engine automatically is not met.
long time periods. or
– If the battery charging condition is low. The indicator light on the button lights up.
Automatic stopping of the engine is – There is at least one exception for the Auto
– On upward or downward slopes. Start Stop function.
f Please see the chapter “PRECONDITIONS FOR
– During internal vehicle test procedures, suppressed and coasting mode is switched
e.g. automatic engine checks. off.
STOPPING THE ENGINE AUTOMATICALLY”
– In the case of excessively low exterior or Switching on on page 135.
battery temperature. f Press button . f Please see the chapter “EXCEPTIONS FOR
The indicator light on the button goes out. THE AUTO START STOP FUNCTION”
Information The engine is automatically stopped when the on page 136.
If one of these situations arises after the engine vehicle stops and coasting mode is switched
on.
f Please see the chapter “DRIVING IN COASTING
has stopped automatically, the engine can be
restarted automatically.
MODE” on page 160.

Releasing the parking brake

Information The electric parking brake can only be released
If the indicator light in the multi-function display when the ignition is switched on.
continuously lights up yellow when the vehicle is 1. Press the brake pedal.
stopped and if the engine does not stop regularly 2. Pull switch .
when the vehicle is stopped despite the fact that The brake warning light on the instrument
the preconditions for stopping the engine panel goes out.
automatically are met, have the Auto Start Stop
system checked the next time you visit the Automatic electric parking brake release
workshop. when driver’s intention to drive off is
detected
Fault reporting If the engine is running, the driver’s door is closed
If there is a fault, the warning message and the driver’s safety belt is fastened, it is still
“Start/stop operation deactivated” will appear possible to drive off normally even though the
on the multi-function display in the instrument parking brake is on.
panel. The electric parking brake detects the driver’s
f Have the fault corrected at an authorized intention to drive off and releases automatically.
Porsche dealer. The warning light on the instrument panel
Electric Parking Brake goes out.
The electric parking brake acts on the rear wheels If the driver’s door is not closed or the driver’s
and serves to secure the vehicle while parked. safety belt is not fastened, the electric parking
Applying the parking brake brake will not be released automatically when the
f Press switch
driver attempts to drive off.
.
The message “Release parking brake” appears
The brake warning light on the instrument
on the multi-function display in the instrument
panel lights up.
panel. The brake warning light on the instrument
For information on indicator lights and warning panel and the indicator light on the switch
lights on the instrument panel:
f Please see the chapter “INSTRUMENT PANEL
start to flash.
For information on warning messages on the
USA MODELS” on page 78.
multi-function display:
on page 116.

Emergency braking function Brakes one brake circuit will cause the stopping distance
f Make it a habit to check the operation of your
If the vehicle cannot be stopped by conventional to increase.
braking, you can decelerate sharply and stop the brakes before driving. h WARNING Brake hydraulic failure
vehicle using the electric parking brake.
f Press switch
Keep in mind that the braking distance increases recovery
and keep it pressed. very rapidly as the speed increases. At 60 mph Your vehicle is equipped with an emergency
The brake warning light on the instrument (100 km/h), for example, it is not twice but four function in the extreme event of a complete
panel and the indicator light on the switch times longer than 30 mph (50 km/h). Tire traction hydraulic failure of the brake system. If your brake
start to flash. is also less effective when the roads are wet or pedal goes all the way to the floor, do not pump
The emergency braking function is deactivated slippery.
f Therefore, always maintain a safe distance
the brakes.
f Push the brake pedal down firmly and hold it in
when you release the switch.
from the car in front of you. that position. A mechanical linkage activates
Information the second circuit, and you will be able to bring
Vehicles without Porsche Ceramic
Severe braking. Emergency braking takes place Composite Brake (PCCB) the vehicle to a stop.
with very high braking power. f After bringing your vehicle to a complete stop,
f Only use the emergency braking function in an
Even though the brake disks consist of alloyed
avoid driving the vehicle and instead have it
gray cast iron, they will unavoidably start to
emergency situation. towed to the nearest authorized Porsche
f Do not use the emergency braking function to
corrode if your car is parked for an extended
dealer for repair.
period. The brakes will tend to “rub” as a result.
stop the vehicle when driving normally.
The nature, extent and effects of corrosion
Brake system warning light
depend on the amount of time the vehicle was
Brake warning light USA parked, whether road salt or grit was spread and You can check the functionality of the brake
Brake warning light Canada whether grease-dissolving agents were used in system warning light by switching the ignition to
car washes. the “On” position (position 1) and verifying that the
If the electric parking brake could not be applied
warning light illuminates.
fully when the vehicle is stopped, the brake If the braking comfort is noticeably impaired, we
warning light on the instrument panel starts to recommend having the brake system checked by Brake warning light USA
flash. experts at an authorized Porsche dealer. Brake warning light Canada
For information on warning messages on the multi- Brake system function The warning light in the instrument panel lights up.
function display:
Your Porsche is equipped with a power assisted A message will be displayed on the multi-function
hydraulic dual circuit brake system with disk display of the instrument panel if the brake fluid
WARNING AND INFORMATION MESSAGES” level is too low, or (if the brake pedal travel has
brakes at the front and rear.
on page 116. increased) one of the two brake circuits has failed.
Both circuits function independently. One brake
circuit operates the front left and rear right wheel A greater braking pressure will be required,
and the other operates the front right and rear left stopping distances will be longer and the braking
wheel. behavior will change, particularly in curves.
If one brake circuit has failed, the other will still
operate. However, you will notice an increased
pedal travel when you apply the brakes. Failure of

With correctly adjusted brakes and a correctly h WARNING

h WARNING Riding the brakes Loss of braking power
working brake system, the pedal travel to the
point of brake application should be 1-3/16 in. to f Before descending a steep grade, reduce The brake booster is ready for operation only
1-9/16 in. (30 to 40 mm). Whenever the brake speed and shift the transmission into a lower while the engine is running.
pedal travel exceeds this value, have the brake gear to control speed. If the engine is switched off or there is a defect in
system checked. f Do not “ride the brakes” by resting your foot on the brake booster, much greater force has to be
the pedal when not intending to apply brake applied to the pedal when braking.
Brake pedal pressure. f Vehicles with defective brakes must not
h WARNING Obstruction of brake f Do not hold the pedal down too long or too be towed and must be transported on a flat
often. This could cause the brakes to overheat bed.
pedal
and lose braking power. For information on towing:
Unsuitable or incorrectly fixed floor mats or f Please see the chapter “TOWING”
objects can reduce the travel of the brake pedal or on page 255.
Brake booster
prevent you applying the brake pedal.
f Always check the movement of the brake The brake booster assists braking only when
Brake wear
pedal before driving and make sure that it is the engine is running.
Your car has excellent brakes, but they are still
not obstructed by a floor mat or any other When the car is moving while the engine is not
subject to wear. The rate at which they wear
object. running, or if the brake booster is defective, more
f Secure the floor mat to prevent it from sliding depends on how the brakes are used.
f Have the brake system inspected at the
pressure on the brake pedal is required to bring
into positions that could interfere with the safe the car to a stop.
intervals recommended in your Maintenance
operation of your vehicle. Moisture, road salt or grit on brakes affects
Booklet.
Your authorized Porsche dealer will be glad to braking.
offer you floor mats of the correct size Brakes will dry after a few cautious brake Brake system warning light
including a securing possibility. applications. You can check the functionality of the brake
system warning light by switching the ignition to
h WARNING Wet brakes
the “On” position (position 1) and verifying that the
Information Driving through water may reduce the traction. warning light illuminates.
In case one of the two brake circuits fails, Moisture on brakes from road water, car wash, or Brake wear warning message USA
increased pedal travel is required to bring your a coating of road salt or grit may affect braking
vehicle to a full stop. efficiency. Brake wear warning message
f Cautiously apply brakes to test and dry the Canada
brakes after exposure to road water, etc.
A warning message will be displayed on the multi-
function display of the instrument panel if the
brake pads are worn, excessively.
f Do not continue to operate the vehicle.
Have your authorized Porsche dealer inspect
or replace the brake pads.

For information on warning messages on the h WARNING

f To relieve the brake system on downhill
Wet brakes
multi-purpose display: stretches, change down to a lower gear in
f Please see the chapter “OVERVIEW OF In heavy rain, while driving through water or after good time (engine braking).
WARNING AND INFORMATION MESSAGES” leaving a car wash, the braking action may be If engine braking is insufficient on steep
on page 116. delayed and increased pressure may be required. stretches, operate the footbrake at intervals.
f For this reason, keep further back from the Avoid continuous braking as it overheats the
Brake pads and brake disks vehicle in front and “dry” the brakes by brakes and reduces the braking effect.
Wear on the brake pads and brake disks depends applying them at intervals. Make sure that the For information on brake fluid and checking the
to a great extent on the driving style and the traffic behind you is not affected. brake fluid level:
conditions of use and therefore cannot be f Please see the chapter “BRAKE FLUID”
expressed in actual miles on the road. h WARNING Reduced braking on page 223.
The high-performance brake system is designed efficiency
for optimal braking effect at all speeds and New brake pads or linings
After a long drive over salted or gritted roads,
temperatures.
a coating may form on the brake disks and pads New brake pads have to be “broken in”, and
Certain speeds, braking forces and ambient that significantly reduces friction and therefore therefore only attain optimal friction when the car
conditions (e.g. temperature and humidity) can also braking effect. has covered several hundred miles or km.
therefore cause the brakes to “squeal”. f Even though the brake disks consist of alloyed The slightly reduced braking ability must be
h WARNING Obstructed brake pedal gray cast iron, they will unavoidably start to compensated for by pressing the brake pedal
corrode if your vehicle is parked for an harder. This applies whenever the brake pads
Unsuitable or incorrectly installed floor mats or extended period. The brakes will tend to “rub” and/or brake disks are replaced.
objects can obstruct the movement of the brake as a result.
pedal or prevent application of the brake pedal.
f Do not obstruct the pedal travel with floor mats
The nature, extent and effects of corrosion
depend on the amount of time the vehicle was
or other objects. parked, whether road salt or grit was spread
and whether grease-dissolving agents were
used in car washes (not on vehicles with
Porsche Ceramic Composite Brake).
To prevent corrosion of the brake disks,
“brake them dry” before parking the vehicle
(not on vehicles with Porsche Ceramic
Composite Brake).
If braking comfort is noticeably impaired, we
recommend that you have the brake system
checked by experts at an authorized Porsche
dealer.

h WARNING Misuse of cruise control Accelerating (e.g. to overtake)

Variant 1
If the current traffic situation does not allow you to
drive safely at a constant speed and with sufficient f Increase the speed as usual with the
distance to the vehicle in front, using the cruise accelerator pedal.
control can cause accidents. When you ease off the accelerator, the
f Do not use the cruise control in heavy traffic, previously stored value is set again.
in city traffic, on twisting roads or under Variant 2
unfavorable road conditions (e.g. wintry or wet f Push the control stalk on the steering wheel
conditions, varying road surfaces).
f Observe all local and national speed limits.
forward (position 1).
f Do not reach through the steering-wheel

The desired speed is increased in steps of
1 mph (1 km/h).
spokes while driving. or
Press the control stalk on the steering wheel
Switching cruise control readiness on forward and keep it pressed (position 1).
f Press button A on the control stalk. The desired speed is increased in steps of
Cruise control readiness 5 mph (10 km/h).
A - Switch cruise control on/off The grey symbol on the multi-function The new desired speed is displayed on the multi-
1 - Set/increase desired speed display in the instrument panel indicates function display in the instrument panel.
2 - Reduce desired speed
readiness. Decelerating
3 - Interrupt (OFF)
4 - Return to set speed (RESUME) Maintaining and storing speed f Briefly pull the control stalk on the steering
1. Accelerate or decelerate to the desired speed wheel towards the steering wheel (position 2).
Cruise Control using the accelerator pedal. The desired speed is decreased in steps of
Cruise control maintains any selected speed 2. Push the control stalk on the steering wheel 1 mph (1 km/h).
between approx. 20–150 mph (30–240 km/h) forward (position 1). or
without you having to use the accelerator. The current driving speed is now stored as the Pull the control stalk on the steering wheel
Cruise control is operated using the control stalk desired speed, which will be maintained towards the steering wheel and keep it pulled
at the bottom left of the steering wheel. automatically. (position 2).
Vehicles with PDK Desired speed The desired speed is decreased in steps of
Downshifts are carried out to help maintain the The desired speed that was stored is 5 mph (10 km/h).
pre-selected speed (especially when driving displayed under the cruise control The new desired speed is displayed on the multi-
downhill). symbol, which has now turned orange. function display in the instrument panel.

Vehicles with PDK Resuming the stored speed – RESUME Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
Downshifts are carried out to help maintain the f Press the control stalk up (position 4). (Only in conjunction with PDK)
pre-selected speed (especially when driving Cruise control accelerates/decelerates the Adaptive cruise control maintains any selected
downhill). vehicle to the stored speed. speed between approx. 20–100 mph
Interrupting cruise control (30–160 km/h) when driving on open roads
operation – OFF Information without you having to use the accelerator.
The speed driven before the interruption remains The stored speed should only be recalled if traffic If a vehicle travelling ahead of you in the same lane
stored in the memory and can be reactivated by and road conditions are conducive to driving at is detected as driving slower than the selected
pressing the control stalk. that speed. speed, adaptive cruise control will automatically
f Please see the chapter “RESUMING THE maintain a set distance from the vehicle in front.
STORED SPEED – RESUME” on page 142. Switching cruise control readiness off Adaptive cruise control slows your vehicle down if
f Press the control stalk down (position 3). f Press button A on the control stalk. the distance to the vehicle ahead becomes too
or short and accelerates your vehicle if the distance
The memory is cleared and the readiness
Operate brake pedal or move PDK selector increases.
symbol disappears.
lever to N position. The stored desired speed is cleared when the h WARNING
Misuse of adaptive
Cruise control operation is interrupted ignition is switched off when the vehicle is parked. cruise control
automatically: If the current traffic situation does not allow you to
– If the set vehicle speed is exceeded by more drive safely at a constant speed and with sufficient
Information
than approx. 16 mph (25 km/h) for longer distance to the vehicle in front, using the adaptive
On upward or downward slopes, the set speed cruise control can cause accidents.
f Do not use the adaptive cruise control in heavy
than 20 seconds. cannot always be maintained by cruise control
– If the actual vehicle speed falls below the set (vehicles with manual transmission).
f To obtain sufficient engine braking or a better
vehicle speed by approx. 37 mph (60 km/h) traffic, in construction traffic, in city traffic, on
for longer than 60 seconds (e.g. gradients). twisting roads or under unfavorable road
rev range, you therefore have to change down conditions (e.g. wintry or wet conditions,
– If Porsche Stability Management (PSM) to a lower gear. varying road surfaces).
f Brake the vehicle immediately with the
intervenes for longer than 0.5 seconds.
footbrake if the deceleration of the adaptive

cruise control is not sufficient.
f Make sure that it is possible to take over
control of the vehicle at all times.
f Observe all local and national speed limits.

h WARNING
Adaptive cruise control h WARNING Radiofrequency
limits. radiation exposure
Adaptive cruise control will not detect stationary This equipment complies with FCC radiation
or slowly moving vehicles, pedestrians, objects on exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled
the road, oncoming vehicles in the same lane or environment. This equipment should be installed
cross traffic.
f You must pay attention to your vehicle’s
and operated with minimum distance of 8 in.
(20 cm) between the radiator and your body.
position in relation to other objects and inter-
This transmitter must not be co-located or
vene as needed to ensure safe driving.
f Always keep the direction of travel in your field
operating in conjunction with any other antenna or
transmitter.
of view.
h WARNING
Weather impairment of
radar sensor
Radar sensor vision can be impaired by rain,
snow, ice or heavy spray. Vehicles in front will not
be detected properly or may not be detected at
all.
Radar sensor f Do not use adaptive cruise control under these
conditions.
Adaptive cruise control uses a radar sensor
located in the center of the front apron (arrow). Warning message
Adaptive cruise control can be deactivated
Information automatically if the radar sensor is very dirty or is
f Always keep the radar sensor clean and free of covered in ice or by an obstacle, in unfavorable
ice and snow to ensure that it is fully functional. weather conditions (heavy rain) or when driving
For car care instructions: through tunnels.
f Please see the chapter “CAR CARE The message “ACC/PAS unavailable Service
INSTRUCTIONS” on page 211. required” will appear on the multi-function display
in the instrument panel.
function display:
on page 116.

Operating principle of adaptive cruise

Information control (ACC)
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC No vehicle detected in front – open road
Rules and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. driving
Operation is subject to the following two condi- Adaptive cruise control operates like a cruise
tions: control system. The desired speed that was set is
1. This device may not cause harmful interfe- maintained constantly.
rence, and
2. this device must accept any interference Vehicle detected in front – driving in traffic
received, including interference that may If a vehicle travelling ahead of you in the same lane
cause undesired operation. is detected as driving slower than the selected
Changes or modifications made to this equipment desired speed, adaptive cruise control will
not expressly approved by Porsche may void the automatically maintain a set distance from the
FCC authorization to operate this equipment. vehicle in front.
This equipment has been tested and found to If the vehicle in front stops, adaptive cruise control
comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, will slow your vehicle down to a stop provided this
pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits is possible within the control limits of the system.
are designed to provide reasonable protection Adaptive cruise control actively keeps your vehicle R - Switch adaptive cruise control on/off
against harmful interference when the equipment at a standstill. 1 - Set/increase desired speed
is operated in a commercial environment. This 2 - Reduce desired speed
If the vehicle in front drives off, automatic speed
3 - Interrupt (OFF)
equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio control and distance control can be resumed. 4 - Operational readiness on/return to set speed
frequency energy and, if not installed and used in (RESUME)
Speed exceeded
accordance with the instruction manual, may
cause harmful interference to radio communica- The speed of the vehicle can be increased at any Using adaptive cruise control (ACC)
tions. Operation of this equipment in a residential time by pressing the accelerator. Adaptive cruise control is operated using the
area is likely to cause harmful interference in If the vehicle is travelling faster than the speed set control stalk at the bottom left of the steering
which case the user will be required to correct the by adaptive cruise control (ACC), adaptive cruise wheel.
interference at his own expense. control is deactivated.
– This Class A digital apparatus complies with The message “ACC passive” appears on the
Information
Canadian ICES-003. multi-function display in the instrument panel.
The desired speed that was stored is retained. You can intervene manually at any time by
Cet appareil numérique de la classe A est pressing the brake or accelerator.
conforme à la norme NMB-003 du Canada. After releasing the accelerator pedal, the ACC
accelerates to the desired speed if there is no
vehicle in front and controls the distance if there is
a vehicle in front.
For information on the “ACC passive” status:
f Please see the chapter “OPERATING STATES
WHEN ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL IS
SWITCHED ON” on page 146.

“ACC” main menu

The adaptive cruise control display on the multi-
function display can be selected permanently
using the buttons on the multi-function steering
wheel or the control stalk at the bottom right of
the steering wheel.
For information on using the multi-function display:
f Please see the chapter “OPERATING THE
MULTI-FUNCTION DISPLAY ON THE
INSTRUMENT PANEL” on page 83.
1. Main menu: Select “ACC”
on the display
A - Desired distance from vehicle in front Status display

B - Status display and desired speed
When adaptive cruise control is switched on, the
C - Vehicle detected in front
D - Current distance from vehicle in front status display B appears at the bottom left of the
E - Current speed of vehicle in front multi-function display (illustration).
F - Progress bar showing speed control range The status display B turns orange when adaptive
(0 - 100 mph (0 - 160 km/h))
cruise control is active.
G - Current speed
The status display B is grey when adaptive cruise
Adaptive cruise control display control is inactive.
All important information, messages and warnings
are displayed on the multi-function display in the
instrument panel.

Examples: Adaptive cruise control is ready Setting the desired speed

If adaptive cruise control is switched on, Cruise control and distance control is inactive 1. Press the control stalk on the steering wheel
and no desired speed is stored, the after pressing the brakes or interrupting by forward (position 1).
cruise control symbol appears but the pressing the control stalk downwards (position 3, The current driving speed is stored as the
desired speed field remains blank. OFF). desired speed, which will be maintained
The desired speed that was stored and the automatically (within the control range of 20 to
If a desired speed is stored and no desired distance that was set are retained. 100 mph (30 to 160 km/h)) and appears
vehicle was detected in front, the cruise The status display B turns grey. orange in the status display B.
control symbol and the desired speed For information on resuming cruise control and The red triangle G under the progress bar for
are displayed. distance control: the speed control range shows the speed of
If a desired speed is stored and a vehicle f Please see the chapter “RESUMING CRUISE your vehicle.
CONTROL AND DISTANCE CONTROL – 2. Release the accelerator pedal.
was detected in front, a vehicle symbol
RESUME” on page 149. The desired speed is maintained automatically
and the desired speed are displayed.
unless a vehicle travelling in front is detected
Adaptive cruise control passive
as driving slower than the desired speed.
Switching adaptive cruise control on and Cruise control and distance control is inactive
off after pressing the accelerator.
“ACC passive” appears on the multi-function Information
Switching adaptive cruise control on
f Press button R on the control stalk.
display. If a stationary object was detected in front, the
The desired speed that was stored and the message “ACC not possible Stationary object
The grey status display appears on the multi-
desired distance that was set are retained. ahead” appears on the multi-function display.
function display.
The status display B turns grey.
Adaptive cruise control is ready.
Adaptive cruise control is active again after you
Switching adaptive cruise control off release the accelerator. Information
f Press button R on the control stalk. If your vehicle is stationary, the message “ACC
Setting and changing the desired speed not possible while stationary” appears on the
“ACC off” appears on the multi-function
display. Preconditions multi-function display when you press the control
The desired speed that was stored is deleted. – Adaptive cruise control is switched on. stalk forward (position 1).
The desired distance is set to the default value. – Vehicle is moving.
– No stationary objects are detected in front.
Operating states when adaptive cruise
control is switched on
There are three possible operating states when
adaptive cruise control is switched on.
Adaptive cruise control active
Adaptive cruise control automatically regulates
the speed and distance from the vehicle in front.
The status display B turns orange.

Increasing the desired speed

f Press the control stalk on the steering wheel Information
forward (position 1). The distance depends on the driving speed. The
The desired speed is increased in steps of slower the vehicle is travelling, the shorter the
1 mph (1 km/h). distance and the faster the vehicle is travelling,
or the longer the distance.
Press the control stalk on the steering wheel
forward and keep it pressed (position 1). Increasing the desired distance
The desired speed is increased in steps of f Press the rocker switch Z upwards.
5 mph (10 km/h). The desired distance is increased.
The status display B shows the new desired More orange segments are shown in the
speed. desired distance display A.
The red triangle G under the progress bar for
Reducing the desired distance
f Press the rocker switch Z downwards.
the speed control range shows the speed of
your vehicle.
The desired distance is reduced.
Reducing the desired speed Fewer orange segments are shown in the
f Briefly pull the control stalk on the steering desired distance display A.
wheel towards the steering wheel (position 2). Setting the desired distance
The desired distance from the vehicle in front can Display showing distance from vehicle in
The desired speed is decreased in steps of
be set in four stages. front
1 mph (1 km/h).
or If a vehicle is detected in front, the vehicle symbol
Pull the control stalk on the steering wheel C appears on the multi-function display and in the
Information status display B.
towards the steering wheel and keep it pulled
When you are setting the desired distance, the The grey area D shows the current distance from
(position 2).
“ACC” main menu for adaptive cruise control is the vehicle in front.
The desired speed is decreased in steps of
displayed temporarily on the multi-function
5 mph (10 km/h).
display.
The status display B shows the new desired
When you first actuate the rocker switch Z, the
speed.
“ACC” main menu appears without changing the
The red triangle G under the progress bar for
desired distance.
the speed control range shows the speed of
your vehicle.

Possible distance settings Automatic braking to a standstill Driving off again

Suitable for speedy driving in lines of If the vehicle in front stops, your vehicle will slow The vehicle can be driven off again after being
traffic. The time gap is 1 second. This down and come to a stop within the control limits stopped and speed and distance control will be
corresponds to approx. 36 yd. of the system if adaptive cruise control is active. resumed, depending on the operating state of the
(33 meters) at a speed of 75 mph The indicator light lights up on the instrument adaptive cruise control system.
(120 km/h). panel. Adaptive cruise control active
The vehicle is actively held at a stop.
Suitable for steady driving in lines of 1. Press the control stalk on the steering wheel
For information on the HOLD function:
f Please see the chapter “HOLD FUNCTION:
traffic. The time gap is 1.3 seconds. upwards (position 4, RESUME).
This corresponds to approx. 47 yd. 2. Press the accelerator pedal briefly.
DRIVE-OFF ASSISTANT, STANDSTILL
(43 meters) at a speed of 75 mph Your vehicle drives off again automatically.
MANAGEMENT” on page 168.
(120 km/h).
Preset distance Information

Information
Corresponds to the general Your vehicle will not drive off if the vehicle
– Depending on the traffic flow, e.g. slow
recommendation of the road traffic detected in front is stationary.
moving traffic, stopping is initiated by a slow
safety regulation (“two seconds time crawling phase, which brings the vehicle to
headway”). The time gap is 1.8 Adaptive cruise control is ready
a standstill.
seconds. This corresponds to approx. – When adaptive cruise control is operating Automatic speed and distance control can only be
66 yd. (60 meters) at a speed of normally or when the HOLD function is active, resumed when your vehicle is moving.
75 mph (120 km/h). the brake pedal may feel different and you may 1. Drive off normally.
hear hydraulic noises. 2. Press the control stalk on the steering wheel
Suitable for driving on country roads. upwards (position 4, RESUME).
The time gap is 2.3 seconds. This This behavior is normal for the system.
It is not a fault. or
corresponds to approx. 63 yd. Set or change the desired speed.
(58 meters) at a speed of 55 mph
(90 km/h).

Interrupting and resuming cruise control Messages on the multi-function display – “ACC not possible Switch on PSM”
and distance control If adaptive cruise control was deactivated Adaptive cruise control is not available
automatically or if an action cannot be performed, because PSM was switched off.
Interrupting cruise control and distance
a message to this effect in blue appears on the For information on Porsche Stability
control – OFF
f Press the brake pedal.
Management (PSM):
f PLEASE SEE THE CHAPTER “PORSCHE
multi-function display.
or – “ACC not available”
Adaptive cruise control is not available, STABILITY MANAGEMENT (PSM)”
Press the control stalk on the steering wheel on page 166.
downwards (position 3, OFF). e.g. when maneuvering.
– “ACC not possible ABS/PSM intervention” – “ACC off”
Adaptive cruise control is inactive. Adaptive cruise control was deactivated.
The desired speed that was stored and the Adaptive cruise control was deactivated
because ABS or PSM intervened as a control – “ACC not possible Steering lock too large”
desired distance are retained. The steering is turned too far.
mechanism.
Resuming cruise control and distance – “Release parking brake”
control – RESUME
General information
Adaptive cruise control was deactivated
f Press the control stalk on the steering wheel because the electric parking brake was
“Sport” and “Sport Plus” Mode
upwards (position 4, RESUME). activated. Adaptive cruise control regulates your driving
The vehicle accelerates to the desired speed – “ACC not possible more dynamically in “Sport” and “Sport Plus”
that was stored unless a vehicle travelling in Move gear lever to D/M” mode.
front is detected as driving slower than the Adaptive cruise control was deactivated Exceptions for adaptive cruise control
desired speed and the distance from this because the PDK selector lever is not in (ACC)
vehicle is less than the desired distance that position D or manual position M.
Adaptive cruise control is not available in the
was set. – “ACC not possible while stationary”
following situations:
The status display B changes from grey to The required action is not possible because
– If the ignition is switched off.
orange. your vehicle is stationary, e.g. when setting a
– When PSM is off.
or desired speed.
– If the driver’s door is opened and the driver’s
Press the control stalk on the steering wheel – “ACC not possible Revs too high”
safety belt is not fastened.
upwards and keep it pressed (position 4, Adaptive cruise control was deactivated
– When parking or maneuvering in very tight
RESUME). because the engine-speed limit was reached in
spaces.
The vehicle accelerates in a more sporty manual position M of the PDK selector lever/
– When the electric parking brake is activated.
driving style to the desired speed that was shift paddles.
– If the PDK selector lever is in position
stored. – “ACC not possible Gradient too steep”
N, R or P.
The desired distance or the desired speed
– On upward or downward slopes of more than
Information cannot be set because the incline of the road
15 %.
is too steep.
If speed and distance control was interrupted by If one of these exception situations occurs when
– “ACC not possible Stationary object
moving the control stalk to position 3 (OFF), it can adaptive cruise control is switched on, adaptive
ahead”
only be resumed again when the vehicle is moving cruise control will be switched off.
The action is not possible because a stationary
and no stationary objects are detected in front. A message to this effect appears on the multi-
object was detected ahead.
function display.

Traffic situations in which vehicles cannot

be reliably detected
The radar sensor for adaptive cruise control scans
a narrow, cone-shaped area in front of your
vehicle.
Detection can be limited or unreliable, depending
on the traffic situation and the size of the vehicle
in front. The system may brake too late or
unexpectedly.
Stationary vehicles are not detected. The system
cannot respond to stationary vehicles.
f Drive with extreme care.
f Slow down if necessary.
Warning messages A – Vehicles changing lanes/cutting in

Take-over request when adaptive cruise If a vehicle is changing lanes or cutting in ahead of
control is active (ACC active) you in the same lane, the vehicle will only be
detected when it has moved completely into your
If adaptive cruise control detects that braking
lane.
assistance is required on the part of the driver, a
warning signal sounds and the warning message B – Vehicles with a small cross-section/
“Distance Please brake” appears on the multi- narrow vehicles
function display. Narrow or small vehicles will not be detected or
Inadequate braking will be detected too late.
h WARNING
power during automatic
braking by the adaptive
cruise control.
In this case, the braking power of the adaptive
cruise control is not sufficient to prevent a
collision.
f Brake immediately.

Active Safety – Porsche “Active Safe”

The adaptive cruise control sensor is used for the
Porsche “Active Safe” functions.
These include:
– Brake system prefilling
Prefilling of the brake system if the radar
sensor detects that the vehicle is coming
critically close to a moving obstacle in order to
bridge the air gaps and improve braking
response.
– Brake Assist
Reduction of the activation threshold of the
Brake Assist function if the sensor detects that
the vehicle is coming critically close to a
moving obstacle.
The activation threshold of the Brake Assist
function is reduced in three stages, depending
C – Driving into and out of corners E – Vehicles with large overhangs on how critical the danger situation is.
When driving into and out of corners, vehicles will The tail of the vehicle will not be detected – Target braking
not be detected or will be detected too late, or correctly on vehicles with large overhangs, If the radar sensor detects that the vehicle is
adaptive cruise control will react to vehicles in e.g. timber lorries. coming critically close to a moving obstacle
adjacent lanes. and, at the same time, braking power is
h WARNING
End of vehicle in front
inadequate, brake pressure can be increased
D – Stationary vehicles not detected correctly.
in accordance with the situation, through to full
A stationary vehicle that appears suddenly in the If there is a vehicle in front with a long overhang, braking if required.
detection field of the radar sensor, e.g. after a the radar sensor of the adaptive cruise control is
vehicle in front changes lanes, will not be detected not able to detect the end of the vehicle or detects
it incorrectly. Information
by adaptive cruise control.
f Drive with extreme care. All Porsche “Active Safe” functions are active for
h WARNING
Stationary vehicle not
speeds of more than 20 mph (30 km/h).
detected.
Stationary vehicles are not detected by the radar
sensor of the adaptive cruise control.
f Drive with extreme care.

Latent warning (visual) Prewarning (acoustic and visual) Acute warning (acoustic, visual and tangible)
If the vehicle is driving too close to the vehicle in If the radar sensor detects that the vehicle is If the driver does not react to the prewarning by
front for a long time, to avoid a collision if the coming critically close to and is very likely to braking, this is quickly followed by an acute
vehicle in front brakes, a latent warning appears collide with a moving obstacle in front, an acoustic warning, which involves a braking jolt as well as
on the multi-function display to warn the driver. and visual prewarning is issued. the acoustic and visual warning.
f Stay further back from the vehicle in front if This warns the driver and still allows a collision to A braking jolt is felt in the vehicle as a result of a
necessary. be prevented if the driver reacts accordingly. very quick build-up of brake pressure. This alerts
Insufficient distance the driver to the traffic situation.
h WARNING
The driver can still prevent a collision by reacting
Risk of collision with the vehicle in front. accordingly in this dangerous situation.
f Brake immediately. Insufficient distance
h WARNING
Risk of collision with the vehicle in front.
f Brake immediately.

Car Audio Operation/Tips Static and fluttering

Information When the line-of-sight link between a transmitter
For radio operation see your radio manual
The situations described below lead to the and vehicle is blocked by large buildings or
which is included with your on-board
assumption that the driver is driving carefully and mountains, the radio sound may be accompanied
literature.
the prewarning and acute warning functions are with static or fluttering because of the
disabled: FM reception characteristic of FM.
– The driver drives around tight corners. A vehicle is not an ideal place to listen to a radio. In a similar effect, a fluttering noise is sometimes
– The driver is braking. Because the vehicle moves, reception conditions heard when driving along a tree-lined road.
– If the driver accelerates sharply, this action is are constantly changing. This static and fluttering can be reduced by
interpreted as an active driving request (e.g. Buildings, terrain, signal distance and noise from adjusting the tone control for greater bass
indicating the driver’s intention to overtake). other vehicles are all working against good response until the disturbance has passed.
reception.
Switching Porsche “Active Safe” warnings Multipath
Some conditions affecting FM may appear to be
on/off problems when they are not. Because of the reflecting characteristics of FM,
The latent warning and prewarning functions are direct and reflected signals may reach the antenna
The following characteristics are completely
switched off by default. The acute warning at the same time (multipath) and cancel each other
normal for a given reception area, and they do not
function is active. out. As a vehicle moves through these electronic
indicate any problem with the radio itself.
Latent warnings and prewarnings can be activated dead spots, the listener may hear a momentary
under “Prewarning on” on the multi-function flutter or loss of reception.
Information
display. Station swapping
The settings remain stored when the ignition is Electronic accessories should only be installed by
When two FM stations are close to each other, and
switched on and off. your authorized Porsche dealer.
an electronic dead spot, such as static or
f PLEASE SEE THE CHAPTER “ACTIVE SAFETY – Equipment which has not been tested and
multipath area, interrupts the original signal,
PORSCHE “ACTIVE SAFE”” on page 151. approved by Porsche may impair radio reception.
sometimes the stronger second signal will be
Fading and drifting selected automatically until the original one
returns. This swapping can also occur as you
FM range is limited to about 25 miles (40 km),
drive away from the selected station and
except for some high power stations.
approach another station of a stronger signal.
If a vehicle is moving away from the desired
station's transmitter, the signal will tend to fade
and/or drift. This condition is more prevalent with
FM than AM, and is often accompanied by
distortion.
Fading and drifting can be minimized to a certain
degree by careful attention to fine tuning or
selection of a stronger signal.

and regulations on the use of cellular telephones Improper installation of such equipment can
in the areas where you drive. create a discharged battery or excessive current
draw from added equipment.
h DANGER Cell phone use
Compact disk player If aftermarket systems are installed by non-
Looking away from the road or turning your dealership technicians or outside the selling
NOTICE
attention away from your driving to operate a cell dealer, problems may result. Installation of
To avoid damage to compact disk player and phone will sooner or later cause an accident. aftermarket equipment is not covered under the
disks. f Do not attempt to operate a hand-held cell New Car Warranty.
f Use only compact disks labeled as shown, phone while you are driving. Safety is more f Consult your authorized Porsche dealer about
having no dirt, damage or warpage. important than a phone call. the installation of non-Porsche approved
f Never attempt to disassemble or oil any part f Learn to operate the hands-free phone, if it is equipment.
of the player unit. Do not insert any object available, before you start driving. Then make Reception quality
other than a disk into the slot. Remember there use of the hands-free phone at all times.
The reception quality of your car telephone will
are no user-serviceable parts inside the
change constantly when you are driving.
compact disk player. It is essential to observe the telephone
f Do not allow the disk to sustain any manufacturer’s instructions before operating
Interference caused by buildings, landscape and
weather is unavoidable. It may become particu-
fingerprints, scrapes or stickers on the the telephone.
larly difficult to hear when using the hands-free
surfaces. This may cause poor sound quality. Any portable telephone or radio transmitter which function due to external noise such as engine and
Hold the disk only on the edge or center hole. is used in a Porsche must be properly installed in
f When not in use, take the disk out of the player, accordance with the technical requirements of
wind noise.
put the disk back into its case and store it Porsche. Automatic car-wash
away from dust, heat, damp and direct
The transmission power must not exceed
f Unscrew external antennas before using an
sunlight. automatic car-wash.
Leaving the disk on the dashboard in the sun 10 W.
can damage the disk. The devices must possess a type approval for
f If the disk gets dirty, clean the disk by wiping your vehicle and have an “e” symbol.
the surfaces from the center to the outside in If you should require equipment with transmission
a radial direction with a soft cloth. power values greater than 10 W, please consult
Do not use a conventional record cleaner or your authorized Porsche dealer for this purpose.
anti-static record preservative. They are familiar with the technical requirements
Disk cleaners are available in audio stores. for installing devices of this kind.
The antennas for all radios and telephones with a
Car Telephone and Aftermarket Alarms transmitting antenna must be externally mounted.
Important legal and safety information The improper installation of radios or telephones
regarding the use of cellular telephones or use of a radio or telephone with a transmitting
Some jurisdictions may prohibit the use of cellular antenna inside the car may cause the warning
telephones while driving a vehicle. Check the laws lights to come on.

Porsche Communication Satellite radio

Management (PCM) You must have the satellite radio activated before
you can put it into operation. You will need a
h WARNING Operation of on-board contract with a provider in order to use this radio.
systems f Refer to the separate radio operating
Setting or operating the multi-function display, instructions before putting into operation.
radio, navigation system, telephone or other
equipment when driving could distract you from
the traffic. You could lose control of the vehicle.
f Operate the components while driving only if
the traffic situation allows you to do so safely.
procedures only with the vehicle stationary.
f If it is necessary to operate these components
while the vehicle is in motion, use the function
keys on the multi-functional steering wheel.
f Refer to the separate operating instructions
before putting the PCM into operation. USB/iPod® and AUX
When put into operation for the first time, a The USB/iPod® and AUX interfaces are located in
distance of approx. 3 miles (5 km) must be driven the glove box.
in order for the navigation system to complete the f Please refer to the chapter “EXTERNAL AUDIO
process of fine calibration. The same applies SOURCE” in the separate PCM operating
when the tires are changed (e.g. summer/snow instructions.
tires) or new tires fitted. Full location accuracy is
not yet achieved during the fine-calibration Information
process.
Do not leave your iPod®, USB storage device or
If the vehicle has been transported (e.g. ferry, car
an external audio source in the vehicle for
train), the system may take a few minutes after
extended periods of time because extreme
being switched on before it determines the current
ambient conditions (temperature fluctuations,
location.
humidity) can occur in the vehicle.
Serious tire slip (e.g. spinning wheels on snow)
may result in temporarily inaccurate navigation.
When the battery has been disconnected, it may
take up to 15 minutes before the navigation
system is operational once more.

f Select an appropriately low gear on upward

and downward slopes.
This will ensure optimum use of engine power
and engine braking.
When reverse gear is selected and the ignition is
on, the reversing lights come on.
Voice Control Manual Transmission, Clutch

Porsche Communication Management (PCM) can h WARNING Blocked pedals
be operated by spoken commands using the voice
control system. Unsuitable or improperly secured floor mats or
f Please refer to the chapter “VOICE CONTROL” objects can restrict pedal travel or hinder pedal
in the separate PCM operating instructions. operation.
f Do not obstruct the pedal travel with floor mats
Activating voice control or other objects.
f Press button . Nonskid floor mats of the correct size are
An acoustic signal sounds and help text for available at your authorized Porsche dealer.
using the five most important voice commands
appears on the multi-function display in the The positions of the gears are shown on the shift
pattern on the gearshift lever.
f When changing gears, always ensure that the
instrument panel.
Simply say the command.
For information on switching the help text on and clutch pedal is fully depressed and the gear
has engaged fully.
f Select reverse gear only when the vehicle is
off on the multi-function display:
f Please see the chapter “DISPLAYING PCM
INFORMATION ON THE MULTI-FUNCTION stationary.
DISPLAY” on page 107. Reverse gear can be engaged after moving the
gearshift lever to the left past the stop.

Permitted engine speed Porsche Doppelkupplung (PDK)

f You should change into a higher gear or ease Porsche Doppelkupplung (PDK) is a seven-speed
off the accelerator before the needle reaches transmission with an automatic and a manual
the red mark on the tachometer. selection mode.
If the red zone is reached during acceleration, In automatic selection mode (selector-lever
fuel feed is interrupted. position D), gear changing is automatic.
You can change temporarily from automatic
NOTICE
to manual mode using the shift buttons on the
Risk of engine damage (overrevving) when shifting steering wheel.
down to a lower gear. In manual selection mode (selector-lever
f Take care not to exceed the maximum position M), you change gear using the shift
permitted engine speed when shifting down. buttons or shift paddles on the steering wheel
or with the PDK selector lever.
You can change between selector-lever
positions D and M as you wish while driving.
Upshift prompt for fuel-economy- Information

optimized driving f Take care not to operate the shift buttons on
The consumption-oriented upshift indicator A in the steering wheel inadvertently in either
the tachometer at the right beside the digital automatic or manual mode, thereby triggering
speed display helps you to develop a fuel-saving undesired gear changes.
driving style.
The upshift indicator lights up – prompting you to
shift up to the next-higher gear – depending on the
selected gear, engine speed and accelerator
pedal position.
f Change to the next-higher gear when the
upshift indicator lights up.
Gear display
The gear display B in the tachometer indicates the
currently engaged gear.

Starting
The engine can be started only if the brake
pedal is depressed and the selector lever is in
position P or N.
Driving off
f Only select the desired position for driving off
(D, M or R) when the engine is idling and the
brake pedal is pressed.
f Since the vehicle crawls when in gear, do not
release the brake until you are ready to drive
off.
Driving off on hills
The Drive-Off Assistant assists the driver when
driving off on hills. The vehicle is held on the slope
for a short time during the change from the brake
pedal to the accelerator to facilitate driving off
Changing selector-lever position immediately after the brake is released. Indicator for selector-lever position and
The selector lever is blocked in the P position f Please see the chapter “HOLD FUNCTION: engaged gear
when the ignition is switched off. DRIVE-OFF ASSISTANT, STANDSTILL When the engine is running, the display shows the
When the ignition is switched on, the selector lever MANAGEMENT” on page 168. selector-lever position and engaged gear.
can be moved from position P and N only when Stopping If the selector lever is between two positions
f For a brief stop, e.g. at traffic lights, leave the
the release button is pressed, and when the brake
– Effects:
pedal is pressed.
selector lever in drive position and hold the The corresponding selector-lever position in
Release button vehicle with the brake pedal. the instrument panel flashes and the warning
The release button (arrow) in the selector f Do not hold the vehicle on a slope using the “Activate brake” or “Engage gear selector
lever prevents the gear from being changed accelerator. Use the brake pedal or the properly” appears on the multi-function
unintentionally. electric parking brake instead. display.
The release button must be pressed when f Before leaving the vehicle, always apply the – Action required:
shifting to position R or P. electric parking brake and move the selector Operate the footbrake and engage the
lever to position P. selector lever properly.
Parking
f Go easy on the accelerator!
f When parking or maneuvering in a small
space, control the speed by careful use of
the footbrake.

If the selector lever is inadvertently moved from P Failure of the selector lever display on the Selector-lever Positions
or N into a gear (due to a fault or improper use) instrument panel
without pressing the brake, this gear will also flash P – Parking lock
f Engage parking lock only when the vehicle is
Transm. failure Park vehicle safely
on the display and no power transmission will
occur. The warning “Transm. failure Park vehicle stationary.
f To drive off, press the brake and move the safely” is displayed in red on the multi-function If selector-lever position P is flashing in the
selector lever from P or N into the required display. instrument panel, the parking lock is not
gear again. Effect: engaged. The vehicle can roll away.
– No selector-lever position is displayed on Shift again from selector-lever position R to P.
f Activate the electric parking brake and then
Selector-lever position R or D flashes in the the instrument panel.
instrument panel Vehicle can be driven only until it comes to engage the parking lock.
No power transmission occurs. a stop. If selector-lever position P is flashing in the
Effects: Action required: instrument panel, the parking lock is not
– The selector lever was engaged without the f It is not possible to continue driving. Stop the engaged. The vehicle can roll away.
footbrake being depressed. vehicle immediately in a suitable place. Have Shift again from selector-lever position R to P.
– The selector lever was moved to R above the the fault corrected at an authorized Porsche Vehicles without Porsche Entry & Drive:
permissible limit speed. dealer. If the vehicle has to be towed: The ignition key can only be removed in selector-
Action required: Please see the chapter “TOWING” lever position P.
f Press the footbrake and engage the required on page 255.
selector-lever position again from P or N. R – Reverse gear
f Select only if the vehicle is stationary and the
If there is a fault in the transmission:
If reverse gear fails:
f Please see the chapter “REDUCED DRIVING The warning “Transm. fault Poss. no R gear brake is applied.
PROGRAMME” on page 164. Drive on poss.” or “Drive temperature too
high Reduce load” appears on the multi-function N – Neutral
display. Selector-lever position N must be selected for
f Please see the chapter “REDUCED DRIVING towing or in car washes, for example.
PROGRAMME” on page 164. f Only select the desired position for driving off
f Have the fault corrected immediately at an (D, M or R) when the engine is idling and the
authorized Porsche dealer. brake pedal is pressed.

D – Automatic selection mode However, if necessary, the gear can be selected is suppressed because here, the vehicle does not
Select position D for “normal” driving. The gears manually. slow down, despite the engine overrun torque and
are shifted automatically according to the Upshifts and downshifts are avoided as far as no fuel is consumed in this driving situation due to
accelerator position and speed. possible when PSM is active. In the case of high utilisation of the overrun shut-off.
Depending on the way the vehicle is driven wheel slip when PSM is switched off, upshifts are
prevented until slip is no longer detected. Ending coasting mode/utilising engine
(economical, comfortable or sporty driving style)
braking effect
f Press the accelerator or brake pedal
and on the resistance (e.g. uphill), the gear- Driving in coasting mode
changing points are shifted towards higher or Through attentive driving, fuel can be saved in or
lower engine-speed ranges. coasting mode. The vehicle rolls with the engine Operate a shift paddle or a shift button or
The accelerator position, driving speed, engine disengaged and at idle speed without engine Shift gear using the selector lever.
speed, longitudinal and lateral acceleration and braking effect.
the road profile all have an influence on the gear- Initiating coasting mode manually
Preconditions for automatic coasting mode
changing characteristic. – Driving in selector lever position D or driving in
– Driving in selector lever position D
Unwanted upshifts, e.g. when entering bends, are selector lever position M
– Coasting mode is switched on.
prevented by swiftly releasing the accelerator When coasting mode is suppressed, e.g. in the
Indicator light on the button is off.
pedal. case of sporty driving, sudden release of the
– Sport and Sport Plus modes are switched off
Depending on lateral acceleration, upshifts on – PSM is active accelerator pedal or excessively low engine
bends are not made until the engine-speed limit is – Cruise control is not active temperature, coasting mode can be initiated
reached. – Engine, transmission and battery are at manually.
When you brake, and depending on the amount of operating temperature f Take your foot off the accelerator pedal and
deceleration, the PDK transmission changes down – Calm/economic driving style shift past the highest possible gear with the
earlier. – Slight uphill or slight downhill gradients shift paddle, one of the shift buttons, or with
For subsequent cornering, the correct gear is f Slowly take your foot off the accelerator. the selector lever.
engaged when pressure is applied to the brakes The engine is disengaged and runs at idle speed. Switching coasting mode on and off using
before the bend. The bend is taken in the right The vehicle rolls with no engine braking effect. the Auto Start Stop button
gear, and when you accelerate out of the bend you Coasting mode is recognizable by the idle speed
do not have to change down. indicated on the tachometer. Switching off
With a sporty driving style, downshifts are already f Press button .
initiated when the brake pedal is touched lightly. The indicator light on the button lights up.
This further enhances a dynamic driving style. Information
Coasting mode is switched off and automatic
The PDK transmission temporarily changes to the In the case of a sporty driving or when swiftly stopping of the engine is suppressed.
sportiest gear-changing map, i.e. to the highest releasing the accelerator pedal, coasting mode is
suppressed to allow targeted use of the engine Switching on
f Press button .
possible gear-changing points, if the accelerator
pedal is pressed quickly. The transmission braking effect. On more pronounced uphill
gradients, “coasting” is also prevented as the The indicator light on the button goes out.
accordingly shifts down immediately by one or two
coasting phases are very short due to the gradient Coasting mode is switched on and the engine
gears (temporary downshift).
and no significant fuel savings can be achieved. is automatically stopped when the vehicle
The transmission no longer selects 7th gear at
On more pronounced downhill gradients, coasting stops.
very high driving speeds.

“Sport” mode activated Shifting gears on the steering wheel

The PDK transmission switches to a sporty gear- Information With the shift buttons on the steering wheel, you
changing map and shortens the shifting times. Stress on components increases dramatically can change temporarily from automatic selection
A sporty driving style is recognized more quickly when starting with maximum acceleration in mode D to manual mode M.
and the gear-changing speeds are adapted to comparison with normal driving off. For example:
driving performance. – Shifting down before bends and on entering
Preconditions:
Braking downshifts are initiated earlier. Downshifts built-up areas.
– Launch Control should only be used when the
occur for small decelerations, even at higher revs. – Shifting down on downward slopes (engine
engine has reached operating temperature.
braking).
“Sport Plus” mode activated – “Sport Plus” mode must be switched on
– Shifting down for brief spurts of acceleration.
In “Sport Plus” mode, the PDK transmission (indicator light on the button comes on and
The manual selection mode remains engaged:
changes to a shift program designed for driving SPORT PLUS appears on the digital
– For cornering (depending on the lateral
on race circuits. 7th gear is not selected. speedometer or on the steering wheel).
acceleration) and overrunning.
The gear-changing performance is enhanced 1. Press the brake with your left foot.
– When the vehicle is stationary
significantly again compared with “Sport” mode. 2. Quickly press the accelerator down fully
f Please see the chapter ““SPORT” AND “SPORT
(e.g. at a junction).
(kickdown activated) and hold it.
The engine speed will level off at around The system leaves manual selection mode:
PLUS” MODE” on page 172.
6,500 rpm. – automatically after around 6 seconds
Driving off with Launch Control “Launch Control activated” is displayed on (unless cornering or overrunning),
Launch Control allows you to achieve maximum the multi-function display. – after driving off.
acceleration from standstill. Depending on equipment, the “LAUNCH Kickdown
h WARNING
CONTROL” logo appears on the steering The kickdown function is active in selector-lever
Endangering other road
wheel. positions D and M.
users
Launch Control is designed to be used in a
3. Release the brake within a few seconds. f For optimum acceleration, e.g. when
Remaining stationary for a long time with LAUNCH overtaking, press the accelerator pedal
controlled environment on closed circuit driving
CONTROL can lead to overloading of the beyond the full-throttle point (kickdown).
courses where no vehicle cross traffic or
transmission. The transmission shifts down depending on the
pedestrian traffic is present.
f Use Launch Control only if conditions permit it
To protect the transmission, the engine power is speed of travel and engine speed.
then reduced and the LAUNCH CONTROL process Upshifts occur at the highest possible engine
to be applied in a safe manner.
f Do not use Launch Control if there is a
is cancelled. speeds.
In order to drive off, the accelerator must
possibility it could endanger other persons.
first be fully released.
Such a possibility exists if you cannot see that
you have a clear road with no possibility of
cross traffic in your intended direction of
driving.

PDK selector lever Steering wheel with shift buttons Steering wheel with shift paddles
M – Manual selection mode Shifting up using the selector lever or the Shifting up with selector lever or
The currently engaged gear is retained when you shift buttons right “+” shift paddle
change from D to M. f Press the PDK selector lever or shift button on f Press the PDK selector lever forward or pull
If you change from M to D, the gear-changing map the steering wheel forward. the right shift paddle on the steering wheel
suitable for your current driving style is selected back.
Shifting down with selector lever or shift
and the appropriate gear is selected. buttons Shifting down with selector lever or
The selector lever and the two shift buttons in the f Pull the PDK selector lever or shift button on left “–” shift paddle
upper steering wheel spokes or the shift paddles the steering wheel back. f Pull the PDK selector lever or left shift paddle
behind these spokes permit comfortable and safe on the steering wheel back.
selection of the seven forward gears.
Shift to N – Neutral using the shift paddles
f Pull both shift paddles simultaneously and
release them again immediately. Transmission
in N – Neutral.
The vehicle rolls with the engine disengaged
and at idle speed without engine braking effect.
The number in the gear indicator goes out and
the selector lever position flashes.

Power transmission can be re-established by

pulling one of the shift paddles or by actuating
the selector lever.
At low speeds approaching standstill, the brake
must be actuated in order to establish power
transmission.
Fast gearshifting by repeated operation
of the selector lever, shift buttons or shift
paddles.
You can shift up or down by the corresponding
number of gears by quickly operating the selector
lever, the shift buttons or the shift paddles several
times in succession.
Gear changes that would exceed the upper or
lower engine-speed limit are not executed by the
control unit.
There is no automatic upshift at the upper engine-
Upshift prompt: M – Manual mode
speed limit in selector-lever position M. Upshift
suppression can be cancelled by kickdown Upshift prompt for fuel-economy-
operation. If, for example, the engine-speed limit optimized driving
is reached during overtaking and an automatic The consumption-oriented upshift indicator A in
upshift does not occur, the transmission shifts up the tachometer at the right beside the digital
in this case as a result of kickdown operation. speed display helps you to develop a fuel-saving
f Select an appropriately low gear on upward driving style.
and downward slopes. The upshift indicator lights up – prompting you to
This will ensure optimum use of engine power shift up to the next-higher gear – depending on the
and engine braking. selected gear, engine speed and accelerator
pedal position.
f Change to the next-higher gear when the
upshift indicator lights up.

Reduced Driving Programme If there is a fault in the transmission “Drive temperature too high Reduce
In the event of a transmission fault, the “Transm. load”
Failure of the selector display in the
failure Park vehicle safely” or “Transm. fault
tachometer – Effects:
Poss. no R gear Drive on poss.” warning or the
In the event of failure of the selector display the “Warning jerks” can be felt when driving off and
“Drive temperature too high Reduce load”
“Transm. failure Park vehicle safely” warning the engine power may be restricted.
f Action required:
warning will appear on the multi-function display,
appears on the multi-function display. depending on the priority (yellow or red).
Do not hold the vehicle with the accelerator on
“Transm. failure Park vehicle safely” “Transm. failure Park vehicle safely” a hill, for example. Hold the vehicle with the
brake. Reduce engine load. Stop the vehicle in
– Effect: – Effect: a suitable place if possible. Allow the engine to
No selector-lever position is displayed in the Vehicle can be driven only until it comes to run in selector-lever position P or N until the
tachometer. a stop. warning disappears.
Vehicle can be driven only until it comes to f Action required:
a stop.
f Action required:
It is not possible to continue driving. Stop the
vehicle immediately in a suitable place. Have
It is not possible to continue driving. Stop the the fault corrected immediately at an
vehicle immediately in a suitable place. Have authorized Porsche dealer. If the vehicle has to
the fault corrected immediately at an be towed:
authorized Porsche dealer. If the vehicle has to Please see the chapter “TOWING”
be towed: on page 255.
Please see the chapter “TOWING”
on page 255. “Transm. fault Poss. no R gear
Drive on poss.“
– Effects:
Restricted gearshift comfort,
reverse gear may not be available.
f Action required:
Have the fault corrected immediately at an
authorized Porsche dealer.

Transmission and Chassis Control Systems

Your Porsche sports car features a complex integrated system made up of all control systems acting in power transmission and in the chassis.
All control systems are networked with the aim of combining the best possible driving performance with maximum safety.
The following systems are involved, depending on equipment:
System/designation Scope
PSM – Driving stability control
Porsche Stability Management – Anti-lock brake system (ABS)
– Brake system prefilling
– Brake booster (Hydraulic Brake Assist)
– Automatic brake differential (ABD)
– Anti-slip control (ASR)
– Engine drag torque control (MSR)
– Steering torque recommendation
– HOLD function: Drive-Off Assistant on vehicles with manual transmission,
standstill management on vehicles with PDK
PASM – Shock absorber system with adaptive, continuous shock absorber control
Porsche Active Suspension Management
PTV – Laterally dynamic braking intervention for more agile cornering
Porsche Torque Vectoring – Rear differential lock with fixed asymmetrical locking ratio

h WARNING Porsche Stability Management – Improved braking stability on bends and on

Driver responsibility
different or varying road surfaces.
Despite the advantages of transmission and (PSM) – Improved brake function and shorter stopping
chassis control systems, it is still the driver’s PSM is an active control system for stabilization of distance in the event of emergency braking.
responsibility to adapt his driving style and the vehicle during extreme driving maneuvers.
Readiness for operation
maneuvers in line with road and weather PSM makes use of both the automatic brake
conditions, as well as the traffic situation. differential (ABD) and anti-slip regulation (ASR) PSM is switched on automatically every time you
The increased safety that is provided should not systems, as well as the functions of the anti-lock start the engine.
induce you to take greater risks with your safety. brake system (ABS) and engine drag torque Function
The limits set by the physics of driving cannot be control system (MSR). Sensors at the wheels, brakes, steering system
overcome. Loss of control over the
h WARNING and engine continuously measure:
These systems cannot reduce the risk of vehicle – Speed
accidents due to inappropriate speed.
f Adapt your driving style, maneuvers and speed
In spite of the advantages of PSM, it is still the – Direction of travel (steering angle)
driver’s responsibility to adapt his driving style and – Lateral acceleration
to the road and weather conditions, as well as maneuvers in line with road and weather – Axial acceleration
the traffic situation. conditions, as well as the traffic situation. – Rate of turn about the vertical axis
The increased safety that is provided should not PSM uses these values to determine the direction
induce you to take greater risks with your safety. of travel desired by the driver.
The limits set by the physics of driving cannot be PSM intervenes and corrects the course if the
overcome, even with PSM. actual direction of motion deviates from the
Risk of accidents due to inappropriate speed desired course (steering-wheel position):
cannot be reduced by PSM. It brakes individual wheels as required.
If necessary, PSM also influences the engine
Advantages of PSM power or the gear-changing characteristic of
– Best possible traction and lane-holding ability Porsche Doppelkupplung (PDK) in order to
in all driving situations – even on road surfaces stabilise the vehicle.
with varying friction.
– The system compensates for undesired
vehicle reactions (Ferraria effect) when the
driver releases the accelerator pedal or brakes
on bends. This compensation functions up to
the maximum lateral acceleration.
– PSM actively stabilises the vehicle if necessary
during dynamic driving maneuvers (e.g. rapid
steering movements, during lane changes,
or on alternating bends).

The events below inform the driver of PSM control Automatic brake differential (ABD)
operations and warn him to adapt his driving style The ABD system controls the front and rear axles
to the road conditions: separately. If one wheel of an axle starts to spin,
– PSM warning light on the instrument panel it is braked so that the other wheel on the same
flashes. axle can be driven.
– Hydraulic noises can be heard. ABD recognizes different driving states, and it
– The vehicle decelerates and steering-wheel features control strategies adapted to these
forces are altered as PSM controls the brakes. states. In situations in which little propulsive power
– Reduced engine power. is required, such as when the vehicle moves off on
– The brake pedal pulsates and its position is a level gravel surface, traction control already
changed during braking. becomes active at low engine speeds. If a large
In order to achieve full vehicle deceleration, amount of propulsive power is required, e.g. when
foot pressure must be increased after the driving off on an uphill slope or for rapid
brake pedal has begun vibrating. acceleration, the ABD system is adapted
Examples of PSM control operations accordingly.
– If the “front wheels of the vehicle drift” on a Anti-slip control (ASR)
bend, the engine power is reduced and the The anti-slip control system prevents the wheels
rear wheel on the inside of the bend is braked from spinning by adjusting the engine power, Switching off PSM
if necessary. thereby ensuring good lane-holding ability and f Press button for at least 1 second.
– If the rear of the vehicle swings out on a bend, stable handling. PSM is switched off after a short delay.
the front wheel on the outside of the bend is The indicator light on the button and the
braked. Engine drag torque control (MSR)
PSM OFF warning light on the instrument
– Brake system prefilling: In conditions of excessive slip, the engine drag panel light up.
The brake system is prepared for possible torque control system prevents all driven wheels The warning “PSM off” appears on the
subsequent emergency braking if the from locking up when the vehicle is overrunning. multi-function display in the instrument panel.
accelerator pedal is released suddenly and This is also the case for downshifts on a slippery When braking in the ABS control range,
quickly. The brake system is prefilled and the road. the vehicle is stabilised even when PSM is
brake pads are already applied gently to the Steering torque pulse switched off.
brake discs. One-sided spinning of the wheels is prevented,
The steering torque pulse provides the driver
– Brake booster (Hydraulic Brake Assist): even with PSM switched off.
with steering assistance when braking on road
In the event of an emergency braking operation
surfaces with differing friction values.
where the pedal force is insufficient, a brake
Additional steering forces also assist the driver
booster provides the braking pressure
during countersteering.
necessary for maximum deceleration at all
4 wheels.

h WARNING No PSM assistance “Sport Plus” mode HOLD Function: Drive-Off

When PSM is switched off, PSM support is no
A sportier setup is obtained when “Sport Plus” Assistant, Standstill Management
mode is switched on.
longer provided in critical driving situations The HOLD function, as an assistance function,
PSM interventions occur later than in Normal
outside the ABS control range. assists the driver when stopping and driving off on
f PSM should always be switched on during
mode. The vehicle can be maneuvred with greater
upward slopes.
agility at its performance limits, without having to
“normal” driving. The vehicle is automatically prevented from rolling
dispense with the assistance of PSM in
back away from the desired direction of travel.
However, it may be a good idea to switch off emergency situations. This helps to achieve
When the HOLD function is active, the indicator
PSM temporarily in exceptional situations: optimal lap times, particularly on race circuits and
light on the instrument panel comes on.
– On a loose surface and in deep snow. on a dry road surface.
– When “rocking the vehicle free” Driving off with the Drive-Off Assistant on
PSM warning light vehicles with manual transmission
(also with snow chains).
– The PSM warning light on the instrument panel 1. Hold the vehicle securely on the slope with the
lights up for a lamp check when the ignition is footbrake.
Information switched on. The engine must be running.
The vehicle retains its enhanced braking readiness – The light indicates a control operation, even 2. Press the clutch pedal fully.
through prefilling of the brake system even when when PSM is switched off, e.g. brake control in 3. Engage a gear corresponding to the direction
PSM is switched off. the event of one-sided wheel spin. of travel up the slope (1st gear or reverse
When PSM is switched off, wheel-specific brake – The light - in conjunction with the multi-function gear).
interventions and the anti-slip control system display - indicates a fault. 4. Release the footbrake while keeping the clutch
(ASR) are also switched off. The warning message “PSM failure Consult pedal pressed.
The automatic brake differential (ABD) remains on. a workshop Adapted driving permitted” The vehicle is held on the slope to facilitate
appears on the multi-function display in the driving off and prevent it from rolling back.
Switching PSM back on instrument panel. 5. Drive off as usual.
f Press button . For information on warning messages on the
PSM is active immediately. multi-function display:
The indicator light on the button and the f Please see the chapter “OVERVIEW OF Information
WARNING AND INFORMATION MESSAGES” If the vehicle is held on the slope by the electric
PSM OFF warning light on the instrument panel
on page 116. parking brake, drive off in the usual way.
go out.
The message “PSM on” appears on the f Adapt your driving style according to the The electric parking brake detects the driver’s
changed conditions. intention to drive off and is released automatically.
f Contact an authorized Porsche dealer. For information on the electric parking brake:
f Please see the chapter “ELECTRIC PARKING
Towing
BRAKE” on page 137.
For information on towing:
f Please see the chapter “TOWING”
on page 255.

h WARNING
Limits of HOLD function h WARNING
Brake pedal
Information feels different
The Drive-Off Assistant will not function: The limits set by the physics of driving cannot be When the HOLD function is active, the brake pedal
– If the clutch is not pressed. overcome, even with the HOLD function. may feel different and you may hear hydraulic
– If the vehicle is not stationary. Responsibility for driving off on upward slopes is noises.
– If the engine is not running. still the driver’s, despite the HOLD function.
This behavior is normal for the system. It is not
– On gradients of less than 5 %. Assistance by the HOLD function is not always
a fault.
– If the pressure on the brake pedal is too low. guaranteed when stopping and driving off on a
slippery surface (e.g. on icy or loose surfaces).
In this case, the vehicle can slip.
f Always adjust your driving style to the driving
Standstill management on vehicles with PDK
transmission
conditions and vehicle load. Use the footbrake
The vehicle is stopped and prevented from rolling
if necessary.
back away from the desired direction of travel
even without pressing the brake. If the Drive-Off Assistant is not functioning, the
driver cannot be assisted when driving off on hills.
f Hold the vehicle with the footbrake.
Information
The HOLD function is not available on vehicles with h CAUTION Drive-Off assistant not
PDK transmission if the PDK selector lever is in working
position N. If the Drive-Off Assistant is not functioning, the
If the PDK selector lever is moved while the HOLD driver cannot be assisted when driving off on hills.
function is active, the HOLD function is f Hold the vehicle with the footbrake.
deactivated.
h CAUTION Vehicle roll-back
If the driver’s safety-belt is unfastened and the
driver’s door is opened while the HOLD function is If the vehicle comes to a standstill on a steep uphill
active, the electric parking brake is activated gradient without operation of the footbrake by the
automatically. driver, this may result in a certain roll-back before
For information on the electric parking brake: the vehicle is held by the HOLD function. In this
f Please see the chapter “ELECTRIC PARKING situation, the roll-back can be reduced by pressing
BRAKE” on page 137. the footbrake.
f Assist holding of the vehicle by increasing the
braking force with the footbrake.

ABS Brake System Function In this case, the braking system will operate
The decisive advantage of ABS lies in the driving without lock prevention, as in vehicles without
(Anti-Lock Brake System) ABS.
stability and manoeuvrability of the vehicle in
h WARNING
Loss of control over
hazardous situations. f Adapt your driving style to the changed
the vehicle braking behavior.
ABS prevents locking of the wheels during full
In spite of the advantages of ABS, it is still the braking, on almost all road surfaces, until just The ABS must be checked by your Porsche
driver’s responsibility to adapt his driving style before the vehicle stops. dealer in order to prevent the occurrence of
and maneuvers in line with road and weather further faults with unpredictable
ABS begins to control the braking process as
conditions, as well as the traffic situation. consequences.
soon as a wheel shows a tendency to lock.
The increased safety that is provided should not Please contact a qualified specialist workshop.
This controlled braking process is comparable
induce you to take greater risks with your safety. We recommend that you get an authorized
with extremely rapid cadence braking.
The limits set by the physics of driving cannot be Porsche dealer to do this work as they have
The pulsating brake pedal and a “juddering noise”
overcome, even with ABS. trained workshop personnel and the necessary
warn the driver to adapt his driving speed to the
Risk of accidents due to inappropriate speed parts and tools.
road conditions.
cannot be reduced by ABS. f If full braking is necessary, press the brake The ABS control unit is adjusted for the approved
tire dimensions.
pedal fully during the whole braking operation,
ABS ensures The use of tires with non-approved dimensions can
even though the pedal is pulsating. Do not
– Full steering control lead to different wheel speeds, causing ABS to
reduce brake pressure.
Vehicle remains steerable switch off.
– Good driving stability Warning light USA
No skidding due to locked wheels Warning light Canada
– Optimum braking distance If the ABS warning light lights up on the instrument
Shorter stopping distance in most cases panel while the engine is running, the ABS has
– Prevention of wheel locking switched off because of a fault.
No flat spots on the tires The warning message “ABS/PSM failure
Adapted driving permitted” appears on the
function display:
on page 116.


Information
Management (PASM)
The last selected chassis setup is stored in the
The PASM system actively adjusts the shock
memory after the ignition is switched off.
absorbers. The adjustable damper system selects
the appropriate damping level for each wheel
according to the driving situation and driving
Warning message
conditions. Driving safety, agility and comfort are The system automatically detects PASM faults and
optimised. displays them on the multi-function display in the
instrument panel.
Two different chassis setups can be selected at
the push of a button: For information on warning messages on the
multi-function display:
– “Chassis Normal”
– “Chassis Sport”
In Normal mode the vehicle is in a sporty and
on page 116.
f Adapt your driving style according to the
comfortable setup.
Sport mode offers very sporty shock absorber
changed conditions.
f Contact an authorized Porsche dealer in order
tuning (e.g. for driving on the race circuit).
In addition to manual mode selection, PASM also
adjusts shock absorber tuning for either “Sport”
Selecting the PASM mode to correct the fault.
or “Comfort” driving, depending on the driving 1. Switch on ignition.
situation. 2. Press button (repeatedly).
On the button:
– No indicator light comes on when “Chassis
Normal” is selected (default setting).
– An indicator light comes on when “Chassis
Sport” is selected.
In addition, the selected chassis setup is shown on
the multi-function display in the instrument panel
for approx. 4 seconds.

Porsche Torque Vectoring (PTV) Dynamic Engine Mounting (PADM) “Sport” and “Sport Plus” mode
Functional Description On vehicles with Sport Chrono package The selectable chassis settings mean that the
Loss of control over vehicle can offer various modes for a sportier
h WARNING Dynamic Engine Mounting with variable damping is
the vehicle overall setup.
a system designed to enhance both driving
The “Sport” mode pushes the control systems
Despite the advantages of PTV, it is still the dynamics and driving comfort. Depending on the
more in the direction of greater emotionality and
driver’s responsibility to adapt his/her driving style driving situation, the ideal mounting rigidity and
performance during everyday driving.
and maneuvers in line with road and weather damping is automatically set in the range between
conditions, as well as the traffic situation. a rigid engine-to-body connection (increase in In “Sport Plus” mode, maximum performance is
driving dynamics) and decoupling of the engine set for race-circuit-like driving:
The increased safety that is provided should not
from the body (increase in driving comfort). – In “Sport Plus” mode:
induce you to take greater risks with your safety.
PASM (Porsche Active Suspension
The limits set by the physics of driving cannot be “Sport” mode Management) is automatically changed to
overcome, even with PTV.
When “Sport” mode is switched on, a more rigid “Chassis Normal” or “Chassis Sport” mode.
Risk of accidents due to inappropriate speed
engine-to-body connection is achieved for a sporty – The PDK transmission switches to a sporty
cannot be reduced by PTV.
driving style. gear-changing map and shortens the gear
shifting times when Sport mode is activated.
Porsche Torque Vectoring (PTV) “Sport Plus” mode Gear changes take place faster.
PTV consists of a control system for When “Sport Plus” mode is switched on, an – The electronic accelerator pedal reacts
driving-dynamics relevant brake interventions optimal engine-to-body connection is achieved sooner, and the engine is more responsive to
enabling variable drive-torque distribution at the for driving on race circuits. throttle inputs. When Sport mode is switched
rear axle in conjunction with a mechanical on and the vehicle is travelling at a speed of
rear-axle differential lock.
Warning message
less than 25 mph (40 km/h), this function is
Dynamic engine mounting faults are indicated by
By using gentle braking interventions that are activated only after the driver has floored the
a warning message on the on-board computer.
imperceptible to the driver at the rear wheel on accelerator pedal or released it briefly.
the inside of the bend, PTV improves steering – The rpm limiter characteristic is “harder”.
performance and steering precision. The vehicle In other words: the engine is immediately
on page 116.
follows the steering angle of the front wheels more throttled when the performance limits are
precisely. Understeer is largely prevented in the reached (only in manual selection mode on
limit range. This increases the lateral acceleration vehicles with PDK).
potential and higher cornering speeds are
possible.
The mechanical rear-axle differential lock
additionally improves traction in the event of wheel
spin. It reduces load alteration effects during rapid
cornering and increases driving stability at higher
speeds.

– PSM (Porsche Stability Management) control is

more sporty in “Sport Plus” mode. PSM
interventions are later than in Normal mode.
The driver can maneuvre the vehicle with
greater agility at its performance limits,
without having to dispense with the assistance
of PSM in emergency situations. This helps to
achieve optimal lap times, particularly on race
circuits with a dry road surface.
– PADM changes to more sporty maps for the
dynamic engine mountings and ensures a
stiffer engine-to-body connection.
In “Sport” for a sporty driving style, in
“Sport Plus” mode for race-circuit-like driving.
– The dynamic cornering light reacts more
spontaneously to steering angle changes.
– The sports exhaust system is be switched to a
sound-optimised mode, but can be switched
Switching “Sport” mode on and off Switching “Sport Plus” mode on and off
f Press button f Press button
off separately via the button.
The Auto Start Stop function and coasting . .
mode are deactivated. When “Sport” mode is switched on, the When “Sport Plus” mode is switched on,
f Please read the relevant chapters. indicator light on the button lights up. the indicator light on the button lights up.
The word “SPORT” appears on the digital The words “SPORT PLUS” appear on the digital
speedometer or on the steering wheel, speedometer or on the steering wheel,
depending on vehicle equipment. depending on vehicle equipment.
A sporty gear-changing map is enabled and the In “Sport Plus” mode, the PDK transmission
gear shifting times are shorter for the PDK changes to a shift program designed for driving
transmission. on race circuits. 7th gear is not selected.
A sporty driving style is recognized more quickly
and the gear-changing speeds are adapted to
driving performance.
Braking downshifts are initiated earlier. Downshifts
occur for small decelerations, even at higher revs.

“Sport Plus” and “PASM Chassis Sport”

modes
Switching “Sport Plus” mode on and off
simultaneously activates and deactivates the
“PASM Sport” mode.
Switching “Sport” mode has no influence on the
PASM mode.
The PASM mode can be manually deactivated if
you want to use the characteristics of “Sport” or
“Sport Plus” mode, but prefer a more comfortable
chassis setup.
f Press button .
Warning messages
The warning message “Sport mode not
available” appears on the multi-function display in
the instrument panel in the event of a fault.
For information on warning messages on the
Sports Exhaust System
multi-function display: Switching on and off
f Please see the chapter “OVERVIEW OF The sports exhaust system can be switched to
WARNING AND INFORMATION MESSAGES” a sound-optimized mode when the ignition is
on page 116. switched on.
f Press button .
Information When the sports exhaust system is switched
on, the indicator light on the button lights up.
After the ignition is switched off, Sport mode is
automatically reset to Normal mode.
f Please see the chapter “PORSCHE ACTIVE
SUSPENSION MANAGEMENT (PASM)”
on page 171.

Retractable Rear Wing h CAUTION

Extending and
retracting the rear wing
The rear wing improves driving stability at high
speeds. When extending or retracting the rear wing
manually when the vehicle is stationary, parts of
Automatic mode the body can get trapped between the moving
Depending on the vehicle speed the rear wing rear wing and fixed vehicle parts.
extends automatically at speeds above approx. f Make sure that no persons or objects are
75 mph (120 km/h) and retracts again below within the range of movement of the rear wing.
approx. 50 mph (80 km/h).
If the automatic control system fails, the warning NOTICE
message “Spoiler loss Adjust speed” appears
Risk of damage to rear wing.
f Do not pull or push the vehicle by the rear
on the multi-function display.
wing.
f Always retract the extended rear wing in car
on page 116.
washes.
h WARNING
Failure of the retractable
rear wing
Display of the warning message “Spoiler loss Manual mode
Adjust speed” indicates failure of the retractable When the ignition is on, the rear wing can be
rear wing. Driving stability will be adversely extended and retracted manually using the button
affected by increased rear axle lift at higher in the center console.
speeds. When the rear wing is in manual mode, the
f Adapt your driving style and speed to the indicator light on the button lights up.
changed driving behavior.
f Have the fault corrected at an authorized
Extending the rear wing manually
Porsche dealer.
f Press button briefly.
The rear wing extends.
The rear wing is in manual mode.
Retracting the rear wing manually
0–9 mph (0–15 km/h):
f Press button and hold until the LED in
the button goes out.
Above 9 mph (15 km/h):
f Press button briefly.
LED switches off immediately after pressing.
The rear wing is in automatic mode.

Storage and Luggage Compartment

Storage .....................................................177
Drinks Holder/Cupholder .............................178
Ashtray ......................................................179
Cigarette Lighter.........................................180
Sockets .....................................................180
Front Luggage Compartment .......................182
Loading Information ....................................184
176 Storage and Luggage Compartment

Storage Storage options

Unsecured, incorrectly There are various storage options available,
h WARNING
secured or incorrectly depending on the vehicle equipment:
positioned loads – In the doors
– In the door sill next to the passenger’s seat
An unsecured or incorrectly positioned load can
– In the center console
slip out of place or endanger the vehicle
– Storage net in the passenger’s footwell
occupants as a result of braking, direction
changes or in accidents.
f Do not transport items of luggage or objects
NOTICE
unsecured in the passenger compartment. Heavy and bulky objects can damage the storage
f Do not transport any heavy objects in open net.
storage trays. f Do not place any heavy and bulky objects in the
f Always keep the covers of the storage trays storage net.
closed while driving. Do not exceed the – Clothes hook on back of seat backrests
maximum gross weight and the axle load. (depending on vehicle equipment).
This information can be found under – Glove box with pen holder
“Technical data” in this Owner’s Manual: – Storage tray in the armrest
Please see chapter “WEIGHTS” on page 266. Glove box
f Adapt the tire pressure to the load.
– Drinks holder/cupholder
On the inside of the glove box lid, there is a holder
If you change the tire pressure, you must for clipping in a pen.
also update the setting for Tire Pressure Opening
f Pull the latch handle (arrow) and open the lid.
Monitoring System.
Information on tire pressures for partially and
fully loaded vehicles can be found under Locking
“Technical data” in this Owner’s Manual: f Always lock the latch handle with the
Please see chapter “TIRE PRESSURE FOR emergency key to secure the contents from
COLD TIRES (68 °F/ 20 °C)” on page 264. unauthorized access.
Storage and Luggage Compartment 177

Drinks Holder/Cupholder
You can place drinks in the cupholder.
h
Spilling hot drinks
CAUTION
Hot drinks can cause scalding if spilt.
f Only use containers that fit.
f Never put overfull containers in the cupholder.
f Do not use hot drinks.
NOTICE
Risk of damage due to drinks being spilt.

f Only use containers that fit.
f Never put overfull containers in the cupholder.
Storage tray in the armrest between the Opening the cupholder

seats There are two folding cupholders behind the panel
Opening above the glove box.
f Press the button (arrow) on the passenger’s
side of the armrest. Information
The lid pops up automatically. f Keep the panel closed when driving.
1. Press the cupholder panel.
The panel opens.

2. Press the symbol for the left or right Pulling cupholder out Ashtray
cupholder. 1. Pull out the holder (arrow). (depending on equipment)
The cupholder folds out. 2. Insert a cup/container.
3. Close the panel in the middle so that the 3. Carefully slide the holder inwards to adjust it to h WARNING Ashtray fire risk
f Never use ashtray for waste paper disposal,
cupholder does not move while driving. the size of the cup/container.
The cupholders can be pulled out in order to fit
Folding cupholder in as it could pose a fire hazard.
larger containers.
1. Push cupholder drawer in.
Opening
2. Open the panel in the middle.
3. Fold the cupholder in and engage it. 1. Press briefly on the ashtray lid.
4. Close the panel in the middle. The lid opens automatically.
Emptying
2. To unlock, press ashtray insert forwards at the
top right until it is felt to disengage.
3. Pull the ashtray insert upwards to remove it.
f After emptying the ashtray insert, replace it
and push it downwards until it is felt to engage.

Cigarette Lighter 2. Press the lighter into the receptacle. When the Sockets in the glove box and passenger footwell
element is red hot, the lighter will jump back to
(depending on equipment)
its initial position. Sockets
h WARNING
Burns due to hot Electrical accessories can be connected to the
h DANGER
Danger of fire due to the
cigarette lighter 12 V sockets.
disposal of burning
The tip of the cigarette lighter becomes very hot cigars or cigarettes. Depending on the vehicle equipment, these
in use. sockets are located in the glove box, the
f Do not leave children in the vehicle unattended. Cigarettes or cigars can be blown into the air
passenger footwell and in the oddments tray in the
f Never touch the heating element or sides of inlets A by the air flow and cause a fire in the
center console.
f For information on using charging adapters in
engine compartment.
f Do not throw burning cigarettes or cigars out
the lighter.
f Only hold the heated lighter by the knob. 12 volt sockets:
of the vehicle.
Please see chapter “USING CHARGING
Using the cigarette lighter ADAPTER FOR 12 VOLT SOCKET/CIGARETTE
The cigarette lighter is ready for use regardless of LIGHTER” on page 181.
ignition lock position.
f For information on using charging adapters in Information
the cigarette lighter:
The maximum electrical load of a socket is 20 A,
Please see chapter “USING CHARGING
but only if no other loads are switched on. Do not
ADAPTER FOR 12 VOLT SOCKET/CIGARETTE
exceed 10 A per socket if several loads are
LIGHTER” on page 181.
operating simultaneously.
1. Press briefly on the ashtray lid.

Center console socket A - Suitable charging adapter

B - Unsuitable charging adapter
Information Using charging adapter for 12 volt

The sockets and thus the connected electrical socket/cigarette lighter
accessories function even if the ignition is NOTICE
switched off or the ignition key is removed.
Risk of damage to the electrical system.
f Only use a suitable charging adapter (A) that
If the engine is not running and the accessories
are switched on, the vehicle battery will be
meets the following requirements:
discharged. The power supply is interrupted after
The distance 1 between the ground
30 minutes to protect the vehicle battery. If the
connection and the upper edge of the charging
load is to be switched on again, the ignition must
adapter must be less than approx. 0.63 in.
be switched on once.
(16 mm).
f Unsuitable charging adapters (B) with a larger
distance 1 than 0.63 in. (16 mm) between the
ground connection and the upper edge can
destroy the sockets.

Front Luggage Compartment C- Towing lug Tire filling compressor

f Please see chapter “OPENING AND CLOSING
D- Tool kit
E- Adapter for security wheel bolts Removing the tire filling compressor
LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT LIDS” on page 22. F- Key for emergency operation of convertible top 1. Lift plastic cover A at the handle recesses
Tools (arrows) until the clips are heard to disengage
Tire sealant
and pull forwards slightly.
The tire sealant is located in plastic box A. The tools are located in a plastic box B.
f Grasp plastic box A at the handle recess and f Grasp plastic box B at the handle recess and
2. Lift the plastic cover at front.
remove. remove.
f To insert the plastic box, first insert the tab at f To insert the plastic box, first insert the tab at
the rear. the rear.
Engage the box at the front. Engage the box at the front.

3. retaining strap B on the underside of the 4. Open the cover of the storage compartment 3. Detach retaining strap B and clip onto the
plastic cover and attach to the luggage for the tire filling compressor. plastic cover.
compartment lid. 5. Remove the tire filling compressor from the 4. Insert plastic cover A with the guides at the
storage compartment. rear edge and lay it on the yellow holder. Lower
the plastic cover at the front.
Stowing the tire filling compressor
5. Ensure that the centering pins on the
1. The tire filling compressor is wedge-shaped. underside of the cover engage in the guide.
Insert the tire filling compressor in the storage Press the cover downwards at the handle
compartment so that the narrower side faces recesses, until the clips are heard to engage.
forwards (illustration).
2. Close the cover of the storage compartment
for the tire filling compressor.

Loading Information The Gross Combined Weight Rating is the

maximum total weight rating of vehicle,
Definitions passengers and cargo.
The rear-axle load is the vehicle weight on the The Vehicle Capacity Weight – Load Limit - is
rear axle plus the weight of the transported load. the maximum total weight limit specified of the
The Curb weight – actual weight of your vehicle - load (passengers and cargo) for the vehicle. This
vehicle weight including standard and optional is the maximum weight of passengers and cargo
equipment, fluids, and emergency tools. This that can be loaded into the vehicle. This infor-
weight does not include passengers and cargo. mation can be found on the tire pressure plate.
The Gross Vehicle Weight is the sum of the curb The maximum loaded vehicle weight is the
weight and the weight of passengers and cargo sum of curb weight, accessory weight, vehicle
combined. capacity weight and production options weight.
The Gross Vehicle Weight Rating is the The load rating is the maximum load that a tire
maximum total weight of vehicle, passengers, is rated to carry for a given inflation pressure.
luggage and optional equipment. The maximum load rating is the load rating for
The Gross Axle Weight Rating is the maximum a tire at the maximum permissible inflation
load limit for the front or the rear axle. This pressure.
A - Checking coolant level, top up if necessary information is located on the safety compliance The cargo capacity is the permissible weight of
B - Topping up engine oil sticker located in the driver’s side door aperture cargo, the subtracted weight of passengers from
Rear luggage compartment area. the load limit.
The refilling points for coolant A and engine oil B For determining the compatibility of the tire and
h DANGER Overloading vehicle
vehicle load capabilities:
f Please see chapter “TIRES AND WHEELS” on
are located in the rear luggage compartment.
f Please see chapter “CHECKING THE COOLANT Overloading will lead to dangerous vehicle
LEVEL AND ADDING COOLANT” on page 222. page 224. reactions and long braking distances.
f Please see chapter “TOPPING UP ENGINE OIL” The load capacity coefficient (e.g. “106”) is a f Never exceed the specified axle loads.
on page 203. minimum requirement. For more information:
f Please see chapter “INSCRIPTION ON RADIAL NOTICE
TIRE” on page 232.
Risk of damage to the vehicle if the vehicle is
overloaded.
Overloading can shorten the service life of the
tires and car. Damage due to overloading is not
covered by the vehicle warranty.
f Never exceed the specified axle loads.

Steps for determining correct load limit

1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX
pounds” on your vehicle’s placard (depending
on the date of manufacture).
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver
and passengers that will be riding in your
vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and
passengers from XXX kilograms or XXX
pounds.
4. The resulting figure equals the available
amount of cargo and luggage load capacity.
For example, if the “XXX” amount equals 400
lbs. and there will be two - 150 lb passengers
in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo
and luggage load capacity is 100 lbs. [400 -
Example for determining the combined weight of 300 (2 x 150) = 100 lbs.].
occupants and cargo 5. Determine the combined weight of luggage
and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That
Vehicle Load Capacity
f The combined weight of occupants and cargo
weight may not safely exceed the available
cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in
should never exceed the weight shown on the Step 4.
tire pressure plate in the vehicle.
Please see chapter “TIRE PRESSURE PLATE”
on page 227.
f Never exceed the number of passengers
shown on the tire pressure plate in the vehicle.
Determining the combined weight of
occupants and cargo:
f Add the weight of all occupants and then add
the total luggage weight (figure).

Parking
ParkAssist..................................................187
Reversing Camera ......................................189
Swivelling Down Mirror Glass as Parking Aid .190
Garage Door Opener HomeLink®
(Universal Remote Control) ..........................190
186 Parking
ParkAssist h WARNING ParkAssist limits

When the driver is parking and maneuvring Responsibility for parking and for assessing the
the vehicle, ParkAssist indicates the distance risk to persons, children, pets, and small objects
between the vehicle and a large obstacle by around the vehicle lies completely with the driver.
means of signal tones. f Make sure that no persons (especially small
f On vehicles with front and rear sensors: children), animals or obstacles are within the
For information on the ParkAssist visual maneuvering area.
display, please refer also to the section f If the continuous tone sounds, stop and do not
“PARKASSIST” in the operating instructions move your vehicle further in that direction.
for the Porsche Communication Systems
PCM/CDR.
ParkAssist is activated automatically when
reverse gear is selected and the ignition is on.
If the vehicle has front ParkAssist, this also issues
an automatic warning when the distance between
the vehicle and an obstacle in front is less
– than approx. 40 in./100 cm (acoustically)
and approx. 32 in./80 cm (visually). Ultrasound sensors
A warning signal sounds when Sensors

– the distance between the vehicle and an The ultrasound sensors 1 in the rear bumper and
obstacle at the rear is less than the sensors 1 in the front bumper (depending on
approx. 71 in./180 cm. vehicle equipment) measure the distance to the
The ParkAssist visual display appears on the closest obstacle:
central screen of the Porsche communication – Range behind the vehicle:
system. approx. 71 in. (180 cm)
Front and rear ParkAssist is not activated: – Range at the side of the vehicle:
– At a speed of more than approx. 9 mph approx. 24 in. (60 cm)
(15 km/h). – Range in front of the vehicle:
– When the electric parking brake is activated. approx. 47 in. (120 cm)
– When the ParkAssist has been switched off Obstacles cannot be detected in the “blind”
with button A in the overhead console with sensor area (above and below the sensors,
the ignition switched on. e.g. objects hanging down or close to the
The indicator light in button A lights up. ground).
Parking 187
Signal tones/function h WARNING Care required parking

When reverse gear is selected, ParkAssist
confirms that it is switched on by issuing a short Even when using ParkAssist, the driver is still
signal tone. responsible for taking due care when parking and
when assessing obstacles.
If the vehicle has front ParkAssist, no signal tone
A continuous tone sounds when there is a risk of
will be issued when reverse gear is selected.
collision.
f Do not drive rearward any further once
Instead, the ParkAssist visual display will appear
on the central screen of the Porsche
a continuous tone sounds.
communication system.
A detected obstacle is signalled by an Limits of ultrasonic measurement
intermittent tone. The intervals decrease
– ParkAssist cannot detect sound-absorbing
as the obstacle is approached.
obstacles (e.g. winter driving, powder snow,
If the distance drops to less than approx. 12 in.
clothing made from fabric or fur),
(30 cm), a continuous tone sounds.
f Set the radio volume so that the signal tones
– sound-reflecting obstacles (such as glass
surfaces and flat painted surfaces),
are not drowned out.
– and very thin obstacles (e.g. thin posts).
The volume of the signal tones can be changed
Ultrasound sensors Other ultrasound sources (e.g. pneumatic brakes
individually.
of other vehicles, sweeping machines and jack
Maintenance notes For information on changing the signal tone hammers) can interfere with the detection of
f The sensors must always be kept free of dust, volume:
f Please see the chapter “ADJUSTING
obstacles.
ice and snow in order to ensure that they are
fully functional. PARKASSIST VOLUME” on page 114.
f Do not damage sensors by abrasion or
scratching.
f Maintain sufficient distance when cleaning with
high-pressure cleaning equipment.
The sensors will be damaged if the pressure is
too high.
188 Parking
Display due to environmental factors

Correct operation is no longer guaranteed if there
is a temporary fault (e.g. caused by ice formation
or heavy soiling on the sensors).
Depending on the environmental factor, it is
possible that a stop warning with acoustic warning
or a warning triangle without acoustic warning is
displayed on the central screen of the Porsche
communication system.
ParkAssist is ready for operation again when the
interference has been eliminated.
In the event of a permanent fault in ParkAssist,
a continuous tone sounds for three seconds after
reverse gear has been selected.
On vehicles with front and rear sensors only:
In the case of a sensor problem, a warning triangle
appears in the monitoring area for the relevant
Deactivating ParkAssist bumper and a continuous tone sounds for three Reversing Camera
On vehicles with front and rear ParkAssist, the seconds. The reversing camera is located between the
ParkAssist function can be deactivated manually. Possible cause:
f Press button A on the overhead operating
number plate lights in the bumper (illustration).
– Defect or system fault. f Please see chapter “REVERSING CAMERA” in
console. f Have the fault corrected. Please contact an the separate PCM/CDR operating instructions.
The indicator light in the button lights up. authorized Porsche dealer. f Always keep the reversing camera clean and
ParkAssist is switched off. free of ice and snow so that vision is not
impaired.
For car care instructions:
f Please see the chapter “MAINTENANCE AND
CAR CARE” on page 198.
Parking 189
Swivelling down mirror glass manually

If the function was deactivated on the
multi-function display, the exterior mirror on the
passenger’s side can also be swiveled down
manually.
1. Engage reverse gear.
The indicator light B on the selection button A
for adjusting the exterior mirror on the driver’s
side lights up.
2. Press the selection button D for adjusting
the exterior mirror on the passenger’s side.
The mirror on the passenger’s side swivels
down.
Information
The position of the automatically lowered mirror
glass can be changed as required using the
Swivelling Down Mirror Glass as adjustment button C. On vehicles with memory Garage Door Opener HomeLink®
Parking Aid package, the setting is stored on the car key or (Universal Remote Control)
When reverse gear is engaged, the mirror on the the person buttons on the driver’s side. With the HomeLink® of your Porsche, a wide
passenger’s side swivels down slightly to show range of remote-controlled equipment
Moving mirror to its initial position
the curb area. (e.g. garage door/gate to your property, security
The mirror swivels back to its initial position: systems, house lights) can be activated from
Preconditions – after a certain time delay, if the vehicle is inside the vehicle.
– The ignition must be switched on. shifted out of reverse gear, or The HomeLink® system replaces up to three
– The function must be activated on the – immediately, if the vehicle reaches a speed different original remote controls. The signal for
multi-function display. of more than 9 mph (15 km/h). a remote control can be assigned to one of the
For further information on setting the parking aid: The exterior mirror on the passenger’s side can
f Please see the chapter “ADJUSTING
three memory buttons I, II and III on the overhead
also be moved to its initial position manually. operating console keypad. The respective
REVERSING OPTIONS” on page 109. f Press the selection button A for the exterior equipment can then be operated using the
mirror on the driver’s side. programmed memory button.
Transmission of the signal is indicated by the
indicator light in the button II.
190 Parking
Information Information
f Please read the instructions for the original f When the button is pressed, the transmitter
remote control. unit sends the signal forward in direction of
f Information on the compatibility of your travel.
vehicle’s HomeLink® system with the original Always align the vehicle with the receiver.
remote control can be obtained from your Otherwise, range restrictions cannot be ruled
authorized Porsche dealer, on the HomeLink® out.
website (www.homelink.com) or by calling the f Before selling the vehicle, delete the
free HomeLink® hotline (1-800-355-3515). programmed signals for the garage door
opener on the keypad.
h WARNING Garage door opener use f If the equipment cannot be operated after the
initial programming, check whether the original
When opening and closing the equipment being
remote control has fixed or changeable code.
operated, parts of the body could become
To find this out, read the instructions for the
trapped or crushed.
f When using the garage door opener, make
original remote control.
sure that no persons or animals are within the
range of movement of the equipment that is
Operating the garage door opener Deleting programmed signals from the
The ignition must be switched on. buttons
f Press and hold the corresponding HomeLink®
being operated.
f Observe the safety notes for the original This process clears all of the HomeLink®
remote control. button on the overhead operating console programming. It is not possible to individually
keypad. clear the programmed buttons.
The indicator light A lights up during signal Do not repeat this process if you want to assign
transmission. additional signals to the buttons.
Programming garage door opener: f Keep the two outer buttons I and III on the
Deleting and storing signals overhead operating console keypad pressed
for approx. 20 seconds until the indicator
The HomeLink® system is programmed on
light A on button II starts to flash quickly.
f Release the buttons.
the overhead operating console and in direct
proximity to the vehicle’s radiator grille.
The HomeLink® buttons are cleared and can be
Preconditions reprogrammed.
In order to delete programmed signals and
store garage door opener signals,
– the ignition must be switched on,
– the turn signals must be off and
– the engine must be off.
When using the garage door opener, the vehicle
must be within the range of the receiver.
Parking 191
Assigning garage door opener signal to key 6. The turn signal lights will flash once when the
with fixed code system 5 minute teaching readiness period has
On the overhead operating console: elapsed.
1. Switch on ignition. Repeat steps 3 to 5.
2. The standard factory-set codes must be 7. Repeat steps 3 to 5 to assign further signals
deleted before programming for the first to the remaining buttons.
time. Assigning garage door opener signal to
3. Press and hold the desired button on the button with changeable code system
overhead operating console keypad until the With some systems, a changeable code also
indicator light A on button II starts to flash needs to be programmed for the HomeLink®
slowly. system. A second person makes programming
You now have 5 minutes to teach the button. easier.
4. Stand in front of the vehicle with the original
remote control of the system to be Identifying the changeable code
programmed. f Press and hold the previously programmed
HomeLink® button.
If the indicator light A on button II in the overhead
In front of the vehicle: operating console starts to flash quickly and lights
5. Hold the original remote control approx. 12 in. up continuously after approx. 2 seconds, it means
(30 cm) away from the marked position that the equipment has a changeable code
(illustration) and press and hold the transmit system.
button (for more than approx. 1 minute in f Information on synchronization can also be
some cases) until the vehicle’s turn signal found in the operating instructions for the
lights flash on and off three times or the system to be programmed.
indicator light A on the overhead operating Assigning garage door opener signal to key
f Park the vehicle within the range of the remote-
console starts flashing quickly.
The turn signal lights flash three times and the
controlled equipment.
indicator light A flashes quickly to confirm that
On the overhead operating console:
the new signal has been programmed
1. Switch on ignition.
successfully.
2. The standard factory-set codes must be
Several attempts with different distances
deleted before programming for the first time.
between the vehicle and the original remote
control may be necessary.
With some systems, the transmit button on the
original remote control may need to be
pressed again when the indicator light on the
original remote control goes out.
192 Parking
For information on deleting the factory-set codes: 6. The turn signal lights will flash once when the Reprogramming an individual button on the
f Please see the chapter “PROGRAMMING 5 minute teaching readiness period has keypad
GARAGE DOOR OPENER: DELETING AND elapsed. A HomeLink® button can be individually
STORING SIGNALS” on page 191. Repeat steps 3 to 5. reprogrammed without deleting the rest of the
3. Press and hold the desired button on the 7. Repeat steps 3 to 5 to assign further signals button assignments.
overhead operating console keypad until the to the remaining buttons. On the overhead operating console:
indicator light A on button II starts to flash 8. Locate the programming button on the 1. Switch on ignition.
slowly. receiver of the equipment to be programmed, 2. Press and hold the button to be programmed
You now have 5 minutes to teach the button. e.g. on the motor unit of the garage door on the overhead operating console keypad
4. Stand in front of the vehicle with the original opener. (approx. 20 seconds), until indicator light A on
remote control of the system to be button II flashes slowly.
Synchronizing the system
programmed. You now have 5 minutes to teach the button.
9. Activating the motor unit:
In front of the vehicle: 3. Stand in front of the vehicle with the original
Press the programming button on the receiver
5. Hold the original remote control approx. 12 in. remote control of the system to be
of the garage door opener.
(30 cm) away from the marked position programmed.
You then usually have approx. 30 seconds to
(illustration) and press and hold the transmit In front of the vehicle:
initiate step 10 (a setting indicator is usually
button (for more than approx. 1 minute in 4. Hold the original remote control approx. 12 in.
activated on the motor unit).
some cases) until the vehicle’s turn signal (30 cm) away from the marked position
10. Programming on the overhead operating
lights flash on and off three times or the (illustration) and press and hold the transmit
console:
indicator light A on the overhead operating button (for more than approx. 1 minute in
Press the button you selected in step 3 three
console starts flashing quickly. some cases) until the vehicle’s turn signal
times on the overhead operating console
The turn signal lights flash three times and the lights flash on and off three times or the
keypad (you must press the button on the
indicator light A flashes quickly to confirm that indicator light A in the overhead operating
keypad several times to complete the setting
the new signal has been programmed console starts to flash quickly.
process for some devices).
successfully. The turn signal lights flash three times and the
11. Repeat steps 3 to 10 to assign signals to the
Several attempts with different distances indicator light A flashes quickly to confirm that
other buttons.
between the vehicle and the original remote the new signal has been programmed
12. After completing programming on the
control may be necessary. successfully.
overhead operating console, the system
With some systems, the transmit button on the Several attempts with different distances
should recognize the HomeLink® signal and
original remote control may need to be between the vehicle and the original remote
launch as soon as the memory button is
pressed again when the indicator light on the control may be necessary.
pressed when the ignition is switched on.
original remote control goes out. With some systems, the transmit button on the
original remote control may need to be
pressed again when the indicator light on the
original remote control goes out.
Parking 193
5. The turn signal lights will flash once when the

5-minute teaching readiness period has
elapsed.
Repeat steps 1 to 4.
6. Repeat steps 1 to 4 to assign further signals
to the other buttons.
Information
f Please consult an authorized Porsche dealer if
you have not been able to successfully assign
signals to the buttons even though you have
carefully followed the instructions in this
section and the operating instructions for the
original remote control. Your authorized
Porsche dealer has a list of all garage door
opener signals that can be adapted.
f Make sure that the battery in the remote
control for the garage door opener is new.
If the battery voltage is inadequate, faults may
occur in signal transmission. The system in the
vehicle then learns the wrong code, which will
not be recognized reliably by the garage door
opening mechanism.
194 Parking
Alarm System and Theft Protection

Alarm System and
Passenger Compartment Monitoring.............196
Immobilizer.................................................197
Theft Protection ..........................................197
Alarm System and Theft Protection 195

Alarm System and Passenger The alarm system monitors the following alarm
contacts: Information
Compartment Monitoring – Alarm contacts in doors, luggage f If you unlock the vehicle with the emergency
FCC Numbers: compartment lids and headlights.
USA: KR55WK50138 key in the door lock, you must switch the
– Interior surveillance: Movement in the interior ignition on (ignition lock position 1) within
Canada: 7812D-5WK50138 when the vehicle is locked, e.g. attempted 10 seconds of opening the door in order to
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC theft after breaking a window. prevent the alarm system from being
Rules and RSS-210 of Industry Canada. – Inclination sensor country-specific equipment: triggered.
Operation of this device is subject to the following inclination of the vehicle (e.g. when attempting
two conditions: to tow).
1. This device may not cause harmful If one of these alarm contacts is interrupted,
interference, and the alarm horn sounds for approx. 30 seconds Information
2. this device must accept any interference and the emergency flasher flashes. If button on the vehicle key is pressed and a
received including interference that may cause After 5 seconds of interruption, the alarm is door or a luggage compartment lid is not opened,
undesired operation. triggered again. This cycle is repeated up to ten the vehicle is locked again automatically after 30
Changes or modifications not expressly approved times. seconds.
by the party responsible for compliance could void Switching on
f The alarm system is activated when the vehicle
the user's authority to operate the equipment. Switching off the alarm system if it is
triggered
f Unlock vehicle or
is locked.
Information
Switching off switch on ignition.
f The alarm system is deactivated when the
The manufacturer is not responsible for any radio
or TV interference caused by unauthorized Switching off interior surveillance and
vehicle is unlocked.
modifications to this equipment. inclination sensor
Such modification could void the user's authority If people or animals are remaining in the locked
to operate the equipment. vehicle or the vehicle is being transported on,
e.g. a train or ship, the interior surveillance
system and inclination sensor must be switched
off temporarily.
door is opened.
Using the vehicle key
f Quickly press button on the vehicle key
twice within 2 seconds.
The emergency flasher flashes slowly once.
The doors are locked, but can be opened from
inside.
196 Alarm System and Theft Protection

On vehicles with Porsche Entry & Drive Alarm system is activated Theft Protection
f Quickly press button A in the door handle – The indicator lights flash quickly twice when When leaving the vehicle, always:
twice within 2 seconds. the vehicle is being locked, then flash normally. f Close the windows
The emergency flasher flashes slowly once. Alarm system is activated, interior f Close the convertible top.
The doors are locked, but can be opened from surveillance and inclination sensor are f Activate the electric parking brake.
inside. switched off f Remove the ignition key (or switch ignition off
on vehicles with Porsche Entry & Drive).
f Close the glove box.
– The indicator lights flash quickly while you are
Information
f Close all storage compartments.
locking the vehicle, go out for 10 seconds and
f Remove valuables, vehicle registration

The interior surveillance system and inclination then flash normally.
sensor remain switched off if: Faults in the central locking system and documents, telephone and house keys from
– The interior surveillance system and inclination alarm system the vehicle.
f Close the luggage compartment lids.
sensor were switched off when you last locked
The indicator lights come on for 10 seconds, flash
f Lock the doors.
the vehicle
and at double speed for 20 seconds and then flash
If button A was pressed and a door or a normally.
luggage compartment lid was not opened. Avoiding false alarms
f If people or animals are remaining in the locked
Function indication vehicle or the vehicle is being transported on
On vehicles without Porsche Entry & Drive, a train or ship, for example, the interior
the locking condition of the vehicle is indicated by surveillance system and inclination sensor
the indicator lights in the central locking button must be switched off temporarily.
flashing at different frequencies. f Always close all door windows.
The indicator lights go out when the vehicle is
unlocked. Immobilizer
On vehicles with Porsche Entry & Drive, the There is a transponder (an electronic component),
locking condition of the vehicle is indicated by the containing a stored code, in each key.
indicator lights in the doors flashing at different Before the ignition is switched on, the ignition lock
frequencies. checks the code.
The immobilizer can be deactivated and the
engine started using an authorized ignition
key only.
Alarm System and Theft Protection 197

Maintenance and Car Care

Exercise Extreme Caution when
Working on your vehicle ..............................199
Engine Oil...................................................202
Checking Engine Oil Level............................202
Topping up Engine Oil .................................203
Washer Fluid ..............................................204
Wiper Blades ..............................................205
Emission Control System.............................205
How Emission Control Works .......................206
Fuel Economy.............................................207
Operating Your Porsche in other Countries ...207
Fuel ...........................................................208
Portable Fuel Container ...............................210
Fuel Recommendations ...............................210
Fuel Evaporation Control ............................211
Car Care Instructions ..................................211
198 Maintenance and Car Care

Exercise Extreme Caution when h WARNING

f Take care when working near hot parts of the
Fluid health hazards
vehicle, in particular engine parts and parts of
Working on your vehicle Refill fluids, e. g. engine oil, brake fluid or coolant the exhaust system.
The engine compartment of any motor vehicle is a are hazardous to health (poisonous, irritant, f Before working in the engine compartment,
potentially hazardous area. If you are not fully caustic). always switch the engine off and let it cool
familiar with proper repair procedures, do not f Keep these fluids out of children's reach and sufficiently.
attempt the adjustments described on the dispose of them in accordance with the f Allow the engine to cool down before opening
following pages. appropriate State, Local and Federal the cap of the coolant reservoir and protect
This caution applies to the entire vehicle. regulations. your hands, arms and face from any possible
h DANGER
f Only work on your vehicle outdoors or in a well escape of hot coolant.
Fire and explosion
ventilated area.
hazards
h WARNING Moving engine parts
Many vehicle fluids are highly flammable, e. g. h WARNING Exhaust gas inhalation
fuel, engine and transmission oil. Fuel vapors can Take great care to ensure that hands, fingers,
cause an explosion. When a battery is being Engine exhaust is dangerous if inhaled. articles of clothing (e. g. ties, sleeves, etc.),
charged, highly explosive gases can develop. Engine exhaust fumes have many components necklaces or long hair cannot be caught up by the
f Do not smoke or allow an open flame around which you can smell. They also contain carbon radiator fans, drive belt or other moving parts.
the battery or fuel. monoxide (CO), which is a colorless and odorless The radiator fans in the front of the vehicle may be
Pay attention to sparks, e. g. when coming into gas. operating or unexpectedly start operating when
contact with cables. Carbon monoxide can cause unconsciousness the engine is switched on.
Keep a fire extinguisher close at hand. and even death if inhaled. f Exercise extreme care that parts of the body,
f Ensure that there are no open flames in the f Only work on your vehicle outdoors or in a well articles of clothing or jewelry do not get caught
area of your vehicle at any time when fuel ventilated area. in the radiator fan, drive belt or other moving
fumes might be present. Be especially parts.
cautious of devices such as hot water heaters h WARNING Hot engine parts, f Carry out work in these areas only with the
which ignite a flame intermittently. exhaust system and engine off and exercise extreme caution.
f Only work on your vehicle outdoors or in a well fluids
ventilated area. The engine and surrounding components, exhaust h WARNING Electric shock from
system and coolant become very hot when the ignition system
engine is running. When the ignition is on, all cables and wires of the
The coolant reservoir is pressurized. Careless ignition system carry a high voltage.
opening of the coolant reservoir can lead to hot f Exercise special care when working on the
coolant suddenly spraying out. ignition system.
Maintenance and Car Care 199

h WARNING Failure to secure vehicle

Information Information
If the vehicle is not secured, or incorrectly f Incomplete or improper servicing may cause f Only use genuine Porsche spare parts for your
secured, during repair work, it could move problems in the operation of the car. If in doubt vehicle or spare parts of similar quality which
unexpectedly or fall from the car jack or car lift.
f Be alert and cautious around the engine at all
about any servicing, have it done by your have been manufactured according to the
authorized Porsche dealer. specifications and production requirements of
times while it is running. Improper maintenance during the warranty Porsche. These parts are available from your
If you have to work on the engine while it is period may affect your Porsche warranty authorized Porsche dealer. Safety-related
running, always apply the electric parking coverage. accessories should only be used if they are
brake and put the gearshift lever in neutral or f Some countries require additional tools and from the Porsche Tequipment range or are
the PDK selector lever in position P or N.
f Always support your car with safety stands if it
special spare parts to be carried in your tested and approved by Porsche. Your
vehicle. Please make enquiries before driving authorized Porsche dealer will be pleased to
is necessary to work under the car. The jack abroad. advise you and answer any questions you may
supplied with the car is not adequate for this have.
purpose.
Technical Modifications However, the use of other parts or
f Modifications may be carried out on your
Switch off level control of air suspension and accessories may adversely affect the safety
height adjustment. of your vehicle, and Porsche can take no
vehicle only if approved by Porsche.
Please see the chapter “RAISING THE VEHICLE responsibility for any loss or damage caused
This ensures that your Porsche will remain
WITH A LIFTING PLATFORM, TROLLEY JACK by their use.
reliable and safe to drive, and that it will not be
OR STANDARD JACK” on page 234.
f Jack up the vehicle only at the specified damaged as a result of the modifications. Even if the supplier of other accessories or
Your authorized Porsche dealer will be pleased parts is a recognized supplier, the safety of
jacking points on the underside of the vehicle.
f Never start the engine when the vehicle is to advise you. your vehicle may still be affected if such items
are installed.
jacked or lifted up. Vibration from the engine Due to the large variety of products offered in
could cause the vehicle to fall.
f When working under the car without safety
the accessory market, it is not possible for
Porsche to inspect and approve every one.
stands but with the wheels on the ground, f In addition, please note that the use of
make sure the car is on level ground, the replacement parts that are not genuine
wheels are blocked, and that the engine Porsche parts or approved parts, or the use of
cannot be started. accessories not approved by Porsche may
Withdraw ignition keys (switch ignition off in also detrimentally affect your vehicle warranty.
vehicles that have Porsche Entry & Drive). f Check your vehicle regularly for signs of
damage. Damaged or missing aerodynamic
components, such as spoilers or underbody
panels, impair vehicle handling and must
therefore be replaced immediately.

Radiator fan, engine compartment Measurements on test stands

blowers Performance test
h WARNING Radiator fans, engine Performance tests on roller-type test stands are
compartment blowers not approved by Porsche.
The engine-compartment blowers are mounted in Brake tests
the engine compartment. Brake tests must be performed only on roller-type
After the engine is switched off, the engine test stands.
compartment temperature is monitored for The following limit values must not be exceeded
approx. 30 minutes. on roller-type test stands:
During this period, and depending on – Test speed 4.7 mph (7.5 km/h)
temperature, the engine-compartment blowers – Test duration 20 seconds
may continue to run or start to run.
f Carry out work in this area only with the engine Testing the electric parking brake
off and exercise extreme caution. Electric parking brake tests on the brake test
The radiators and radiator fans are in the front of stand must only be performed with the ignition
the vehicle. switched on and with the manual gearshift lever in
The radiator fans in the front of the vehicle may be neutral or the Porsche Doppelkupplung selector
operating or unexpectedly start operating when lever in position N.
the engine is switched on. The vehicle switches automatically to brake test
f Carry out work in these areas only with the stand mode, in which the electric parking brake
engine switched off. can be tested.
f Take great care to ensure that parts of the The message “Electric parking brake in
body, items of clothing or jewellery cannot be service mode” appears on the multi-function
drawn in by the radiator fan, engine- display in the instrument panel.
compartment blower, drive belt or other Balancing wheels on the vehicle
moving parts.
During finish balancing of the wheels, the entire
vehicle must be lifted and the wheels must be free
to turn.

Engine Oil – The oil pressure warning light is not an oil level Checking Engine Oil Level
f Check the oil level on the multi-function display
indicator.
It is important to perform oil changes regularly in
The oil pressure warning light indicates serious
accordance with the intervals specified in your at regular intervals before refueling.
f Please see the chapter “DISPLAY AND
engine damage may be occuring when lit, if
Maintenance Schedule.
engine rpm is above idle speed.
Engine oil consumption on page 88.
It is normal for your engine to consume oil.
The rate of oil consumption depends on the quality h DANGER Swallowing engine oil
and viscosity of oil, the speed at which the engine Engine oil is hazardous to your health and may be
is operated, the climate, road conditions as well fatal if swallowed.
as the amount of dilution and oxidation of the f Keep engine oil out of children's reach.
lubricant.
If the vehicle is used for repeated short trips, and h WARNING Engine oil cancer risk
consumes a normal amount of oil, the engine oil
measurement may not show any drop in the oil Used engine oil contains chemicals that have
level at all, even after 600 miles (1000 km) or caused cancer in laboratory animals.
more. This is because the oil is gradually f Always protect your skin by washing
becoming diluted with fuel or moisture, making it thoroughly with soap and water.
appear that the oil level has not changed. If you suspect an oil leak in the engine have your
The diluting ingredients evaporate out when the authorized Porsche dealer check it out
vehicle is driven at high speeds, as on an immediately.
expressway, making it then appear that oil is
excessively consumed after driving at high Top-up quantity
speeds. The difference between the minimum and
If the conditions you drive your vehicle in are maximum marks on the segment display is
dusty, humid, or hot, the frequency of the oil approx. 1.8 quarts (1.7 liters).
change intervals should be greater. f Never add more engine oil than required to
If the vehicle is driven at a high rate of speed, reach the maximum mark.
climatic conditions are warm, and the load is high, Oil-level warning
the oil should be checked more frequently, as
driving conditions will determine the rate of oil
consumption.
If the oil level is too low, this is indicated by the
– The engine in your vehicle depends on oil to
oil-warning light on the multi-function display.
f Add engine oil immediately.
lubricate and cool all of its moving parts.
Therefore, the engine oil should be checked
regularly and kept at the required level.
– Make it a habit to have the engine oil level
on page 116.
checked with every refueling.

Measuring the oil level after topping up Topping up Engine Oil Always observe the following points:
engine oil or opening the rear luggage – Use engine oils approved by Porsche only. This
Porsche recommends .
compartment lid is a precondition for optimum and problem-free
The oil level can be checked after waiting for The right oil for your vehicle: driving.
approx. 1 minute with the vehicle parked on a level – Regular oil changes are part of servicing.
Complies with Viscosity class2)
surface and the engine at operating temperature. It is important that the service intervals,
approval1)
If the rear luggage compartment lid is opened particularly the oil change intervals, are
when the engine is cold (e.g. in order to top up Porsche A40 SAE 0W - 403) observed in accordance with the specifications
engine oil), the oil level cannot be displayed for SAE 5W - 404) in the “Maintenance” booklet.
a certain time. SAE 5W - 504) – Oils approved by Porsche can be mixed with
The message “No information about oil level 1) Generally, you can find details of the each other.
available at present” appears on the multi- manufacturer approvals on the oil containers or as – Porsche engines are designed so that no oil
function display. a notice displayed by the retailer. additives may be used.
f Engine oil should therefore only be topped up The current approval status is also available from – A label is located in the rear luggage
with the engine at operating temperature. your authorized Porsche dealer. compartment, which provides you with
This ensures short waiting times for the 2) SAE viscosity class – Example: SAE 0W - 40 information on suitable oil for your engine.
soonest possible oil level display. Specification 0W = Viscosity specification for Your authorized Porsche dealer will be pleased to
low temperatures (winter). advise you.
Information Specification 40 = Viscosity specification for h
Burning engine oil
WARNING
The “Check Engine” warning light may come on if high temperatures.
3) For all temperature ranges. Engine oil can ignite if it comes into contact with
the cap of the oil filler opening is opened while the
hot engine parts.
f Top up engine oil only with the engine stopped
4) For the temperature range above –13 °F
engine is running.
(–25 °C).
and ignition switched off.
f Please see the chapter “EXERCISE EXTREME
CAUTION WHEN WORKING ON YOUR VEHICLE”
on page 199.
NOTICE
Risk of damage through overflowing engine oil.
The luggage compartment or items of luggage
may become soiled in this event.
f Take care not to soil the luggage compartment
or items of luggage when checking and
topping up engine oil.

f Only use window cleaner concentrate that

meets the following requirements:
– Dilutability 1:100,
– Phosphate-free,
– Suitable for plastic headlight lenses.
We recommend window cleaner concentrates
approved by Porsche. Your authorized Porsche
dealer will be pleased to advise you.
The washer fluid reservoir for windshield and
headlights is located in the front luggage
compartment (illustration).
Warning message
A warning message appears on the multi-function
display if the washer fluid level is too low.
f Add washer fluid at the next opportunity.
The maximum filling capacity is approx.
1. Before opening the rear luggage compartment 1.32 US gallons (6 liters).
Washer Fluid
lid, read off the oil level on the multi-function Adding washer fluid
Observe the following points:
f Depending on the season, mix the water with
display.
f Please see the chapter “DISPLAY AND
1. Open cap on washer fluid reservoir
the appropriate additives (window cleaner (illustration).
concentrate, antifreeze) in the correct mixture 2. Add washer fluid.
on page 88.
ratio. 3. Close cap carefully.
2. Park the vehicle on a level surface.
3. Switch off engine (at operating temperature).
Summer filling with water + window cleaner
4. Open rear luggage compartment lid.
concentrate in the mixture ratio specified on
5. Unscrew cap on oil filler opening (illustration).
the container.
6. Top up engine oil according to the gauge on
the multi-function display.
Winter filling with water + antifreeze +
7. Carefully close cap on the oil filler opening.
window cleaner concentrate in the mixture
8. Close the rear lid.
ratio specified on the container.
Always follow all the instructions on the

containers of the additives used.

Wiper Blades windshield. These wax residues can be Emission Control System
removed only by using window cleaner
Maintenance notes concentrate. In the interest of clean air
– The wiper blades may be damaged or worn. Pollution of our environment has become a
f Have damaged wiper blades replaced
NOTICE
problem that is of increasing concern to all of us.
Risk of damage if wiper blades are not cleaned immediately. We urge you to join us in our efforts for cleaner air
properly. The graphite coating on the wiper blades f Please see the chapter “WASHER FLUID” in controlling the pollutants emitted from the
may be damaged.
f Do not clean the wiper blades using a cloth or
on page 204. automobile.
Porsche has developed an emission control
sponge, but rinse with clean water. Replacing wiper blades
f After switching off the ignition, press the wiper
system that controls or reduces those parts of
emissions that can be harmful to our environment.
NOTICE stalk down once. Your Porsche is equipped with such a system.
The wipers move upwards to an angle of
Risk of damage due to unintentional folding back Porsche warrants the Emission Control System in
approx. 45°.
f Please read the separate instructions provided
of wiper arm and frozen wiper blades. your new car under the terms and conditions set
f Always hold the wiper arm securely when forth in the Warranty Booklet.
by the wiper blade manufacturer.
f We recommend that you get your authorized
replacing the wiper blade. You, as the owner of the vehicle, have the
f Thaw the wiper blades before lifting them from responsibility to provide regular maintenance
Porsche dealer to replace the wiper blades.
the window. service for the vehicle and to keep a record of all
NOTICE maintenance work performed. To facilitate record
Wiper blades that are in perfect condition are vital
keeping, have services performed by authorized
for a clear view. Risk of damage. If the wiper blades are not
f Have the wiper blades replaced twice per year
Porsche dealers. They have Porsche trained
changed properly, they can come loose when the
technicians and special tools to provide fast and
(before and after the cold season) or if wiper car is moving.
f Check that the wiper blades are seated
efficient service.
performance deteriorates or the blades are
damaged. securely. To assure efficient operation of the Emission
f After switching off the ignition, press the wiper The wiper blades must engage properly in Control System:
stalk down once 4. the wiper arm. f Have your vehicle maintained properly and in
The wipers move upwards by approx. 45°. accordance with the recommendations
f Clean the windshield regularly with window described in your Maintenance Booklet. Lack
cleaner, especially after washing the vehicle in of proper maintenance, as well as improper
a car wash. use of the vehicle, will impair the function of
We recommend Porsche window cleaner. the emission control system and could lead to
If they are very dirty (e.g. soiled with insect damage.
remains), they can be cleaned with a sponge
or cloth.
If the wiper blades judder or squeak, this may be
due to the following:
– If the vehicle is washed in an automatic car
wash, wax residues may adhere to the

f Do not alter or remove any component of the Undercoating Oxygen sensor

emission control system.
f Do not alter or remove any device, such as h WARNING
The oxygen sensor, installed in the exhaust pipe
Aftermarket
continuously senses the oxygen content of the
heat shields, switches, ignition wires, valves, undercoating
exhaust and signals the information to an
etc., which are designed to protect your Additional undercoating or rust protection agents electronic control unit. The control unit corrects
vehicle's emission control system. In addition on or near the exhaust system can become too the air/fuel ratio, so the engine always receives an
to serious engine damage, this can result in a hot when driving and ignite, causing a fire.
f Do not apply additional undercoating or rust
accurately metered air/fuel mixture.
fire if excess raw fuel reaches the exhaust
system. protection agent on or near the exhaust Crankcase ventilation
f Do not continue to operate your vehicle if you manifolds, exhaust pipes, catalytic converters Through crankcase ventilation, undesirable
detect engine misfire or other unusual or heat shields. During driving the substance emissions from the engine crankcase are not
operating conditions. used for undercoating could overheat and permitted to reach the outside atmosphere. These
ignite. emissions are recirculated from the crankcase to
Parking the air intake system. From here the emissions
h WARNING Fire risk when parking How Emission Control Works mix with the intake air and are later burned in the
engine.
The exhaust system becomes very hot when the When an automobile engine is running, it uses
engine is running and remains hot for some time energy generated through the combustion of a Catalytic converters
after the vehicle is turned off. Flammable material mixture of air and fuel. Depending on whether a The catalytic converters are efficient “clean-up”
close to the exhaust system could ignite. car is driven fast or slowly or whether the engine devices built into the exhaust system of the
f Do not park or operate your vehicle in areas is cold or hot, some of the fuel (hydrocarbons) vehicle. The catalytic converters burn the
where the hot exhaust system may come in may not be burned completely, but may be undesirable pollutants in the exhaust gas before it
contact with dry grass, brush, fuel spill or discharged into the engine crankcase or exhaust is released into the atmosphere.
other flammable materials. system. Additional hydrocarbons may enter the
f If your car catches on fire for any reason, call atmosphere through evaporation of fuel from the
the fire department. Do not endanger your life fuel tank. These hydrocarbons (HC), when
by attempting to put out the fire. released into the air, contribute to undesirable
pollution.
In addition, carbon monoxide (CO) and oxides of
nitrogen (NOx) contribute to engine emissions.
They, too, are formed during the combustion
process and discharged into the exhaust system.
To reduce these pollutants, your Porsche is
equipped with a precisely calibrated fuel injection
system to assure a finely balanced air/fuel mixture
under all operating conditions.

The exclusive use of unleaded fuel is f Always monitor your fuel consumption. Operating Your Porsche in other
critically important for the life of the f Drive smoothly, avoid abrupt changes in speed
catalytic converters. Therefore, only as much as possible.
Countries
unleaded fuel must be used. f Avoid jack rabbit starts and sudden stops. Government regulations in the United States and
The catalytic converters will be damaged by: f Do not drive longer than necessary in the lower Canada require that automobiles meet specific
gears. Shifting into a higher gear early without emission regulations and safety standards.
– Push or tow starting the vehicle, lugging the engine will help save fuel. Therefore, cars built for the U.S. and Canada differ
– Misfiring of the engine, f Prolonged “warm up” idling wastes gas. Start from vehicles sold in other countries.
– Turning off the ignition while the vehicle is the vehicle just before you are ready to drive. If you plan to take your Porsche outside the
moving, Accelerate slowly and smoothly. continental limits of the United States or Canada,
– Driving until the fuel tank is completely empty, f Switch off the engine if stationary for longer there is the possibility that:
– By other unusual operating conditions. – Unleaded fuel may not be available,
f Do not continue to operate your vehicle under
periods.
f Any additional weight carried in the vehicle – Unleaded fuel may have a considerably lower
these conditions, since raw fuel might reach reduces fuel economy. Always keep cargo to octane rating. Excessive engine knock and
the catalytic converters. This could result in a minimum and remove all unnecessary items. serious damage to both engine and catalytic
overheating of the converters. Federal law f Organize your trips to take in several errands converters could result,
prohibits use of leaded fuel in this car. in one trip. – Service may be inadequate due to lack of
f All electrical accessories contribute to proper service facilities, tools or diagnostic
Fuel Economy increased fuel consumption. equipment,
Fuel economy will vary depending on where, f Only switch on the air conditioning when – Replacement parts may not be available or
when and how you drive, optional equipment necessary. very difficult to get.
installed, and the general condition of your Porsche cannot be responsible for the
The EPA estimated miles per gallon (mpg) is
car. mechanical damage that could result
to be used for comparison purposes, actual
A car tuned to specifications and correctly because of inadequate fuel, service or parts
mileage may be different from the estimated
maintained, will help you to achieve optimal availability.
mpg, depending on your driving speed,
fuel economy.
f Have your vehicle tuned to specifications. Air
weather conditions and trip length. Your If you purchased your Porsche abroad and want to
actual highway mileage may be less than the bring it back home, be sure to find out about
cleaner should be dirt free to allow proper
estimated mpg. shipping and forwarding requirements, as well as
f Please observe all local and national speed
engine “breathing”. current import and customs regulations.
Battery should be fully charged.
limits.
Wheels should be properly aligned.
Tires should be inflated to the correct
pressure.

Fuel
Information
When the ignition is on, the fuel level is displayed
on the instrument panel. It is important that the service intervals,
f Please see the chapter “J – FUEL GAUGE” particularly the oil change intervals, are observed
on page 81. in accordance with the specifications in the
“Maintenance” booklet.
h DANGER Refueling fire risk
f Fire, open flame and smoking are prohibited
Refueling
when handling fuel. h DANGER Refueling fires /
cellphones
h WARNING Fuel vapors and skin The RF energy from a cellphone can cause a
contact sparking on bare metal, much like aluminum foil in
Fuel and fuel vapors are hazardous to health. a microwave oven. The spark could ignite gasoline
f Avoid contact with skin or clothing, since injury fumes present while refueling.
to your skin may occur. f Do not use a cellphone while pumping gas.
f Do not inhale fuel vapors, since they may make
you ill and possibly cause death if inhalation is h DANGER Refueling fires / static 1. Stop the engine and switch off the ignition.
prolonged and occurs in a closed space. electricity 2. Open the filler flap by pressing on the rear part
Static discharge from your body can ignite of the filler flap (arrow).
NOTICE gasoline fumes present when you get back out of The vehicle must be unlocked.
To prevent damage to the emission control the vehicle and touch the fuel nozzle.
system and engine: f Do not re-enter the vehicle while pumping gas.
f Never drive the tank dry.
f Avoid high cornering speeds after the warning
lights have come on.
f Please see the chapter “FUEL ECONOMY”
on page 207.
Check engine warning light
If the warning lights in the instrument panel come
on and remain on while driving, it suggests:
– a potential engine control problem and the
need for system service or
– an improperly fastened tank cap or
– refueling with engine running.

5. Operate the pump nozzle and refuel the

vehicle.
Do not add further fuel once the correctly
operated automatic pump nozzle has switched
off. Fuel could spray back or could flow over
when heated.
6. Replace the tank cap immediately after
refueling and close it until you hear and feel it
locking.
7. Close the filler flap and press on the rear of the
filler flap until it engages securely.
Information
If you lose the tank filler cap, you must replace it
only with an original part.
NOTICE
3. Slowly open and remove the tank cap. Emergency unlocking of the filler flap
Put the tank cap into the holder (arrow). Risk of damage to decorative foils.
If the electrical release mechanism is faulty, the
4. Insert the pump nozzle fully into the filler neck. Decorative foils may fade if they come into filler flap can be opened as follows:
The handle of the pump nozzle must point contact with fuel. f Open the passenger’s door.
downwards. f Wipe off any spilled fuel immediately. f Pull the button in the right-hand door aperture
(arrow).
Total capacity Boxster, Boxster S: The filler flap pops open.
approx. 16.91 US gallons (64 liters),
including approx. 2.64 US gallons (10 liters)

Portable Fuel Container f Avoid driving at full throttle. in accordance with the specifications in the
It is important to observe the regular service “Maintenance” booklet.
h DANGER Transporting filled fuel intervals, and particularly the oil change intervals,
containers specified in the “Maintenance” booklet. NOTICE
If the portable fuel container is damaged in an The use of UNLEADED FUEL WITHOUT Risk of destruction of the engine, fuel system or
accident and fuel escapes, it could ignite or METALLIC ADDITIVES ONLY is critically exhaust system if non-approved additives are
explode. important to the life of the catalytic
f Do not carry a portable fuel container on
used.
converters. Deposits from leaded fuels or f Use only additives approved by Porsche.
journeys. metallic additives will ruin the converters and
f Observe the relevant laws which prohibit fuel
The use of other additives can result in
make them ineffective as an emission destruction of the engine, fuel system or
transport. control device. Metallic additives can cause exhaust system of your vehicle.
serious engine damage.
h WARNING Portable fuel container Cars with catalytic converters have a smaller fuel Octane ratings
vapor hazard tank opening, and gas station pumps that
Octane rating indicates a fuel’s ability to resist
Vapors from the fuel are hazardous to health. dispense unleaded fuel have smaller nozzles. This
detonation. Therefore, buying the correct octane
f Do not carry a portable fuel container in the will prevent accidental pumping of leaded fuel into
gas is important to prevent engine “damage”.
occupant compartment. cars with catalytic converters.
The RON octane rating is based on the research
Unleaded fuels may not be available outside the
method. The CLC (U.S. Cost of Living Council
continental U.S. and Canada. Therefore, we
Fuel Recommendations recommend you do not take your car to areas or
octane rating) or AKI (antiknock index) octane
Your Porsche is equipped with catalytic rating usually displayed on U.S. fuel pumps is
countries where unleaded fuel may not be
converters and must use UNLEADED FUEL calculated as research octane number plus motor
available.
WITHOUT METALLIC ADDITIVES ONLY. octane number, divided by 2, that is written as:
Your engine is designed to provide optimum
performance and fuel economy using unleaded Information RON+MON R+M
or
premium fuel with an octane rating of 98 RON/ In some countries the available fuel quality may 2 2
88 MON (93 CLC or AKI). Porsche therefore not meet the requirements of your Porsche vehicle
recommends the use of these fuels in your and can result in coking inside or around the The CLC or AKI octane rating is usually lower than
vehicle. injectorbores or other serious damage to the the RON rating:
Porsche also recognizes that these fuels may not engine, fuel system or exhaust system. For example: 95 RON equals 90 CLC or AKI.
always be available. Be assured that your vehicle In this case, the fuel may be mixed only with the Fuels containing ethanol
will operate properly on unleaded premium fuels additive sold and recommended by Porsche after
Do not use any fuels containing more than
with octane numbers of at least 95 RON/ consulting your authorized Porsche dealer.
15 percent ethanol by volume.
85 MON (90 CLC or AKI), since the engine’s Porsche part number 000 043 206 89.
f Observe the instructions and mixture ratios
We recommend, however, to change to a different
“Electronic Octane™ knock control” will adapt the
fuel or station if any of the following problems
ignition timing, if necessary. stated on the container.
occur with your vehicle:
If fuels of less than 95 RON/85 MON (90 CLC It is important that the service intervals, – Deterioration of driveability and performance.
or AKI) are used however, this could reduce particularly the oil change intervals, are observed – Substantially reduced fuel economy.
performance and increase fuel consumption.

– Vapor lock and non-start problems, especially Car Care Instructions h WARNING Chemical cleaners
f Please see the chapter “MEASUREMENTS ON
at high altitude or at high temperature.
– Engine malfunction or stalling. Cleaning agents may be hazardous to your health.
TEST STANDS” on page 201. Most chemical cleaners are concentrates which
Fuel Evaporation Control Regular Maintenance and correct care helps require dilution. High concentrations might cause
to maintain the value of your car and is also problems ranging from irritation to serious injury.
f Keep cleaning agents out of reach from
Fuel tank venting a requirement for maintaining the
The evaporation chamber and the carbon canister manufacturers vehicle warranties. children.
prevent fuel vapors from escaping to the Your authorized Porsche dealer has specially f Observe all caution labels.
atmosphere at extreme high outside developed car-care products from the f Always read directions on the container before
temperatures, when driving abruptly around Porsche program available either singly or using any product. These directions may
curves and when the car is parked at an incline or as complete car-care sets. They will be contain information necessary to avoid
in any other nonlevel position. pleased to help you select suitable products. personal injury.
Vapor control system and storage Whether you use Porsche products or other f Do not use fuel, kerosene, naphtha, nail polish
commercially available cleaning agents first remover or other volatile cleaning fluids. They
When the fuel tank is filled, vapors are collected in
make sure of their correct application. may be toxic, flammable or hazardous in other
the evaporation chamber by a vent line leading the
vapors to the carbon canister where they are A Porsche that is well-cared for can look like new ways. Only use spot removing fluids in a well
for years. It all depends on the amount of care the vented area.
f Do not clean the underside of chassis,
stored as long as the engine does not run.
owner is willing to give the car.
Purge system fenders, wheel covers, etc., without protecting
When the engine is running, the fuel vapors from your hands and arms as you may cut yourself
the canister will be mixed with fresh air from the on sharp-edged metal parts.
ambient air of the canister. This mixture will be
directed to the intake air housing by the tank vent NOTICE
line, mixed with the intake air and burned during
Risk of damage to the vehicle or property from
normal combustion.
cleaning agents.
f Observe all caution labels.
Information
Moisture and road salt on brakes may affect
braking efficiency.
f Test the brakes after each vehicle washing.

High-pressure cleaning equipment, steam Decorative film Observe the following points in order to ensure
cleaners that the vehicle is washed thoroughly without
NOTICE damaging the paintwork:
NOTICE
Risk of damage due to separation of the f The underside of the vehicle should also be
Risk of damage as a result of using high-pressure decorative film when using high-pressure cleaning thoroughly washed at the end of the gritting
cleaning equipment, steam cleaners or similar. equipment, steam cleaners or similar cleaning season at the latest.
High-pressure cleaning equipment, steam equipment. f Wash your vehicle only at sites provided for
cleaners or similar can damage the following f Do not use high-pressure cleaning equipment, this purpose to prevent soot, grease, oil and
components: steam cleaners, etc. to clean decorative films. heavy metals from entering the environment.
– Convertible top f New cars should be washed carefully with
– Tires Care of door lock plenty of clear water to protect the new paint
– Logos, emblems f To prevent the door lock from freezing during work. Dark paint finishes show up the smallest
– Painted surfaces the cold season, cover the lock barrel with of surface damage (e.g., scratches) more
– Alternator suitable adhesive tape while washing the readily than lighter colors.
– Electrical components and plug connections in vehicle. Dark colors are slightly more susceptible to
the engine compartment scratching and require particularly careful
If the lock still freezes, use an ordinary de-icer.
– ParkAssist sensors paint care.
In many cases, a well warmed key can help.
– Radar sensor for adaptive cruise control f Never use excessive force. Dark paints make even the smallest surface
– Reversing camera blemishes (scratches) more conspicuous than
f Always read the operating instructions Car washing lighter colors.
provided by the equipment manufacturer. The best protection for the vehicle from the f Do not wash your Porsche in direct sunlight or
f Always cover the lid of the brake fluid reservoir damaging effects of the environment is frequent when its body is hot.
prior to cleaning. Never point the cleaning jet washing and preservation. f When washing by hand, use a car shampoo,
directly at the lid. The longer road salt, road dust, industrial dust, plenty of water, and a soft sponge or
f When cleaning with a flat-jet nozzle or insect remains, bird excrement, and tree washing brush.
a so-called “dirt blaster”, maintain a minimum We recommend Porsche car shampoo.
f Start washing the vehicle by thoroughly
exudations (e.g. resin, pollen), etc. are allowed
distance of 20 in. (50 cm). to remain on the bodywork, the more harmful
f Never use high-pressure cleaning equipment their effect. wetting the paintwork and rinsing the heavy
or steam cleaners with a round-jet nozzle. dirt off.
A high-pressure cleaning device or steam f After washing the vehicle, rinse it thoroughly
cleaner fitted with a round nozzle will damage with water and rub it dry with chamois-leather.
your vehicle. The tires are particularly Do not use the same chamois for rubbing dry
susceptible to damage. as you use for cleaning the windshield and
f Do not point the cleaning jet directly at any of windows.
the aforementioned components.

h WARNING
Cleaning
Wet brakes
Information
Reduced or uneven braking action may be caused NOTICE
Automatic car washes spray water at odd angles
by wet brakes.
f After washing the vehicle, test the brakes and
and high pressures, which are not seen in normal Risk of damage due to the cleaning jet of the high-
driving. Therefore, water can sometimes find its pressure cleaning equipment or hot wax
steering and briefly brake the disks dry. way into the passengers compartment during or treatment.
When doing so, make sure that vehicles shortly after the car wash. f Do not clean the convertible top with high-
traveling behind you are not affected. pressure cleaning equipment.
Convertible top f Do not use the hot wax treatment.
f Never remove snow and ice using a sharp
Cleaning in car washes
Optional add-on parts or parts that project beyond Do not wash the convertible top each time the car
edged object.
the contours of the vehicle may be damaged by is washed.
Incorrect care and treatment can damage the It is usually sufficient to spray or wash it with clean
design features of car washes.
convertible top and cause leaks. Any repair work water.
The following parts are particularly at risk:
– Convertible top should not be washed in a car
can be done by your authorized Porsche dealer. f Brush dust off the convertible top in the
wash (hot wax treatment cannot be used, as direction of the weave using a soft brush.
the wax attacks the convertible top material) Information f Only if there is heavy dirt, wet the convertible
– Windshield wipers and rear wiper (always No folding top is 100% leak proof. top with lukewarm water and the Porsche
switch them off – wiper stalk in position 0 – Due to the constant changing of loads and strains Wash-Shampoo & convertible-top cleaner,
to prevent them wiping unintentionally in to which a car is subject to when driving on roads, using a sponge or soft brush, and rub gently.
sensor operation). minor wind noise and seepage at joints between Rinse Wash-Shampoo & convertible-top
– Exterior mirrors (always fold in). the top, body and doors on convertible tops cleaner thoroughly off the convertible top with
– External antenna (always unscrew). clean water.
f After washing it, treat the convertible-top cover
cannot be completely sealed in certain areas.
– Spoiler. Therefore small leaks are considered normal for
– Wheels (the wider the rim and the lower the tire these models. In addition, your convertible top at least once a year with the special Porsche
height, the greater the risk of damage). should not be washed in a car wash. The top convertible-top care product.
– High-gloss wheels (to prevent these from may experience damage by the brushes or may Do not allow the convertible-top care product
getting scratched, do not clean with the wheel- experience leaks due to the high pressure water to come into contact with paint or windows. If
cleaning brushes of the car wash). it does, remove immediately.
f If there is leakage in the convertible-top cover
streams directed in areas which would not
f Please consult the operator before using encounter water in normal driving conditions.
automatic car washes. or at its seams or folds, the special Porsche
f All parts not reached by a car wash, such as convertible-top care product can be used.
door and lid seams or door sills, must be f Please note the information on the container.
washed and polished by hand. f Remove bird droppings immediately since the
acid in them will make the rubber swell and the
convertible top will become leaky.
f Open convertible top only when it is completely
dry, otherwise damp stains and scrub marks
may occur which cannot be removed.

f Try to remove spots from the convertible-top Polishing Cleaning windows

cover by rubbing carefully with a soft rubber Only when the original shine can no longer be f Clean all windows regularly, inside and out,
sponge. obtained using preservatives should paint polish with window cleaner.
Paint care be used to clean the paint. We recommend Porsche window cleaner.
In order to protect the paint on your vehicle in the
We recommend Porsche paint polish. f Do not use the same chamois for painted
Removing spots and stains surfaces and for drying the windows.
best possible way against mechanical and
f Remove tar spatters, traces of oil, insects etc.
Preservative residues could reduce
chemical damage, you should
transparency.
f Remove insect residues with insect remover.
– preserve it regularly, as soon as possible using an insect remover,
– polish it if necessary, as they discolor the paint if left to work on it
– remove spots and stains, and over time.
– repair damaged paintwork. f Wash the treated areas carefully afterwards. Information
f Do not apply care products containing silicone The door windows have a water-repellent
Repairing minor paint damage
f Have minor paint damage (cracks, scratches
to the windows. (hydrophobic) coating, which prevents soiling of
the windows.
or stone damage) repaired immediately
Information This coating is subject to natural wear and can be
before corrosion begins.
f Never rub a dusty vehicle with a dry cloth, renewed.
f Please contact an authorized Porsche dealer.
because the grains of dirt will damage the If traces of corrosion have already formed, these
paintwork. must be thoroughly removed. An anti-corrosion
f Do not treat matt-painted components with primer must then be applied to these spots,
Care of windshield wiper blades
preservatives or polishes as these remove the followed by top-coat paint. Windshield wiper blades that are in perfect
matt effect. condition are vital for a clear view.
f Please see the chapter “WIPER BLADES”
Paint data can be found on the vehicle data
carrier.
f Please see the chapter “VEHICLE
Preservation on page 205.
The paint surface becomes dull over time due to IDENTIFICATION NUMBER” on page 261.
weathering.
f Preserve paint regularly.
f Apply paint preservative after washing the
vehicle and polish it smooth to preserve the
paintwork.
This keeps the paint shiny and elastic. Dirt is
prevented from adhering to the paint surface and
industrial dust is prevented from penetrating the
paint.

Repairing the underbody protection h WARNING Exhaust system fire risk Cleaning headlights, lights, interior and
The underside of your car is durably protected exterior plastic components, adhesive
The exhaust system becomes very hot when the foils, radar sensor for adaptive cruise
against chemical and mechanical influences.
engine is running. Flammable material close to the control and Reversing camera
As it is not possible to exclude the risk of damage
exhaust system could ignite. Additional
to this protective coating in day to day driving, it Observe the following points:
f Use only clean water and a little dishwashing
undercoating or rust protection agents on or near
is advisable to have the underside of the car
the exhaust system can become too hot when
inspected at certain intervals - preferably before liquid or interior window cleaner to clean
driving and ignite.
f Do not apply additional undercoating or rust-
the start of winter and again in spring - and the headlights, lights, plastic components and
undercoating restored as necessary. surfaces.
proofing on or near the exhaust manifold,
Your authorized Porsche dealer is familiar with the Use a soft sponge or a soft, lint-free cloth.
f Do not spray water or interior window cleaner
exhaust pipes, catalytic converters or heat
bodyseal treatment procedures and has the shields. During driving the substance used for
necessary equipment for applying factory directly onto the plastic components in the
undercoating could overheat and ignite.
approved materials. We recommend that you passenger compartment, but first onto a
entrust them with such work and inspections. f Before applying fresh underseal, carefully sponge or cloth. Cleaning agents may, for
Unlike conventional spray oils, undercoating and remove deposits or dirt and grease. Once it example, enter controls or switches and cause
rust-proofing compounds based on bitumen or has dried, the new undercoating compound damage.
wax do not attack the sound-proofing materials forms a tough protective coating which
applied at the factory. provides efficient rust-proofing of the floor Information
panels and components.
f Always apply a fresh coating of suitable An interior window cleaner can also be used to
clean plastic surfaces (always read the cleaning
preservative to unprotect areas after cleaning
instructions on the container).
the underside of the body, the transmission,
We recommend Porsche interior window cleaner.
f Gently wipe the surface without applying too
the engine or carrying out repairs to under-
body, engine or transmission components.
much pressure.
f Do not clean when dry.
Effective rust-proofing is particularly important
f Never use other chemical cleaners or
during the cold weather season. If your car is
driven frequently in areas where salt has been
solvents.
f Rinse cleaned surfaces with clear water.
spread on the roads, the whole engine
compartment should be cleaned thoroughly after
the winter to prevent salt from causing any lasting
damage. A full underbody wash should also be
Alloy wheels
performed at the same time. Metal particles (e.g. brass or copper in brake
dust) must not remain too long on alloy wheels.
Contact corrosion can cause pitting.

Stainless steel tailpipes Leather care

Information Stainless steel tailpipes can discolor due to The natural surface markings of leather,
Cleaners with an oxide-removing effect or wrong soiling, strong heat and combustion residues. e.g. creases, healed scars, insect sting marks,
pH value, as are commonly used for other metals, The original shine can be achieved again using structural differences and slight variations in
as well as mechanical tools and products, will commercially available metal lustre paste or shade and grain add to the attractiveness of the
damage the oxide layer and are therefore metal polish. high-quality natural leather product.
unsuitable. Observe the following care instructions:
f Use only cleaners for alloy wheels Cleaning door, roof, lid and window seals
(pH value 9.5). Products with the wrong NOTICE
NOTICE
pH value can destroy the protective layer The leather will be damaged by the use of
on the wheels. The lubricant coating on the inner door seals may
unsuitable cleaning and care agents and by
We recommend Porsche cleaner for alloy rims. be damaged by unsuitable cleaning and care
inappropriate treatment.
f If possible, wash the wheels every two weeks agents.
f Do not use caustic cleaners or hard cleaning
with a sponge or washing brush. If the wheels f Do not use any chemical cleaning agents or
objects!
f Make sure that perforated leather does not get
solvents.
f Do not use any preservative agents.
are exposed to road salt, grit or industrial dust,
weekly cleaning is necessary. wet on its reverse side.
f Every three months, after cleaning, grease the f Wash dirt (e.g. abrasion, dust, road salts) from f Remove water drops from the leather without
wheels with car wax or an acid-free grease all seals regularly using warm soapy water. delay.
f If there is a risk of frost, protect the outer door
f Clean all types of leather regularly to remove
(e.g. Vaseline).
Rub the grease in well with a soft cloth. seals and the lid and flap seals against freezing
f Please see the chapter “CLEANING IN CAR into place with a suitable care product.
fine dust using a soft, damp, white woollen
WASHES” on page 213. cloth or a commercially available microfibre
cloth.
h WARNING Cleaning agents on
f Remove heavy contamination (not water or
moisture stains) with a leather cleaner.
brake disks
Always read the instructions for use given on
If cleaning agents (e.g. wheel cleaning agents) the containers.
come into contact with the brake disks, the We recommend Porsche leather care liquid.
resulting film on the brake disks can impair f Treat cleaned leather only with a leather care
braking performance.
f Make sure that no cleaning agent comes into
product.
We recommend Porsche leather care liquid.
contact with the brake disks.
f If cleaning agent has come into contact with
the brake disks, clean the brake disks
thoroughly with a strong jet of water.
f Paying attention to any road users behind you,
dry the brake disks by applying the brakes.

Seats with seat ventilation h WARNING Cleaning fabric linings

Obstructed pedals
Care instructions for water or moisture f Fabric linings on pillars, roofliner and sun
Improperly secured floor mats can obstruct pedal
stains. blinds, etc. must be cleaned only using
travel.
f Always check the movement of the pedals
Rain water or moisture can stain the perforated suitable cleaning agents or a suitable dry foam
leather. and a soft brush.
before driving and make sure that they are not
Removing water and moisture stains obstructed by a floor mat or any other object. Alcantara® care
Preconditions: f Secure the floor mat to prevent it from sliding Do not use leather care products to clean
– Seat heating and seat ventilation must be into positions that could interfere with the safe Alcantara®. Alcantara® is a manufactured
switched off. operation of your vehicle – do not lay them product. It is not genuine leather or suede.
– No direct sunlight. loosely in the vehicle. For regular care, it is sufficient to clean the cover
– Do not use leather cleaners or care products Your authorized Porsche dealer will be glad to with a soft brush.
to remove water and moisture stains. offer you floor mats of correct size including a Strong abrasion or rubbing when cleaning will
f Blot the entire seat or backrest surface using securing possibility. produce a lasting change to the surface.
a clean, absorbent sponge and distilled water.
Cleaning airbag covers Cleaning when lightly soiled
f Wet a soft cloth with water or a neutral soap
Make sure that the perforated leather does not
get wet on its reverse side. h DANGER
f Allow the seat covering to dry completely at
Vehicle interior solution and wipe off the dirt.
modifications
room temperature out of direct sunlight. Cleaning when heavily soiled
f Wet a soft cloth with lukewarm water or
Incorrect modifications may damage the airbag
Do not dry the seat covering by switching on
system. The airbag may not deploy properly in the
the seat heating and seat ventilation. thinned white spirit and dab the dirt from the
f Once dry, wipe the seat covering with a dry,
event of an accident.
f Do not make any modifications whatsoever to outside in.
lint-free cloth.
individual components, such as the padded Cleaning the safety belts
Cleaning carpet, floor mats covers on the steering wheel, the instrument
f Use mild detergent to clean soiled belts.
f Use a vacuum cleaner or a brush (not too soft) panel, the underside of the instrument panel,
f When drying, avoid direct sunlight.
for cleaning. front seats and door panels.
f
f Have your authorized Porsche dealer to clean
Only use suitable cleaning agents.
f Heavy dirt and stains can be removed with f Do not tint or bleach the belts.
a stain remover. these components.
The belt fabric could be weakened, thus
We recommend Porsche stain remover. affecting safety.
To protect carpets, the Porsche range of
accessories includes mats of the correct size and
with the appropriate fastening.

Storing your Porsche Climate control Vehicle interior

If you intend to store your Porsche for a prolonged The air conditioning system should be in good The interior must be dry, especially in the area of
period, please consult your authorized Porsche working condition and fully charged. the floor carpets. The use of drying agents (Silica-
dealer. The staff will be glad to advise you on the Gel) is recommended in vehicles with leather
Windshield/Headlight washer
f Check and correct antifreeze/cleaning solution
most suitable and necessary methods. interior and in areas with high humidity. The
f Clean your vehicle thoroughly inside and recommended amount is 3 fabric bags of 1.1 lbs.
level as necessary. (500 grams) each placed on the floor carpets.
outside.
The under carriage and chassis components Electrical system Windows, doors and lids must be closed. The air
should be free of dirt and salt deposits. f Remove the battery from the vehicle and store vents should be opened.
f Fill up the fuel tank. it in a cool dry place, not on a cement floor.
f Change the oil and oil filter, and run the engine When the battery is disconnected, the
for several minutes. alarm system is deactivated.
f Increase the tire pressure to 50 psi/3.5 bar/ f Recharge the battery every 3 months. If the
350 kPa. battery remains in the vehicle with the cables
It is not recommended to lift the vehicle, due to connected, it is necessary to check, remove
the possibility of corrosion on shock absorber and recharge the battery every 2-3 weeks.
piston shafts. Do not fast charge the battery.
The vehicle should be moved slightly, f Please see the chapter “BATTERY (12 VOLT)”
approximately every four weeks, to prevent flat on page 245.
spot on the tires.

Minor Repairs
Exercise Extreme Caution when
Working on your vehicle...............................220
Checking the Coolant Level and
Adding Coolant ...........................................222
Brake Fluid .................................................223
Electromechanical Power Steering ...............224
Changing Air Cleaner...................................224
Changing Particle Filters ..............................224
Tires and Wheels ........................................224
Changing Wheels ........................................234
Wheel Attachment Faces .............................237
Wheel Bolts ...............................................237
Flat Tire......................................................238
Spacers .....................................................239
Electrical System ........................................241
Battery (12 volt) ..........................................245
External Power Supply,
Emergency starting with jumper cables.........247
Changing Car Key (Remote Control) Battery ..249
Replacing bulbs ..........................................249
Headlights ..................................................250
Headlight Adjustment...................................254
Towing .......................................................255
Fire extinguisher .........................................259
Minor Repairs 219

Exercise Extreme Caution when h WARNING

f Take care when working near hot parts of the
Fluid health hazards
vehicle, in particular engine parts and parts of
Working on your vehicle Refill fluids, e. g. engine oil, brake fluid or coolant the exhaust system.
The engine compartment of any motor vehicle is a are hazardous to health (poisonous, irritant, f Before working in the engine compartment,
potentially hazardous area. If you are not fully caustic). always switch the engine off and let it cool
familiar with proper repair procedures, do not f Keep these fluids out of children's reach and sufficiently.
attempt the adjustments described on the dispose of them in accordance with the f Allow the engine to cool down before opening
following pages. appropriate regulations. the cap of the coolant reservoir and protect
This caution applies to the entire vehicle. f Only work on your vehicle outdoors or in a well your hands, arms and face from any possible
ventilated area.
h DANGER Fire and explosion escape of hot coolant.
hazards
h WARNING Exhaust gas inhalation h WARNING Moving engine parts
Many vehicle fluids are highly flammable, e. g.
fuel, engine and transmission oil. Fuel vapors can Engine exhaust is dangerous if inhaled. Take great care to ensure that hands, fingers,
cause an explosion. When a battery is being Engine exhaust fumes have many components articles of clothing (e. g. ties, sleeves, etc.),
charged, highly explosive gases can develop. which you can smell. They also contain carbon necklaces or long hair cannot be caught up by the
f Do not smoke or allow an open flame around monoxide (CO), which is a colorless and odorless radiator fans, drive belt or other moving parts.
the battery or fuel. gas. The radiator fans in the front of the vehicle may be
Pay attention to sparks, e. g. when coming into Carbon monoxide can cause unconsciousness operating or unexpectedly start operating when
contact with cables. and even death if inhaled.
f Only work on your vehicle outdoors or in a well
the engine is switched on.
Keep a fire extinguisher close at hand. f Exercise extreme care that parts of the body,
f Ensure that there are no open flames in the ventilated area. articles of clothing or jewelry do not get caught
area of your vehicle at any time when fuel in the radiator fan, drive belt or other moving
fumes might be present. Be especially h WARNING Hot engine parts, parts.
cautious of devices such as hot water heaters exhaust system and f Carry out work in these areas only with the
which ignite a flame intermittently. fluids engine off and exercise extreme caution.
f Only work on your vehicle outdoors or in a well The engine and surroundings components, the
ventilated area. exhaust system and coolant become very hot h WARNING Electric shock from
when the engine is running. ignition system
The coolant reservoir is pressurized. Careless When the ignition is on, all cables and wires of the
opening of the coolant reservoir can lead to hot ignition system carry a high voltage.
coolant suddenly spraying out. f Exercise special care when working on the
ignition system.
220 Minor Repairs

h WARNING Failure to secure vehicle Measurements on test stands

Information Performance test
If the vehicle is not secured, or incorrectly f Incomplete or improper servicing may cause Performance tests on roller-type test stands are
secured, during repair work, it could move problems in the operation of the car. If in doubt
unexpectedly or fall from the car jack or car lift. not approved by Porsche.
f Be alert and cautious around the engine at all
about any servicing, have it done by your
authorized Porsche dealer. Brake tests
times while it is running. Improper maintenance during the warranty Brake tests must be performed only on roller-type
If you have to work on the engine while it is period may affect your Porsche warranty test stands.
running, always apply the electric parking coverage. The following limit values must not be exceeded
brake and put the gearshift lever in neutral or f Some countries require additional tools and on roller-type test stands:
the PDK selector lever in position P or N.
f Always support your car with safety stands if it
special spare parts to be carried in your – Test speed 4.7 mph (7.5 km/h)
vehicle. Please make enquiries before driving – Test duration 20 seconds
is necessary to work under the car. The jack abroad.
supplied with the car is not adequate for this Testing the electric parking brake
purpose. Electric parking brake tests on the brake test
h WARNING
T
Radiator fans, engine

Switch off level control of air suspension and stand must only be performed with the ignition
compartment blowers
height adjustment. switched on and with the manual gearshift lever in
Please see the chapter “RAISING THE VEHICLE The engine-compartment blowers are mounted in neutral or the Porsche Doppelkupplung selector
WITH A LIFTING PLATFORM, TROLLEY JACK the engine compartment. lever in position N.
OR STANDARD JACK” on page 234. After the engine is switched off, the engine The vehicle switches automatically to brake test
f Jack up the vehicle only at the specified compartment temperature is monitored for stand mode, in which the electric parking brake
jacking points on the underside of the vehicle. approx. 30 minutes. can be tested.
f Never start the engine when the vehicle is During this period, and depending on The message “Electric parking brake in
jacked or lifted up. Vibration from the engine temperature, the engine-compartment blowers service mode” appears on the multi-function
could cause the vehicle to fall. may continue to run or start to run.
f Carry out work in this area only with the engine
display in the instrument panel.
f When working under the car without safety
off and exercise extreme caution. Balancing wheels on the vehicle
stands but with the wheels on the ground,
make sure the car is on level ground, the The radiator fans in the front of the vehicle may be During finish balancing of the wheels, the entire
wheels are blocked, and that the engine operating or unexpectedly start operating when vehicle must be lifted and the wheels must be free
cannot be started. the engine is switched on. to turn.
Withdraw ignition keys (switch ignition off in f Carry out work in these areas only with the
vehicles that have Porsche Entry & Drive). engine switched off. Information
f Take great care to ensure that parts of the The tools required for changing a wheel (e.g. jack,
body, items of clothing or jewellery cannot be
wheel bolt wrench, assembly aids) are not
drawn in by the radiator fan, engine-
supplied as standard with the vehicle. Your
compartment blower, drive belt or other
authorized Porsche dealer will be pleased to
moving parts.
advise you.
Minor Repairs 221

Checking the Coolant Level and 4. Top up with coolant if necessary.

Only add a mixture of antifreeze and distilled
Adding Coolant water in equal parts.
The coolant provides year-round protection from Antifreeze in coolant:
corrosion and freezing down to –31 °F (–35 °C) 50 % provides antifreeze protection down
(–40 °F (–40 °C) in Nordic countries). Regular to –31 °F (–35 °C).
checking of the coolant level is part of servicing. The maximum fill level is reached when the
The coolant level only needs to be checked when coolant level indicator C is at the MAX marking.
a warning message appears on the multi-function Do not exceed the MAX-mark when topping up.
display in the instrument panel.
5. Screw the cap on the reservoir closed until it
locks securely.
WARNING AND INFORMATION MESSAGES” 6. Have the cooling system checked.
on page 116.
f Use only antifreeze authorized by Porsche.
h DANGER Swallowing engine Information

coolant If pure water is added in an emergency, the mixing
Coolant is hazardous to health. Coolant can be ratio will have to be corrected.
C - Coolant level indicator
deadly to children or pets if consumed. A significant loss of coolant indicates a leak in the
f Keep coolant out of children's reach. Checking the coolant level when a warning cooling system.
f Also, keep coolant away from your pets. They message appears on the multi-function display in f The cause must be eliminated without delay.
can be attracted to it should there be a spill, or the instrument panel: Please contact an authorized Porsche dealer.
to used coolant left in an open container. 1. Allow the engine to cool as far as possible
2. Cover the reservoir cap with a cloth.
h WARNING Hot engine coolant Open reservoir cap carefully and allow any
overpressure to escape.
The coolant becomes very hot when the engine is Finally, unscrew reservoir cap completely.
running and can burn you. 3. Reading off the engine coolant level:
The coolant reservoir is pressurized. Careless When the engine is cold and the vehicle is
opening of the coolant reservoir can lead to hot level, the coolant level indicator C must be
coolant suddenly spraying out.
f Do not open the cap on the reservoir when the
between MIN and MAX markings.
engine is hot.
f Allow the engine to cool down before opening
the cap and protect your hands, arms and face
from any possible escape of hot coolant.
222 Minor Repairs

h WARNING
Engine-compartment h DANGER Swallowing brake fluid
blowers or other moving
parts in the area of the Brake fluid is hazardous to your health, and may
engine be fatal if swallowed.
f Keep brake fluid out of children's reach.
f If brake fluid gets into your eye, immediately
Hands, fingers, items of clothing (ties, sleeves,
etc.), necklaces or long hair can be drawn in by
moving parts, e.g. the engine-compartment rinse with clean water for a few minutes. Then
see a doctor immediately.
f Please note all the information on the refill
blowers, drive belt, etc., when working in the
engine compartment.
container of the brake fluid.
The engine-compartment blowers are mounted in
the engine compartment.
After the engine is switched off, the engine NOTICE
compartment temperature is monitored for Brake fluid attacks and can damage paintwork.
approx. 30 minutes. f Immediately rinse off spilled brake fluid with
During this period, and depending on clean water.
temperature, the engine-compartment blowers
may continue to run or start to run. Changing brake fluid
f Carry out work in this area only with the engine Brake fluid absorbs moisture from the air over
off and exercise extreme caution.
Brake Fluid
time. The absorbed water can impair braking
Regular checking of the brake fluid is part of
efficiency.
h WARNING Hot engine parts servicing.
f It is important therefore to have the brake fluid
The fluid level should always be between the changed in accordance with the change
The engine and adjacent components become MIN and MAX markings.
very hot when the engine is running. intervals specified in the “Maintenance”
f Exercise extreme caution when working in the
A slight decrease in the fluid level due to wear and booklet.
engine compartment.
automatic readjustment of the disk brakes is f Use only brake fluid authorized by Porsche.
normal.
However, if the fluid level falls significantly or goes Brake warning light USA
below the MIN marking, the brake system may Brake warning light Canada
have developed a leak.
f Have the brake system checked immediately.
The warning light on the instrument panel and the
warning message on the multi-function display
Please contact an authorized Porsche dealer. alert you to the fact that the brake fluid level is too
low and could indicate brake circuit failure if the
pedal travel is greater than normal.
Minor Repairs 223

Changing Particle Filters Tires and Wheels

Information
Regular replacement of the filters is part of The original equipment tires and wheel rims on
If the warning light and warning message appear servicing. your Porsche comply with all applicable Federal
when driving:
f Stop immediately in a suitable place.
Dirty filters can be the cause of reduced air Motor Vehicle Safety Standards.
f Do not continue driving.

throughput, e.g. the windows can mist up.
f Have the filters replaced. Information
For information on warning messages on the multi- The summer tires of your car have been specially
function display: developed and adapted for high performance. At
f Please see the chapter “OVERVIEW OF Information low outside temperatures (below 60 °F (15 °C)),
WARNING AND INFORMATION MESSAGES” The particle filters ensure that the fresh air the tire characteristics change. This can result in
on page 116. entering the passenger compartment is virtually noises occurring when parking or maneuvering at
free of dust and pollen. low outside temperatures.
f If the outside air is polluted by exhaust fumes,
Electromechanical Power Steering press the recirculated-air button. For your safety remember the following:
h WARNING
No power steering
– Wheel rims and wheel bolts are matched to fit
assist
your Porsche.
When the engine is stopped (e.g. when on tow), – If you intend to use other than original
no power steering assistance is available. equipment wheels, be sure that they conform
Increased force is required for steering.
f Exercise extreme care when your vehicle is
to Porsche specifications for your model. Only
tires with the same make and with the same
being towed.
f Have the fault corrected. Please contact an
specification code (e.g. “N0”, “N1”...) can be
mounted.
authorized Porsche dealer. – The use of wheel rims and wheel bolts that do
not meet specifications of the original factory
Changing Air Cleaner installed equipment will affect the safe
Regular replacement of the filter element is part of operation of your vehicle and affect warranty
servicing. coverage.
f In dusty conditions, clean the filter element – Before you plan on exchanging wheels, or
more frequently and replace it if necessary. snow tires already mounted on the wheel rims,
f Please see the chapter “MEASUREMENTS ON consult your authorized Porsche dealer.
TEST STANDS” on page 221. Your dealer has the technical information
necessary to advise you which wheel rims and
wheel bolts are compatible with the original
factory installations.
224 Minor Repairs

h DANGER
Traction AA, A, B, C
Tire damage while
driving The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are
AA, A, B, and C and they represent the tire's ability
Driving with damaged tires could cause you to
to stop on wet pavement as measured under
lose control of the vehicle.
f If while driving, your vehicle experiences a
controlled conditions on specified government
test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire
sudden vibration or ride disturbance, and/or
marked C may have poor traction performance.
you suspect that possible damage to your tires
or vehicle has occurred, you should
immediately reduce your speed without Information
excessive use of the brakes. The traction grade assigned to this is based on
f Stop the vehicle as soon as possible, and braking (straight-ahead) traction tests and does
inspect the tires. not include cornering (turned) traction,
If you cannot determine the cause for the acceleration, hydroplaning or peak traction
disturbance, have your vehicle towed to the characteristics.
nearest Porsche or tire dealer to have your
vehicle or tire(s) inspected. Temperature A, B, C
f Continuing to operate the vehicle without The temperature grades are A (the highest), B and
correction could result in a loss of control. Example
C, representing the tire's resistance to the
Uniform Tire Quality Grading generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat
Quality grades can be found where applicable on when tested under controlled conditions on a
the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and specified indoor laboratory test wheel.
maximum section width. Sustained high temperatures can cause the
All passenger car tires must conform to Federal material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire
Safety Requirements in addition to these grades. life, and excessive temperature can lead to
sudden tire failure.
Treadwear
The grade C corresponds to a level of
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating performance which all passenger car tires must
based on the wear rate of the tire when tested meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
under controlled conditions on a specific Standard No. 109.
government test course. For example, a tire Grades B and A represent higher levels of
graded 150 would wear one and a half (1-1/2) performance on the laboratory test wheel than the
times as well on the government course as a tire minimum required by law.
graded 100. The relative performance of tires
depends upon the actual conditions of their use,
however, and may depart significantly from the
norm due to variations in driving habits, service
practices and differences in road characteristics
and climate.
Minor Repairs 225

h WARNING
f Use only plastic valve caps. When tires are warm, the tire pressure is
f For safety reasons, don't use tire inflating
Tire abuse
increased.
The temperature grade for this tire is established bottles. f Never let air out of hot tires. This could cause
f Please see the chapter “TIRE PRESSURE FOR
for a tire that is properly inflated and not the tire pressure to fall below the prescribed
overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or value.
excessive loading, either separately or in COLD TIRES (68 °F/ 20 °C)” on page 264.
Insufficient tire pressure can cause tires to over-
combination, can cause heat buildup and possible Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should
heat and thus be damaged – even invisibly. Hidden
tire failure. be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the
f Do not exceed the permitted maximum speed
tire damage is not eliminated by subsequently
inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle correcting the tire pressure.
for the tires fitted to the vehicle. manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire
f Ensure that the tires are set to the correct inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires of Overloading
inflation pressure. a different size than the size indicated on the h DANGER
f Observe the maximum load for the vehicle.
Overloading tires
vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you
should determine the proper tire inflation pressure Overloading can lead to dangerous vehicle
reactions and long braking distances.
f Do not overload your vehicle.
Tire pressures for those tires.)
h DANGER Low tire pressure As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
f If you plan to load the vehicle, first correct the
equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system
Driving the vehicle with low tire pressure increases tire pressure. Tire pressure for loaded vehicle
(TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale
risk of a tire failure and resulting loss of control. can be found on the tire pressure plate and in
when one or more of your tires is significantly
the chapter technical data.
f Never exceed the specified axle load.
Furthermore, low tire pressure increases rate of under-inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire
wear of the affected tires and causes damage. pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and
f Always use an accurate tire pressure gauge check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate
when checking inflation pressures. them to the proper pressure. Driving on a
f Do not exceed the maximum tire pressure significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to
listed on the tire sidewall. (Also refer to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-
“Technical data”). inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread
f Please see the chapter “TIRE PRESSURE life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and
PLATE” on page 227. stopping ability.
f Cold tire inflation pressure means: all tires Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for
must be cold, ambient temperature maximum proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s
68 °F (20 °C), when adjusting the inflation responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure,
pressure. Avoid sunlight striking the tires even if under-inflation has not reached the level to
before measuring cold pressures, since the trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure
pressures would rise from temperature tell-tale.
influence.
f Valve caps protect the valve from dust and dirt,
For further information on the tire pressure
monitoring system:
and thus from leakage. Always screw caps
f Please see the chapter “TIRE PRESSURE
tightly down. Replace missing caps
MENU (TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING
immediately.
SYSTEM, TPMS)” on page 93.
226 Minor Repairs

C Original tire size

Size of tires mounted at the factory.
D Recommended cold tire inflation pressure
These values are for cold tires (68 °F/20 °C).
Tire traction
h WARNING Hydroplaning
When driving on wet or slushy roads, a wedge of
water may build up between the tires and the road.
This phenomenon is known as “hydroplane” and
may cause partial or complete loss of traction,
vehicle control or stopping ability.
f Reduce speed on wet surfaces.
Example of a tire pressure plate

NOTICE
Risk of damage to the vehicle and to the tires.
Tire Pressure plate
Damage due to overloading is not covered by the Information on the tire pressure plate
vehicle warranty. A Seating capacity
Tire damage may also be caused by overloading, Maximum number of vehicle occupants, including
and this damage is not covered by your tire the driver.
warranty. B Vehicle load limit
f Do not overload your vehicle. Is the maximum total weight limit specified of the
f If you plan to load the vehicle, first correct the load (passengers and cargo) for the vehicle. This
tire pressure. Tire pressure for loaded vehicle is the maximum weight of passengers and cargo
can be found on the tire pressure plate and in that can be loaded into the vehicle.
the chapter “Technical data“. f Please see the chapter “LOADING
f Never exceed the specified axle load. INFORMATION” on page 184.
f Please see the chapter “LOADING
INFORMATION” on page 184.
Minor Repairs 227

Tire life f Specialized high performance tires on high Tire damage, puncture
Tire life depends on various factors, i.e., road performance sports cars exhibit more wear f Please see the chapter “HIGH-PRESSURE
surfaces, traffic and weather conditions, driving than those on a family sedan, or even a high CLEANING EQUIPMENT, STEAM CLEANERS”
habits, type of tires and tire care. performance sedan. on page 212.
f Inspect your tires for wear and damage before Therefore, it is important to check your tire
pressure and condition at least every two h DANGER Damaged tire check
driving off. If you notice uneven or substantial
wear, wheels might need alignment or tires weeks. Driving the vehicle with low tire pressure increases
should be balanced or replaced. f If you notice that tires are wearing unevenly, risk of a tire failure and resulting loss of control.
consult your authorized Porsche dealer. Furthermore, low tire pressure increases the rate
Tire wear of wear of the affected tires.
f Check tires – including sidewalls – regularly for
Uneven wear may not always be due to improper
The original equipment tires on your Porsche have
wheel alignment. It can be the result of individual
built-in tire wear indicators. They are molded into foreign bodies, nicks, cuts, cracks and bulges.
f After driving off road, examine tires for signs
driving habits such as cornering at high speeds. If
the bottom of the tread grooves and will appear as
the tire pressure is not checked and adjusted
approximately 1/2 in. (12 mm) bands when the of damage such as cuts, tears, bulges or
regularly, abnormal tire wear can also occur.
tire tread depth is down to 1/16 of an in (1.6 mm). foreign objects stuck in the tread. Replace a
When the indicators appear in two or more Tire care damaged tire if necessary.
adjacent grooves, it is time to replace the tires. f Avoid damaging tires and wheel rims. f Cross curb edges slowly and at right angles if
We recommend, however, that you do not let the f If you must drive over a curb or other obstacle, possible.
tires wear down to this extent. drive slowly and at an obtuse angle. Avoid driving over steep or sharp curbs.
Worn tires cannot grip the road surface properly f Check tires for uneven wear and damage f In cases of doubt, have the wheel (particularly
and are even less effective on wet roads. before driving off. the inner side) checked by an authorized
In the United States, state laws may govern the f Remove embedded material. Porsche dealer.
minimum tread depth permissible. Follow all such f Replace worn or damaged tires immediately.
laws. f Keep oil, fuel, brake fluid, etc. away from tires. In case of tire damage, where it is uncertain
h DANGER
f Replace missing valve stem caps. whether there is a break in the ply with all its
Excessively-worn tires
f Keep tires inflated correctly. consequences or tire damage caused by thermal
Driving on worn tires can result in loss of control f Wash tires when washing the vehicle. Also or mechanical overloading due to loss of pressure
of the vehicle and could cause serious personal clean inner side of wheels. or any other prior damage, we recommend that
injuries or death. f Do not use abrasive cleaners when washing the tire be replaced for safety reasons.
f Do not drive with worn tires or tires showing the wheels. If one faulty tire is replaced it should be noted that
cuts or bruises as they may lead to sudden f Check wheel rims for corrosion. the difference in tread depth on one axle must not
deflation and loss of control which could cause f Remove road salt, if driving in winter. exceed 30%. Handling inconsistencies may result.
severe personal injury. f Recommendation: Replace both tires on one
axle so that no handling inconsistencies may
result due to different tread depths.
f Perform a visual inspection if necessary.
228 Minor Repairs

Tire replacements If new tires are installed only on one axle, a Parking at the curb
f Use only tire makes and types tested by noticeable change in handling occurs due to the
h DANGER
different tread depth of the other tires. This Curb impact / tire
Porsche.
happens especially if only rear tires are replaced. damage
If you do not use a Porsche recommended
However, this condition disappears as the new Hard impacts against curbs (or traffic islands) are
replacement tire, make sure that you
tires are broken in. dangerous and may cause hidden tire damage
f Please adjust your driving style accordingly.
purchase your new tires from a reputable tire
which is not noticeable until later. Such damage
dealer and that the dealer complies with all
Installation of new tires should only be done by a can result in accidents at high speeds. Depending
manufacturers warnings for those tires.
qualified tire technician. on the force of impact, the edge of the rim can
Only tires with the same manufacturer and
also be damaged.
f After such an impact, have the wheel checked
with the same specification code (e.g. “N0”, Valves
“N1”…) should be mounted on the vehicle. f Use only plastic valve caps.
f Please read the fitting and replacement
by an expert.
Before mounting new tires, check with your f If you must drive over a curb or other obstacle,
Porsche dealer about the current release instructions regarding metal valves.
f Use original Porsche metal valves only.
drive slowly and at an obtuse angle.
status.
f Valve inserts with valve caps protect against
Exercise care when parking along curbs.
Use tires with “ZR” quality standards. There
are currently no standards concerning tire soiling.
strength at speeds above 150 mph (240 km/h). Soiled valve inserts can cause a gradual loss Information
Tires should be replaced no less than on one axle of air. Tire repairs are not permissible under any
at the time. Only tires of the same make and type circumstances.
must be used. Mixed tires are not permissible and
will affect vehicle performance, safety, and can
affect vehicle warranty.
Porsche dealers can recommend the most current
replacement tire options for your vehicle.
Initially, new tires do not have their full traction.
You should therefore drive at moderate speeds
during the first 60 - 120 miles (100 - 200 km).
Tires must always remain on the same side
of the vehicle.
When wheels are removed, the direction of
rotation and position of each wheel should be
marked.
Minor Repairs 229

Wheel alignment, wheel balancing Wheels with Tire Pressure Monitoring Example
As a precaution, have wheels with summer tires System (TPMS) sensors FR (front right), FL, RR and RL.
balanced in the spring, and those with mud and Before changing wheels, make sure that the Wheels must always be fitted in accordance with
snow tires before winter. Unbalanced wheels may wheels are compatible with your vehicle’s TPMS. their marking.
affect car handling and tire life. f Check this with your authorized Porsche The perception that tire durability and
Only the specified weights may be used for wheel dealer. performance are not affected by storage and age
balancing. is unfounded.
Removing and storing tires
f After changing, adjust tire pressure and torque
Self-adhesive weights must not come into contact Chemical additives, which make the rubber
with cleaning agents, since they could drop off. elastic, lose their effectiveness over the course of
Uneven tread wear indicates wheel imbalance. In wheel bolts diagonally. time and the rubber becomes brittle and cracks.
this event, the vehicle should be checked at an Please see the chapter “CHANGING WHEELS”
Therefore, the tires should be inspected from
on page 234.
f Store tires in a cool and dry place. Rotate
authorized Porsche dealer. time to time.
h DANGER High-speed tire vibration periodically to avoid flat spots.
If, during a trip, uneven running or vibrations occur
f Do not store summer tires or park vehicles Information
fitted with summer tires at ambient Under no circumstances should tires older than
that could be caused by damage to tires or the
temperatures below 5 °F (-15 °C). 6 years be used on your Porsche.
f Avoid contact with fuel, oil and grease.
car, the speed must be reduced immediately, but
without braking sharply. If you continue your trip The age of the tire can be obtained from the “DOT”
without having the cause of the fault remedied, Tires must always remain on the same side code number. If, for example, the last four
you might lose control of your vehicle. of the vehicle. numbers read 1211, then the tire was produced in
f Stop the vehicle and check the tires. When wheels are removed, the direction of the 12th week of 2011.
f If no cause for the fault can be found, drive rotation and position of each wheel should be
carefully to the nearest authorized Porsche marked. Snow tires
dealer. The installation of Porsche approved snow tires is
recommended.
Use Porsche approved snow tires for grip on snow
and ice. Summer performance tires are not
suitable for usage in cold, snowy, or icy
conditions.
Check with your local Motor Vehicle Bureau for
possible restrictions.
230 Minor Repairs

h WARNING
Snow tires do not have the same degree of Wheel change
f When wheels are removed, mark the direction
Snow tire use
traction on dry, wet or snowfree roads as normal
The standard tires profile and rubber mixture are tires. of rotation and position of each wheel.
optimized for wet and dry driving conditions, and Furthermore, snow tires wear rapidly under these Example: FR (front right), FL, RR and RL.
may not prove favorable for snow conditions. conditions. f Always fit the wheels in accordance with the
f Install snow tires before driving in such markings.
conditions.
Information Snow chains
NOTICE We recommend that you fit snow tires on the NOTICE
Risk of insufficient road grip leading to loss of vehicle at temperatures below 45 °F (7 °C) since
the driving performance of summer tires is Risk of damage to body, axle or brake
control and damage to the vehicle. components.
f Fit snow chains only to the rear wheels, and
The standard tires profile and rubber mixture are reduced at low temperatures and a lower level of
optimized for wet and dry driving conditions, and comfort can also be expected. For example,
juddering noises caused by the tires can occur only with the tire/rim combination listed in the
may not prove favorable for snow conditions.
f Install snow tires before driving in such
Technical Data.
f Use only the fine-link snow chains
while maneuvering the vehicle or accelerating out
conditions. of bends on both dry and wet road surfaces.
Extremely low temperatures of below 5 °F (-15 °C) recommended and authorized by Porsche so
Before mounting snow tires, consult with your can cause permanent damage to summer tires. that sufficient clearance between the wheel
well and the chain is assured.
f Please see the chapter “WHEELS, TIRES”
Porsche dealer. They have the technical Snow tires lose their suitability when their tread
information necessary to advise you on wheel and depth falls below 5/32 in. (4 mm).
on page 263.
f Follow instructions issued by the supplier of
tire compatibility.
f Snow tires should have the same load capacity
Comply with all state and local laws
governing snow tire and tread depth the chains.
as original equipment tires and should be requirements.
mounted on all four wheels.
h DANGER Tire hazards h DANGER Excessive speed for
tires
Driving the vehicle with low tire pressure increases
risk of a tire failure and resulting loss of control. Exceeding the maximum permitted speed for the
tires fitted could cause tire failure.
f Always check the maximum speed rating on
Furthermore, low tire pressure increases the rate
of wear of the affected tires and causes damage.
the tire sidewall on any tire on the vehicle.
f Never exceed the maximum speed rating of
Tires with badly worn treads are very dangerous
and could cause accidents.
f Make sure they are replaced immediately. the tires.
f Do not exceed the snow tire speed rating.
Minor Repairs 231

Fitting snow chains

Using snow chains is not permitted if 1/5 in.
(5 mm) spacers are fitted.
f To permit the fitting of snow chains, have the
5 mm spacers removed on all 4 wheels.
f Before fitting chains, remove accumulated ice
and snow from the wheel well.
f Vehicles with snow chains must not be driven
faster than 30 mph (50 km/h).
Different states and countries have varying
statutory requirements regarding maximum
speed.
f Check with local authorities for possible
restrictions.
f Remove chains as soon as the roads are free
of ice and snow.
Spacers
Example of Inscription
NOTICE – Y - Speed code letter
Inscription on radial tire
Risk of damage to the wheel housings if the – XL (Extra Load) - Tire with increased load
A – Tire size
spacers are not removed before fitting snow rating
Example: P 265/40ZR18 (101Y)
chains.
f To permit the fitting of snow chains, have the – P - The tire is designed for Passenger vehicle. B – TIN (Tire Identification Number)
This information is not included on all tires. Example: DOT xx xx xxxx xxxx
– 265 - Indication of tire width in mm – DOT
– 40 - Indication of tire height to tire width ratio The DOT symbol indicates that the tires
in percent comply with the requirements of the
– ZR - Belt type code letter for radial US Department of Transportation and provides
– 18 - Indication of rim diameter in inches information about:
– 101 - Load capacity coefficient – first two-digit code means manufacture’s
identification mark.
– second two-digit code means tire size.
– third four-digit code means tire type code.
– fourth four-digit code means date of
manufacture.
If, for example, the last four numbers read
0211, the tire was produced in the 2nd week
of 2011.
232 Minor Repairs

C – Tire ply composition and material Speed code letters

The number of layers in the tread and sidewalls The speed code letter Y indicates the maximum
and their material composition. permitted speed for the tire.
This code letter is shown on the tire sidewall.
D – Maximum permissible inflation pressure
The maximum permissible cold inflation pressure T up to 118 mph (190 km/h)
to which a tire can be inflated. H up to 131 mph (210 km/h)
f Do not exceed the permissible inflation V up to 150 mph (240 km/h)
pressure.
W up to 165 mph (270 km/h)
E – Maximum Load rating Y up to 185 mph (300 km/h)
The maximum load in kilograms and pounds can (Y) up to 185 mph (300 km/h) as for Y tires.
be carried by the tire. If you replace tires always Speeds of more than 185 mph
use a tire that has the same maximum load rating (300 km/h) are also possible at a
as the factory installed tire. maximum tire load capacity of 85 %
F – Radial (confirmation from tire manufacturer
The identification indicates if the tire has radial required for speeds of more than
structure. 185 mph (300 km/h)).
G - Rim width in inches
G – Term of tubeless or tube tire H - Rim-flange contour code letter
I - Symbol for drop-center rim
Identification for tubeless tires. Information J - Rim diameter in inches
K - Double hump
Tires with a maximum speed rating that is lower L - Rim offset in mm
than the specified maximum vehicle speed may be
mounted only if they bear an M+S identification on Inscription on alloy wheels
the tire sidewall. The information is provided on the rear of the
f Please note that in addition to snow tires, spokes. The rim width in inches A and the rim
all-season tires are also subject to speed limits offset F are visible from the outside. This
and bear this identification. information can be found near the tire valve.
f Never drive faster than the speed rating of the
tires, and obey all speed and traffic laws.
Minor Repairs 233

Changing Wheels
h DANGER Unsafe stopping
Other vehicles could collide with your vehicle if you
are parked in a dangerous position.
f If you have a flat tire, move a safe distance off
the road. Turn the emergency flasher on and
use other warning devices to alert other
motorists.
f Do not remain in the car. Someone
approaching from the rear may not realize your
vehicle is stopped and cause a collision.
h WARNING Stopping over nearby

flammable matter
hot when the engine is running. The exhaust
Jacking point for lifting platform and jack at the front Jacking point for lifting platform and jack at the rear system remains hot for some time after the
Raising the vehicle with a lifting platform, vehicle is turned off.
f Do not park your vehicle in areas where the hot
NOTICE
trolley jack or standard jack
f Before driving the vehicle onto a lifting
Risk of serious damage to the engine or vehicle if exhaust system may come in contact with dry
you lift the vehicle improperly. grass, brush, fuel spill or other flammable
f Lift only at the jacking points provided.
platform, make sure that there is sufficient
material.
f Before driving the vehicle onto a lifting
space between the lifting platform and the
vehicle.
platform, make sure that there is sufficient h WARNING Jacking risks
space between the lifting platform and the
vehicle. If the vehicle is not secured, or incorrectly
f To avoid serious damage, never jack up the secured, during a wheel change, it could move
vehicle at the engine, transmission or at the unexpectedly or fall from the car jack.
axles. f Passengers must not be in the vehicle when it
f Use only level anti-slip rubber pads on a lifting is jacked up.
platform. f Before you change a wheel, be sure the ground
f Do not damage any sensitive components in is level and firm. If necessary, use a board
the vicinity of the jacking points. under the jack to ensure that the jack does not
sink into the ground.
f Set the electric parking brake and block the
wheels opposite the flat tire on the other side
of the vehicle.
234 Minor Repairs

f The jack is only to be used for changing a 3. Secure the vehicle to prevent it from rolling
wheel. Do not use it as a support to work under Information away, e.g. by means of wedges under the
the car. The tools required for changing a wheel (e.g. jack, wheels on the opposite side.
f The car must be jacked up only at the wheel bolt wrench, assembly aids) are not This is particularly important on slopes.
illustrated jacking points. Lifting at any other supplied as standard with the vehicle. Your 4. Slightly loosen the wheel bolts on the wheel to
place may result in personal injury. authorized Porsche dealer will be pleased to be changed.
advise you. 5. Lift the vehicle only at the specified jacking
NOTICE points.
6. Raise the vehicle until the wheel lifts off the
Risk of damage to the engine or vehicle if you lift Information ground.
f Please see the chapter “RAISING THE VEHICLE
the vehicle improperly.
f The car must be jacked up only at the
The tire and wheel sizes on both axles are
different. WITH A LIFTING PLATFORM, TROLLEY JACK
illustrated jacking points. Lifting at any other f Do not fit the wrong wheels on the wrong axle. OR STANDARD JACK” on page 234.
place may result in damage to the vehicle. f Only use wheels/tires with approved
f Never jack up the car by the body, bumpers,
7. Remove 1 or 2 wheel bolts (see corresponding
dimensions for the relevant axle. figure).
engine, transmission or at the axles.
f Do not damage any sensitive components in Sequence of operation
the vicinity of the jacking points.
f For safety reasons do not use tire inflating bot- h WARNING Working under vehicle
tles. Do not use commercially available sealant
The jack must be used only to raise the car for
bottles. Use only the tire inflating bottle
wheel changing.The jack must never be used as a
located in the luggage compartment.
support to work underneath the vehicle. If the jack
is accidentally dislodged, you or bystanders could
suffer severe personal injury.
f Never jack up other vehicles or other loads
with the jack.
f Always place the car on stable supports if you
have to work under it. When working under the
vehicle, always use safety stands specifically
designed for this purpose.
f Please use a suitable knee rest to protect your
clothing against soiling.
1. Activate the electric parking brake and shift
into 1st gear or move the PDK selector lever
to position P.
Remove the ignition key or control unit on
vehicles with Porsche Entry & Drive.
2. Switch on the emergency flasher if necessary.
Minor Repairs 235

Note on operation for vehicles with Tire

Pressure Monitoring System
f On vehicles with Tire Pressure Monitoring
System, the settings on the multi-function
display must be updated after the wheel
change.
f Please see the chapter “TIRE PRESSURE
MENU (TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING
Checking tire pressure with a pressure
gauge
1. Remove the valve stem cap from the tire.
2. Press the pressure gauge onto the valve stem.
Information
f Do not press too hard or force the valve stem
Screw in ONE assembly aid on vehicles without PCCB Screw in TWO assembly aids on vehicles with PCCB sideways, or air will escape.
8. Screw in assembly aids instead of wheel bolts. 12.Remove assembly aids and screw in remaining If the sound of air escaping from the tire is
wheel bolts. heard, reposition the pressure gauge.
NOTICE
Initially tighten bolts only slightly in diagonally
3. Read the tire pressure on the gauge stem and
Risk of damage to brake disks. opposite sequence so that the wheel is
f Always screw in both assembly aids when
compare it to the permissible tire pressure.
centered.
This information can be found on the tire
changing a wheel. 13.Inflate the tire if necessary.
pressure plate or in the chapter Technical
9. Remove the remaining wheel bolts. Data.
COLD TIRES (68 °F/ 20 °C)” on page 264.
10.Take the wheel off and put a new wheel on. 4. Remove the pressure gauge.
f Please see the chapter “WHEEL BOLTS”
14.Lower the vehicle fully and remove the jack.
5. Please see the chapter “TIRE PRESSURE
15.Tighten wheel bolts in diagonally opposite
on page 237. MENU (TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING
sequence.
11.Insert wheel bolts and tighten by hand. SYSTEM, TPMS)” on page 93.
Immediately after changing a wheel, use
a torque wrench to check the prescribed
tightening torque of the wheel bolts
(160 Nm/118 ftlb.).
236 Minor Repairs

Wheel Bolts
f Always clean the wheel bolts before fitting.
f Wheel bolts must not be greased.
f Replace damaged wheel bolts.
Only use genuine Porsche wheel bolts
assigned especially to this model or wheel
bolts of similar quality that have been
manufactured according to Porsche
specifications and production requirements.
Tightening torque
Tightening torque for wheel bolts: 160 Nm
(118 ftlb.).
Wheel bolts with fitted spacers
f If spacers are fitted, all wheels must be fitted
using long (1.9 in./49 mm) wheel bolts.
For information on wheel bolts with fitted spacers:
f Please see the chapter “SPACERS”
Do not grease wheel attachment face B Security wheel bolts
Wheel Attachment Faces on page 239. The adapter (wrench socket) supplied for the
security wheel bolts (if fitted) can be stored in
NOTICE h WARNING Short wheel bolts the tool kit in the front luggage compartment.
There is a risk of damage to the wheel and wheel If spacers are fitted, wheels are held securely only f If the wheels have to be removed at the
attachment face. if long wheel bolts (1.9 in./49 mm) are used. workshop, do not forget to hand over the
f The wheel attachment face B on the brake disk Wheels may become loose while driving if they are socket for the security wheel bolts along with
and on the wheel itself must not be greased. the car key.
f To loosen or tighten the wheel bolt with anti-
fitted using short wheel bolts.
f Only the areas A may be greased. Grease f After fitting spacers, use only long wheel bolts
these areas very thinly with Optimoly® TA. (1.9 in./49 mm) on all four wheels. theft protection, the adapter must be used
Do not use any other grease/paste. f Make sure that the front wheels are also fitted between the wheel bolt and the wheel bolt
wrench.
f When positioning the wrench socket, ensure
using long wheel bolts in order to prevent
wheel bolts with different lengths from being
mixed up when wheels are changed. that it engages fully in the teeth of the wheel
bolt.
Minor Repairs 237

Flat Tire h WARNING Limits on tire sealant

1. Stop the vehicle as far away from the driving use
lane as possible. Always observe the following points:
The vehicle must be parked on a firm and flat f Use the tire sealant only in the case of cuts or
surface offering adequate grip. punctures no larger than 0.15 in. (4 mm).
2. Switch emergency flasher on. f Never use the tire sealant if the rim is
3. Apply the parking brake. damaged.
4. Put the vehicle in 1st gear or move the PDK
selector lever to position P. h WARNING Tire sealant flammability
5. Straighten the front wheels.
6. Remove the ignition key, or the control unit on The sealant is highly flammable and harmful to
health.
f Fire, naked flame and smoking are prohibited
vehicles with Porsche Entry & Drive, in order to
lock the steering and prevent the engine from
when handling tire sealant.
f Avoid contact with skin, eyes or clothing due to
being started.
7. Get all passengers to leave the vehicle.
caustic chemical properties of the tire sealant.
f Keep tire sealant away from children.
8. Set up the warning triangle at a suitable
f Do not inhale vapours, due to the consequent

distance.
A - Filler bottle
Filling in tire sealant harm to personal health resulting in serious B - Filler hose
The tire sealant can be found in the right-hand box personal injury or death. C - Filler hose plug
in the front luggage compartment. The D - Valve turner
E - Valve insert
compressor is located under the cover in the front In the event of contact with sealant:
f If sealant gets on your skin or into your eyes,
F - Tire valve
luggage compartment.
Filling in sealant
The tire sealant can be used to seal small cuts, thoroughly rinse the affected part of your body
especially in the tire tread. immediately with plenty of water. 1. Leave the object that caused the puncture in
Sealing the tire with the tire sealant is only an f Change soiled clothing immediately. the tire.
emergency solution so you can drive to the f See a doctor immediately in the event of an 2. Remove sealant and the enclosed sticker from
nearest workshop. Even if the tire is air-tight, allergic reaction. the front luggage compartment.
it may only be used for short journeys in an f If sealant is swallowed, thoroughly rinse out 3. Stick the sticker in the driver’s field of vision.
emergency. the mouth without delay and drink plenty of 4. Shake filler bottle A.
water. Do not induce vomiting. 5. Screw filler hose B onto the filler bottle.
The tire sealant set comprises:
See a doctor immediately. The filler bottle is now open.
– a filler bottle
6. Unscrew valve cap from the tire valve F.
– a filler hose
7. Remove valve insert E from the tire valve with
– a valve turner
valve turner D.
– a spare valve insert
Keep the valve insert in a clean, dry place.
– a sticker with the maximum permitted speed
8. Remove plug C from the filler hose B.
– a compressor
9. Push filler hose onto the tire valve.
– operating instructions
238 Minor Repairs

10.Hold the filler bottle higher than the level of the h WARNING Pressure loss
tire valve and squeeze it forcefully until the
bottle is completely emptied into the tire. A tire pressure sensor that is soiled with sealant
11.Pull filler hose off the tire valve. cannot determine the tire pressure correctly.
12.Screw valve insert E securely into the tire f When the defective tire is replaced, the tire
valve with the valve turner D. pressure sensor must be replaced.
13.Connect the compressor to a socket in the
vehicle and inflate the tire to at least 37 psi/ h DANGER Damaged tires
2.5 bar/25 kPa. Damaged tires could burst causing loss of control
If this tire pressure cannot be reached, the tire of the vehicle.
is too severely damaged. f Have the tire replaced by a specialist
Do not continue driving with this tire. workshop as soon as possible.
14.Screw valve cap onto the tire valve F. f Avoid hard acceleration and high cornering
15.Check the tire pressure after driving for speeds.
around 10 minutes. f Observe maximum speed of 50 mph
If the tire pressure is less than 22 psi/1.5 bar/ (80 km/h).
15 kPa, do not continue driving. f Always observe the safety and operating
If a value of more than 22 psi/1.5 bar/15 kPa instructions, which can be found in the
is indicated, correct the pressure to the Spacers
f Use the spacers only together with wheels
separate operating instructions for the sealant
prescribed value.
and on the compressor.
approved by Porsche.
COLD TIRES (68 °F/ 20 °C)” on page 264. Before having spacers fitted, find out about the
16.Please contact an authorized Porsche dealer. current approval status.
f Also follow the separate operating instructions f Remove spacers if snow chains are fitted.
for the tire sealing compound.
NOTICE
Risk of damage to the wheel housings if the
spacers are not removed before fitting snow
chains.
f To permit the fitting of snow chains, have the
f For fitting and removing spacers:
Minor Repairs 239

Removing spacers h WARNING Short wheel bolts

1. Unscrew both countersunk screws (M6x16)
If spacers are fitted, wheels are held securely only
on the wheel hub.
if long wheel bolts (1.9 in./49 mm) are used.
2. Remove the spacer.
Wheels may become loose while driving if they are
3. Fasten the brake disk with the short
fitted using short wheel bolts.
f After fitting spacers, use only long wheel bolts
countersunk screws M6x12,
Tightening torque 10 Nm (7.5 ftlb.).
(1.9 in./49 mm) on all four wheels.
For wheel mounting without a spacer, 5 mm
shorter wheel bolts must be used.
4. Fit wheel and screw tight.
Tightening torque: 160 Nm (118 ftlb.).
For information on fitting wheels:
f Please see the chapter “CHANGING WHEELS”
on page 234.
Wheel bolt identifying features

Long wheel bolt For identification purposes, the movable spherical
X = bolt length approx. 1.9 in. (49 mm) cap ring is galvanised in black on the long wheel
Arrow = spherical cap ring
bolts.
The long wheel bolts must only be used when
5 mm spacers are fitted.
The short wheel bolts must only be used without
5 mm spacers.
Tightening torque for both wheel bolts: 160 Nm
(118 ftlb.).
240 Minor Repairs

Electrical System Changing fuses

In order to avoid damage and faults in electrical or In order to prevent damage to the electrical
electronic systems, electrical accessories should system due to short circuits and overloads,
be installed at an authorized Porsche dealer the individual circuits are protected by fuses.
f Use only accessories approved by Porsche. The fuse boxes are located in the side walls of the
driver’s and passenger’s footwell respectively.
h WARNING Changing fuses 1. Switch off the load with the defective fuse.
Replacing fuses or relays with the engine running 2. Detach the appropriate plastic cover at the
or the ignition on could cause electrical shock. finger hole.
f Disconnect the negative terminal on the 3. Remove the relevant fuse (see fuse
battery during all work on the electrical assignment) from its slot using the yellow
system. plastic gripper A (left fuse box) in order to
f Please see the chapter “BATTERY (12 VOLT)” check it.
on page 245. A blown fuse can be identified by the melted
metal strip.
Relays 4. Replace only with fuses of the same rating.
Relays should be checked or changed only at an Spare fuses can be found in the left-hand fuse
authorized workshop. box, next to the yellow plastic gripper. A - Plastic gripper
We recommend that you use genuine Porsche B - Spare fuses
fuses for replacement. C - Diagnostic socket
Fuses in left footwell

Information Row A
If a fuse blows repeatedly, the cause of the fault No. Designation A
must be corrected immediately.
f Please contact an authorized Porsche dealer.
1 Lower left: 40
Air-conditioning fan, R/L
2 Upper left: 40
PSM control unit
3 Lower right: 25
Seat adjustment
4 Upper right: 40
Convertible top
Minor Repairs 241

Row B No. Designation A No. Designation A

No. Designation A 7 Convertible top latching hook 25 5 Convertible-top lock closing 30
1 Headlight adjustment for LHD/RHD 40 8 Air conditioning control unit 7.5 mechanism open/closed
Front lid light 9 Instrument cluster 10 Filler flap
Front lid actuator Steering column Convertible top storage
High beam, FL Stopwatch compartment catch open/close
Low beam, FL 10 PCM 25 Rear wing control extend/retract
Side marker light, FR CAN adapter 6 Power window control unit, FL 25
Turn signal lights, RL 7 Headlight cleaning system 30
2 Exhaust flap control 15 8 PSM control unit 25
Row C
Raised brake light, rear wing 9 Alarm siren 5
Rear lid actuator No. Designation A 10 PASM control unit 5
Rear fog light, right 1 Center console button panel 15
Gateway control unit Row D
Reversing light, left
Brake light, left Diagnostic socket No. Designation A
Ignition lock 1 Not used
Tail light, left
Passenger compartment monitoring 2 HomeLink 5
Daytime driving light, FL
sensor 3 Left headlight 5
3 Alarm horn 15 Light switch
4 Interior lighting 15 4 PDC control unit 5
Front left door control unit
Hall sensors Front camera control unit
Bluetooth phone charger
Orientation light Gateway/diagnostic socket
2 Footwell lights 40
License plate light Air quality sensor
Electric ignition lock anti-removal
Heated rear window relay Gateway headlights
lock
Central locking LED 5 PSM control unit 5
Turn signal light indicator, FL/FR
Door panels LED 6 Steering column switching module 5
Emergency flasher button LED
Electronic steering gear
Ambient light Electric ignition lock light
Refrigerant pressure sensor
Raised brake light Side turn signal lights, FR/FL
7 Selector lever control unit 5
Rear fog light, left High beam, FR Clutch switch sensor
Brake light, right Low beam, FR 8 Right headlight 5
Reversing light, right Turn signal light indicator, RR 9 Interior mirror 5
Daytime driving light, FR Side marker light, FL 10 Seat ventilation motors, left 5
Tail light, right 3 Vehicle Tracking System control unit 5
5 Fuel pump relay 20 4 Horn 15
6 Filler flap close/open 10
Washer pump, front/rear
242 Minor Repairs

Row B Row D
No. Designation A No. Designation A
1 Rain sensor 5 1 Airbag control unit 5
2 Air conditioning control unit 25 2 PASM control unit 5
3 Not used 3 Not used
4 Not used 4 ACC control unit 5
5 RDK control unit 5 5 Occupant sensing for the 5
6 TV tuner 5 passenger's seat
7 Subwoofer amplifier (Burmester) 40 6 Seat ventilation motors, right 5
Subwoofer amplifier (BOSE) 25 7 Control units DME, PDK, VTS, BCM 5
8 Not used back
9 Not used 8 Socket in passenger footwell 20
10 Reversing camera control unit 5 9 Center console socket 20
Cigarette lighter
10 Socket in glove box 20
Row C
Fuses in right footwell
No. Designation A
Row A 1 Heated rear window 30
No. Designation A 2 Electric parking brake button 5
1 Lower left: 40 3 PASM control unit 5
DC/DC converter, infotainment 4 PDK control unit 20
2 Upper left: 40 5 Temperature sensor 5
DC/DC converter roof console Tank leakage diagnosis
power supply 6 Wiper motor 30
3 Lower right: 40 7 Power window control unit, FR 25
Fresh-air blower motor 8 Steering column adjustment 25
Blower regulator
9 Roof console 5
4 Upper right: 25
10 Sound system amplifier (Burmester) 40
Right seat control unit Sound system amplifier (BOSE) 25
Seat adjustment
Minor Repairs 243

Emergency unlocking of front luggage

compartment lid
If the battery is discharged, the front luggage
compartment lid can be opened only with the
aid of a donor battery.
Information
The engine cannot be started with this method.
f Please see the chapter “EXTERNAL POWER
SUPPLY, EMERGENCY STARTING WITH
JUMPER CABLES” on page 247.
Unlocking lids
1. Use the key to unlock the vehicle at the
door lock.
2. Remove the plastic cover from the left-hand
fuse box.
3. Pull out positive terminal C (red) in the fuse A - Plastic gripper (yellow) 5. Use the black jump lead to connect the
C - Positive terminal (red) negative terminal of the donor battery to the
box using the plastic gripper A (yellow).
4. Use the red jump lead to connect the positive door arrester D.
terminal of the donor battery to the positive 6. Press button 2 on the remote control for
terminal C in the fuse box. approx. 2 seconds to unlock the luggage
compartment lid. The alarm system is
switched off.
Information
7. Disconnect the negative lead first, then the
If the vehicle was locked, the alarm horn will sound positive lead.
when the negative lead is connected. 8. Push positive terminal C into the fuse box and
fit the plastic fuse box cover.
244 Minor Repairs

h DANGER Battery explosion NOTICE

hazard Risk of damage to the fabric, metal or paint from
f Charge battery in a well vetilated area. battery acid or electrolyte.
f Never charge a frozen battery. It may explode f Do not allow battery acid to come in contact
because of gas trapped in the ice. Allow a with fabric or painted surfaces.
frozen battery to thaw out first. f Spilled electrolyte must be rinsed off at once
f Do not expose the battery to an open flame, with a solution of baking soda and water to
electrical spark or a lit cigarette, since they neutralize the acid.
can ignite hydrogen gas from the battery.
Charge state
h DANGER Static electricity A well-charged battery prevents starting problems
f Do not wipe the battery with a dry cloth. and has a longer service life.
f Before touching the battery, discharge any In order to avoid unintentional battery
static electricity by touching the vehicle. discharge:
f Switch off unnecessary electrical loads in city
h WARNING Chemical exposure traffic, on short trips or in a line of traffic.
Battery (12 volt) f After handling battery, always protect your skin f Always remove the ignition key when leaving
The battery is located under the cover in the front and remove surface chemicals by washing the vehicle or
luggage compartment. thoroughly with soap and water. switch off the ignition on vehicles with Porsche
Entry & Drive.
f Avoid using the Porsche Communication
For information on removing the cover:
f Please see the chapter “TIRE FILLING h WARNING Battery acid and
COMPRESSOR” on page 182. electrolyte exposure Management system and the audio system
f Have the battery removed and installed only by f Wear eye protection.
when the engine is not running.
f Please see the chapter “CHARGING THE
your authorized Porsche dealer. f Do not allow battery acid to come in contact
BATTERY” on page 248.
with your skin or eyes.
h DANGER Electric shock
f If you get electrolyte, which is an acid, in your
f Observe all warning notes on the battery. eyes or on your skin, immediately rinse with Information
f Disconnect the negative terminal on the cold water for several minutes and call a In the cold season in particular or if the vehicle
battery during all work on the electrical doctor. is used primarily for short distances, it may be
system. necessary to recharge the battery from time to
f Do not lay tools or other metal objects on the time.
battery as they could cause a short circuit
across the battery terminal.
Minor Repairs 245

Battery care f After you install a new battery, it must be

f Ensure that battery is securely mounted. Information initialised in the control unit.
f Keep battery surface clean and dry. f When the battery is disconnected, the alarm Please contact your authorized Porsche
f Keep terminals and connections clean. system ceases to function. dealer.
Corrosion can be prevented by coating the If the vehicle was locked before the battery f Please observe the disposal instructions for
terminals and connections with petroleum jelly was disconnected, the alarm will be triggered batteries.
or silicone spray. when the battery is reconnected. Putting vehicle into operation
f Ensure that terminal clamps and the vent To deactivate the alarm system:
f Lock the vehicle and unlock it again.
After the battery is connected or after a fully
hose are firmly secured. discharged battery is charged, the PSM warning
Winter driving light lights up on the instrument panel and
Alarm system, central locking
f The status of the central locking and alarm
The ability of the battery to deliver and store a message appears on the multi-function display
power decreases at low outside temperatures. in the instrument panel to indicate a fault.
system does not change when you disconnect
Moreover, the battery is more heavily loaded in the This fault can be corrected with a few simple
the battery.
winter months, e.g. by the heated rear window, steps:
the more frequent use of additional lights, the 1. Start the engine.
blower and the windshield wipers, etc. Information To do this, turn the ignition key or the control
f Have the battery checked before the start Even if you put your vehicle out of operation, the unit (on vehicles with Porsche Entry & Drive) to
of winter. battery still discharges. ignition lock position 2 twice.
f The battery must be charged, i.e. connected 2. With the vehicle stationary, perform a few
to a charger, approximately every 6 weeks in steering movements to the left and right and
Information then drive a short distance in a straight line
order to preserve battery function.
Keep the battery fully charged to prevent it from f Store a battery that has been removed in until the PSM warning light goes out and the
freezing. a dark, cool place that is not exposed to frost. message is erased from the multi-function
A discharged battery can already freeze at 23 °F display in the instrument panel.
(–5 ºC), but a fully charged one only freezes at Replacing the battery 3. If the warnings do not disappear, then:
–-40 °F (–-40 ºC). Drive carefully to the nearest authorized
f If the battery is frozen, thaw it out before
The battery is subject to normal wear: its service
life depends heavily on the care you give it, Porsche dealer.
connecting jump leads. Have the fault corrected.
climatic conditions and the conditions of use
(distances, loads). 4. After the warnings go out:
Laying up the vehicle It is not possible to use the details on the battery
Stop the vehicle in a suitable place.
If the vehicle is left for long periods in the garage 5. Store the end position for the power windows.
case to determine a comparable battery that
or workshop, the doors and lids should be closed.
f Remove the ignition key or disconnect the
meets all the specific requirements of Porsche.
f Have the battery removed and installed only by
battery if necessary. your authorized Porsche dealer.
f Only use an original Porsche battery, with the
correct part number, as a replacement. Only
this battery meets the specific requirements of
the vehicle.
246 Minor Repairs

For information on storing the end positions for External Power Supply, Emergency h WARNING Battery acid leakage
the power windows:
f Please see the chapter “STORING END
starting with jumper cables f Do not lean over the battery due to danger of
POSITION OF THE WINDOWS AFTER If the battery is flat, the battery of another vehicle chemical burns from leaking acid.
CONNECTING THE VEHICLE BATTERY” can be used for starting or as an external power
on page 61. supply with the help of jump leads. h DANGER Battery charging and
6. Teach tires on vehicles with Tire Pressure Both batteries must be 12 V batteries. The jumping hazards
Monitoring System. capacity (Ah) of the donor battery must not be f Improper use of booster battery to start a
For information on teaching the Tire Pressure substantially less than that of the flat battery. vehicle may cause an explosion.
Monitoring System: The flat battery must be connected correctly to f Keep sources of ignition away from the
f Please see the chapter “TIRE PRESSURE the vehicle’s electrical system. battery, e.g. naked flame, burning cigarettes
MENU (TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING h WARNING or sparks due to cable contact.
f Before connecting jumper cables, it is
Jumper cable hazards
7. Store end position on vehicles with a slide/tilt A short circuit may be caused if unsuitable jumper essential to thaw out a frozen battery.
roof. cables are used or if jumper cable starting is not
For information on storing the end position for the performed properly. Such short circuits can NOTICE
slide/tilt roof: cause a fire.
f Please see the chapter “STORING END f Use only standard jumper cables with sufficient Risk of damage due to short circuit.
POSITION OF THE WINDOWS AFTER cross section and completely insulated f Never connect jumper cables directly to the
alligator clips. Follow the instructions provided battery. Always connect jumper cables to the
CONNECTING THE VEHICLE BATTERY”
by the jumper cable manufacturer. emergency starting terminals in the luggage
on page 61.
f Route the jumper cables so that they cannot compartment.
be caught by moving parts in the engine
compartment.
The jumper cables must be long enough so
that neither vehicles nor cables touch another.
f The vehicles must not touch, otherwise current
might flow as soon as the positive terminals
are connected.
f Ensure that tools or conductive jewelry (rings,
chains, watch straps) do not come into contact
with the positive jumper cable, the positive
battery post or live parts of the vehicle.
f Improper hook-up of jumper cables can ruin
the alternator.
Minor Repairs 247

5. Start the engine. h DANGER Battery explosion

An attempted start using jump leads should hazards
f Charge battery in a well ventilated area due to
not last more than 15 seconds. Then wait for
at least one minute.
hydrogen gas explosion risk.
f Never charge a frozen battery. It may explode
6. With engine running:
Disconnect the negative lead from the ground
point B first, then from the negative terminal of because of gas trapped in the ice. Allow a
the donor battery. frozen battery to thaw out first.
7. With engine running:
Disconnect the positive lead from the positive h CAUTION Eye or skin contact
terminal of the donor battery first, then from f If you get electrolyte, which is an acid, in your
the positive terminal A of the discharged eyes or on your skin, immediately rinse with
battery. cold water for several minutes.
Charging the battery Your authorized Porsche dealer will be pleased to
Automotive batteries lose their efficiency when advise you about a suitable charger.
not in use. The charge available in your battery can f Always observe the instructions provided by
be measured with a battery hydrometer. We the charger manufacturer.
f If the battery is frozen, thaw it out first before
+ = Battery positive terminal A recommend that the battery voltage be tested by
– = Ground point for external power supply/emergency
starting B your authorized Porsche dealer who has the charging it.
appropriate equipment. f When charging the battery, ensure adequate
Supplying external power/ If the car is not driven for prolonged periods, the ventilation.
Performing emergency starting with battery must be charged at least every 6 weeks. 1. Connect the charger to the emergency starting
jumper cables A discharged battery allows rapid formation of terminals.
Always observe the sequence below: sulfates, leading to premature deterioration of the Only plug into the mains and switch the
1. Remove cover in front luggage compartment. plates. charger on when it is connected up correctly.
To remove the cover: 2. Switch on the charger.
Please see the chapter “TIRE FILLING 3. After charging the battery, first switch off the
COMPRESSOR” on page 182. charger and then disconnect it.
2. Connect the positive lead (red) to the positive f Please see the chapter “PUTTING VEHICLE
terminal A of the discharged battery first, then INTO OPERATION” on page 246.
connect it to the positive terminal of the donor
battery.
3. Connect the negative lead (black) first to the
negative terminal of the donor battery, then to
the ground point B.
4. Leave the engine of the donor vehicle running
at a higher engine speed.
248 Minor Repairs

Changing Car Key Replacing bulbs

(Remote Control) Battery Bulb Chart
Bulb for Type Power
Information
f Please observe the regulations for disposing
Additional high beam, H7 55W
Bi-XenonTM/Bi-XenonTM
of batteries. with PDLS
Halogen low beam H7 55W
Car key Halogen high beam H9 65W
If the battery in the remote control becomes too
Turn signal lights, front HY 21W
weak, the message “Replace ignition key
Side marker lights WY 5W
battery” will appear on the multi-function display
in the instrument panel. Replacing Light-Emitting Diodes and
The battery should be changed in this case. Long-Life Bulbs
Daytime driving lights, front side lights, rear turn
signal lights, gas-discharge bulbs in Bi-XenonTM
headlights, tail lights, fog/reversing lights, license
Changing the battery (CR 2032, 3V) plate lights, additional brake light and interior
1. Remove the emergency key. lights are equipped with light emitting diodes and
For information on the emergency key: long-life bulbs.
f Please see the chapter “EMERGENCY KEY” The LEDs cannot be replaced individually.
on page 16. Replacement of the long-life bulbs involves a
2. Lever off the cover on the back of the key greater amount of installation work.
housing using a small screwdriver. f Have defective LEDs and long-life bulbs
3. Change the battery (check polarity). replaced at an authorized Porsche dealer.
4. Re-fit cover and press together firmly.
5. Insert the emergency key.
Minor Repairs 249

h WARNING
Electric shock Headlights
TM
Bi-Xenon headlights are under high voltage. NOTICE
f Exercise extreme care when working close to
Risk of damage to headlights due to abrasion and
the headlights.
f Switch off the lights and ignition before
excessive temperatures.
f Do not affix any coverings (e.g. “stone guards”
replacing bulbs.
or film) close to the headlights.
f Use soapy water only to clean light lenses and
NOTICE
plastic headlight lenses. In no case may
Risk of damage from bulbs with incorrect wattage. chemical cleaners or other volatile cleaning
Bulbs of a high wattage can damage the housing. fluids be used.
f To prevent scratches, do not rub with a dry or
NOTICE
merely moist cloth, tissue or insect sponges.
Risk of damage due to short circuit.

f Always switch off the relevant load when Information
changing bulbs. The headlights and taillights can mist up due to
temperature and humidity. This misting will Removing headlights
disappear after you have driven a sufficient
Information 1. Open front luggage compartment lid.
distance.
f To ensure optimum ventilation, do not cover
Bulbs must be clean and free from grease. 2. Remove the relevant toolbox.
f Never touch bulbs with your bare hands. the gap between headlight and body.
3. Open up the cover for the headlight release
Use a cloth or soft paper when replacing bulbs. mechanism.
f Always carry spare bulbs with you. 4. Place socket wrench (tool kit) on the unlocking
In certain countries, it is mandatory to carry spindle.
spare bulbs. The handle of the wrench should point
horizontally to the rear.
5. Turn wrench approx. 180° A. This unlocks the
headlight and pushes it forward slightly.
6. Turn socket wrench back until it is pointing
vertically downwards B and leave in position.
7. The headlight is now unlocked and can be
pulled forward out of the wing by lifting slightly.
8. Detach plug.
250 Minor Repairs

Installing headlights
1. Attach plug (clearly audible clicking sound).
2. Insert headlight into the guide rails and push
fully into the wing.
3. Push headlight to the rear and at the same
time turn the socket wrench until it points
horizontally to the rear C.
You should feel and hear the headlight locking
mechanism engage.
4. Close the cover for the headlight release
mechanism.
5. Attach tool box.
6. Check function of all bulbs.
Changing bulbs for low beam/high beam Changing bulb for low beam headlight
(Halogen headlights) 1. Disconnect plug B.
2. Press the fixing clip C downwards.
Information 3. Replace defective bulb.
Replacement of the low/high-beam bulbs of When doing so, ensure bulb is seated properly.
Bi-XenonTM headlights involves a greater 4. Press the fixing clip C upwards.
amount of installation work. 5. Connect the plug B.
f Have defective bulbs replaced at an authorized 6. Fit the housing cover at the tabs and install the
Porsche dealer. 4 screws A.
7. Install the headlight and check operation of
Opening the cover of the headlight housing bulb.
1. Remove the headlight. f Please see the chapter “INSTALLING
f Please see the chapter “REMOVING HEADLIGHTS” on page 251.
HEADLIGHTS” on page 250.
2. Remove the 4 screws A.
3. Fold up the housing cover and remove.
Minor Repairs 251

Changing bulb for high beam headlight 3. Pull both connector release tabs apart and pull Changing bulb for turn signal light
connector out. Opening the cover of the headlight housing
Information 4. Replace the defective bulb with bulb holder.
1. Remove the headlight.
f Please see the chapter “REMOVING
5. Insert the bulb holder E and turn it clockwise
In order to facilitate access to the bulb holder, it is
as far as it will go.
recommended to remove the round headlight HEADLIGHTS” on page 250.
6. Fit the housing cover at the tabs and install the
housing cover above the bulb holder. 2. Remove the housing cover by pulling on
f Remove the round housing cover by pulling on 4 screws A.
the tab (illustration).
7. Install the headlight and check operation of
the tab.
bulb.
1. Turn the bulb holder E anti-clockwise as far as f Please see the chapter “INSTALLING
it will go. HEADLIGHTS” on page 251.
2. Remove the bulb holder E (bayonet lock).
252 Minor Repairs

3. Remove the bulb holder A. A - Spring

Changing bulb for side marker light B - Retaining lug
4. Replace defective bulb (bayonet lock). 1. Pull the side marker light housing rearwards
5. Insert the bulb holder A into the guide and push until the retaining lug B disengages. 3. Remove the bulb holder.
it in as far as it will go. 2. Remove the side marker light housing. 4. Remove the bulb from the holder and
6. Close the housing cover. replace it.
7. Install the headlight and check operation of 5. Insert the bulb holder into the guide and push
bulb. it in as far as it will go.
f Please see the chapter “INSTALLING 6. First, insert the side marker light housing at
HEADLIGHTS” on page 251. the spring A and then pull it rearwards until the
retaining lug B engages.
7. Release the side marker light housing and
check operation of the bulb.
Minor Repairs 253

Headlight Adjustment For checking the headlight adjustment, the Floor

f Check tire pressure and adjust if necessary.
vertical position of the cutoff of the lowbeam (see The surface upon which the vehicle rests is flat
fig.) has to be projected on a vertical screen (wall) and approximately level.
in distance of 24.6 ft. (7.5 m) from the front lens
COLD TIRES (68 °F/ 20 °C)” on page 264. Screen
f Please see the chapter “REPLACING LIGHT-
of the headlamp.The correct position of the cutoff
is 2.0 in. (5 cm) at 24.6 ft. or 7.5 m (0.4°) below The screen upon which headlamp beams are
EMITTING DIODES AND LONG-LIFE BULBS” a horizontal line, x cm from ground to the center projected is perpendicular to the floor and the
on page 249. of the headlamp lens. vehicle's longitudinal axis, flat, uniformly light in
Adjustment Lateral adjustment of the headlights should be color, unobstructed, and wide and high enough to
The adjustment is made with the vehicle ready to carried out at a specialist workshop with an optical accommodate the vehicle beam patterns to be
drive and the fuel tank completely filled. adjustment unit. aimed.
The driver's seat must be loaded by a person or a The screen should be wide enough to provide at
Distance
165 lbs. (75 kg) weight and the tire pressures least 3.3 ft. (1 m) of space outboard of the
Visual aim shall be performed at not less than vehicle's headlamp spacing.
must meet the prescribed values. After being 24.6 ft. (7.5 m) (this value is a rounded down
loaded, the car must be rolled a few meters so conversion from the 25-foot distance typical of
that the suspension can settle. field aim using a screen). The 24.6 ft. (7.5 m)
distance is measured from the headlamp lens to
the viewing screen.
254 Minor Repairs

Towing on all four wheels only, provided the following

conditions are strictly met. Failure to meet these
Certain state statutes and local ordinances
conditions will result in serious and expensive
prohibit towing with a chain, rope or even a tow
damage to the PDK transmission.
bar. In addition, damage to your vehicle may result
If the vehicle's transmission or shifter is already
from improper precedures. Consult your
damaged, serious damage will result if the vehicle
authorized Porsche dealer for details.
is not towed with all four wheels off the ground.
Flat bed towing is the preferred type of towing to
be used on Porsche vehicles. Porsche cannot be held responsible for damage
incurred in cases where a vehicle has been
transported on one or both of its axles.
Information
f Always observe the laws governing towing and Towing a vehicle with PDK transmission on all
tow-starting. four wheels:
f Exercise extreme care when your vehicle is f The vehicle must not be towed if the PDK
being towed. transmission is in emergency operation mode
(“Drive emergency program”). The vehicle
h WARNING Towed vehicle hazards must be transported with a car transporter or
A - Height adjustment on a trailer.
f If a selector lever emergency release was
No power assistance is available on the towed
Height adjustment vehicle when its engine is not running. Greater
force is therefore required when braking and performed, the vehicle must not be towed.
1. Switch ignition on. The vehicle must be transported with a car
steering.
f Exercise extreme care when your vehicle is
2. Switch on low beam. transporter or on a trailer.
3. Open front luggage compartment lid.
being towed. f Move PDK selector lever to position N.
4. Remove the relevant toolbox. To properly engage selector-lever position N
5. Open up the cover A for the adjusting screw. When the engine is not running, adequate on the display and at the selector lever, the
6. Place allen key (5 mm) on adjusting screw. lubrication of the transmission is not guaranteed. engine must be started once before towing the
7. Adjust low beam in the corresponding Observe the following points to avoid damage to vehicle.
direction. the transmission. The vehicle can be towed as soon as the
Towing a vehicle with PDK transmission on all selector lever is in position N and selector-
lever position N appears on the display.
f The vehicle must always roll on all four wheels
four wheels
NOTICE when towed.

We urge that wherever possible, a car transporter The ignition must be switched on so that the
or trailer be used to transport a Porsche vehicle brake lights and turn signal lights operate.
that cannot move under its own power. This is the
safest way to transport a down vehicle.
For those instances where a car transporter or
trailer is not available, the vehicle may be towed
Minor Repairs 255

f Do not exceed a maximum speed of 30 mph Towing a vehicle with manual transmission Pulling out a vehicle stuck in snow,
(50 km/h). on all four wheels: sand, etc.
Maximum towing distance 30 miles (50 km). f Put the gearshift lever in neutral. f Always pull out the stuck vehicle with the
If towing distances are greater, the vehicle f The vehicle must always roll on all four wheels greatest care.
must be transported with a car transporter or when towed. f Do not pull out the vehicle abruptly or at an
on a trailer. The ignition must be switched on so that the angle.
Towing a vehicle with PDK transmission on brake lights and turn signal lights operate. f If possible, pull the vehicle out backwards in
one axle: Towing a vehicle with manual transmission its own tracks.
f The vehicle must not be towed if the PDK on one axle:
transmission is in emergency operation mode f Switch ignition off.
(yellow or red “Drive emergency program” f Put the gearshift lever in neutral.
warning message). The vehicle must be f Make sure that the vehicle is adequately
transported with a car transporter or on illuminated.
a trailer. f Do not exceed a maximum speed of 30 mph
f If a selector lever emergency release was (50 km/h).
performed, the vehicle must not be towed. Maximum towing distance 30 miles (50 km).
The vehicle must be transported with a car If towing distances are greater, the vehicle
transporter or on a trailer. must be transported with a car transporter or
f Move PDK selector lever to position N. on a trailer.
To properly engage selector-lever position N
on the display and at the selector lever, the
engine must be started once before towing
the vehicle.
The vehicle can be towed as soon as the
selector lever is in position N and selector-
lever position N appears on the display.
f Switch ignition off.
Make sure that the vehicle is adequately
illuminated.
f Do not exceed a maximum speed of 30 mph
(50 km/h).
Maximum towing distance 30 miles (50 km).
If towing distances are greater, the vehicle
must be transported with a car transporter or
on a trailer.
256 Minor Repairs

PDK selector lever emergency release Releasing selector lever 4. Clip in the lettering badge A again.
In the event of an electronics failure, emergency 1. Take the screwdriver from the toolbox. Towing lug
release of the selector lever must be performed 2. Carefully lever out the lettering badge A at the
The towing lug is stored in the left tool box in the
in order to move the selector lever to the front (arrow) using the screwdriver and
front luggage compartment.
“N” position. remove.
3. Insert the screwdriver vertically into the bore, NOTICE
NOTICE
f Use the towing lug only for an emergency to
press down the selector lever lock and hold
Risk of damage from the vehicle rolling away. down while pressing the release button on the
remove the vehicle off the road. The towing lug
In the case of emergency release of the PDK selector lever and move the selector lever to
is to be used only to pull the vehicle onto the
selector lever, the vehicle is not secured against the “N” position.
flat bed, tractor or towing aparatus if the
rolling away.
f Activate the electric parking brake, or prevent
vehicle will roll freely. Under no circumstances
is the vehicle to be secured using the towing
the vehicle from rolling away, e.g. using a
lug.
wheel chock if necessary prior to emergency
f Never use the towing lug to tow this or any
release.
other vehicle.
f Bear in mind the limited ground clearance of
your car on uneven surfaces,
Minor Repairs 257

Rear towing lug Front towing lug Pulling vehicle onto flat bed
Fitting the towing lug Removing the towing lug 1. Position wooden ramps at the base of the flat
1. Press the lower edge of the appropriate plastic 1. Unscrew the towing lug A. bed to reduce the angle of the pull.
cover into the bumper until the cover 2. Insert plastic cover at the lower edge of the 2. Reel in the hoist cable and check the underside
disengages. opening. of the vehicle for any interference.
2. Pull cover out of the bumper and let it hang by 3. Fold the cover up and press on its upper edge
its thread. to engage it in the bumper.
3. Screw in towing lug A as far as it will go 4. Store the towing lug in the tool box.
(left-hand thread) and tighten hand-tight.
258 Minor Repairs

Information
f Check the final inspection date on the fire
extinguisher. If the fire extinguisher is used
after its inspection interval has elapsed, it may
not work properly.
f Always read the operating instructions on the
fire extinguisher.
f Observe the fire extinguisher manufacturer’s
safety instructions on the label at the fire
extinguisher handle.
f The fire extinguisher should be checked to
ensure correct operation by a specialist
workshop every 1-2 years.
f Have the fire extinguisher refilled after use.
Tying down vehicle on flat bed Fire extinguisher

1. Carefully feed towing straps through the
In cars with a fire extinguisher, the extinguisher is
opening in the rear wheels.
located under the passenger seat.
f To remove the fire extinguisher in case of an
Make sure metal parts of straps do not
damage rim.
emergency, hold the extinguisher with one
Make sure the strap is flat over the rim bead.
hand and press the button PRESS on the fire
Make sure brake backing plate is not
extinguisher holder with the other hand
damaged.
(arrow).
2. Secure straps to rear of flat bed.
3. Reel in hoist cable only far enough to tension
tie-down straps.
Transporting the vehicle on car trains,
ferries and car transporters
f Tie the vehicle down only at its wheels.
f Deactivate interior surveillance and the
inclination sensor.
f Please see the chapter “ALARM SYSTEM AND
PASSENGER COMPARTMENT MONITORING”
on page 196.
Minor Repairs 259

Tire Pressure and Technical Data

Vehicle Identification Data............................261
Engine Data................................................262
Wheels, Tires..............................................263
Tire Pressure for Cold Tires (68 °F/ 20 °C)...264
Weights......................................................266
Filling Capacities.........................................267
Driving Performance ...................................268
Dimensions ................................................268
260 Tire Pressure and Technical Data

Vehicle identification number Identification plate Tire pressure plate
Vehicle Identification Data Safety compliance sticker Tire pressure plate

When ordering spare parts or making inquiries, The safety compliance sticker is your assurance The plate is attached to the door aperture area on
please always quote the vehicle identification that your new Porsche complies with all applicable the driver’s side.
number. Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards which
were in effect at the time the vehicle was
Vehicle data carrier
Vehicle identification number manufactured. You will find the vehicle data carrier in the
You will find the vehicle identification number The sticker also shows the month and year of “Maintenance” booklet.
behind the windshield at the bottom left. production and the vehicle identification number of It contains all important data about your vehicle.
your car (perforations) as well as the Gross This data carrier cannot be re-ordered if it is lost
Vehicle Weight Rating and the Gross Axle Weight or damaged.
Rating.
Tire Pressure and Technical Data 261

Engine Data
Boxster Boxster S Boxster GTS
Number of cylinders 6 6 6
Displacement 165.1 cu. in. (2,706 cm3) 209.7 cu. in. (3,436 cm3) 209.7 cu. in. (3,436 cm3)
Max. engine output
195 kW (265 hp) 232 kW (315 hp) 243 kW (330 hp)
as per 80/1269/EEC
At engine speed 6,700 rpm 6,700 rpm 6,700 rpm
Max. torque
280 Nm (207 ftlb.) 360 Nm (266 ftlb.) 370 Nm (273 ftlb.)
as per 80/1269/EEC
At engine speed 4,500 to 6,500 rpm 4,500 to 5,800 rpm 4,500...5,800 rpm
Maximum permitted engine speed 7,800 rpm 7,800 rpm 7,800 rpm

Wheels, Tires
f Approval of tire and wheel sizes is granted based on extensive testing. Your Porsche dealer will be pleased to advise you about the current approval status.
By fitting tires that have been approved by Porsche, you can be sure that you have the best possible tires for your Porsche.
The load capacity coefficient (e.g. “92”) and maximum speed code letter (e.g. “Y”) for permitted top speed are minimum requirements.
When fitting new tires or changing tires: Please see chapter “TIRES AND WHEELS” on page 224.
f The wheels marked with 2) may be used with 5 mm spacers.
f Snow chain clearance can only be guaranteed with the tires marked 1) without spacers. Snow chains can only be fitted on the rear wheels. Observe state-
or province-specific laws regarding maximum speeds with fitted snow chains. Only use Porsche approved fine-link cross-type or edge chains.
Boxster Boxster S Boxster GTS

8J x18, RO 57 / 8J x18, RO 57 / 8J x18, RO 57 /
18-inch wheel FA / RA
9J x18 , RO 47 9J x18, RO 47 9J x18, RO 47
235/45 ZR 18 94Y2) /
Summer tires FA / RA --- ---
265/45 ZR 18 101Y2)
235/45 R 18 94V / 235/45 R 18 94V / 235/45 R 18 94V /
Snow tires FA / RA
265/45 R 18 101V1) 265/45 R 18 101V1) 265/45 R 18 101V1)
8J x19, RO 57 / 8J x19, RO 57 / 8J x19, RO 57 /

9,5J x19, RO 45 9,5J x19, RO 45 9,5J x19, RO 45
235/40 ZR 19 (92Y) / 235/40 ZR 19 (92Y) / 235/40 ZR 19 (92Y) /
Summer tires FA / RA
265/40 ZR 19 (98Y) 265/40 ZR 19 (98Y) 265/40 ZR 19 (98Y)
235/40 R 19 92V / 235/40 R 19 92V / 235/40 R 19 92V /
Snow tires FA / RA
265/40 R 19 98V 265/40 R 19 98V 265/40 R 19 98V
8J x20, RO 57 / 8J x20, RO 57 / 8J x20, RO 57 /

20-inch wheel FA / RA or
9,5J x20, RO 45 9,5J x20, RO 45 9,5J x20, RO 45
8,5J x20, RO 57 / 8,5J x20, RO 57 / 8,5J x20, RO 57 /
10J x20, RO 50 10J x20, RO 50 10J x20, RO 50
235/35 ZR 20 (88Y) / 235/35 ZR 20 (88Y) / 235/35 ZR 20 (88Y) /
Summer tires FA / RA
265/35 ZR 20 (95Y) 265/35 ZR 20 (95Y) 265/35 ZR 20 (95Y)
h DANGER Improper tire size
FA = front axle, RA = rear axle
Installation of sizes not authorized by Porsche may impair driving stability and
could result in loss of control of the vehicle.
f Before mounting new tires check with your authorized Porsche dealer for a
current list of approved tires.

Tire Pressure for Cold Tires (68 °F/ 20 °C)

The standard and comfort tire pressure applies only to the tire makes and types approved by Porsche.
f Please see chapter “TIRE PRESSURE MENU (TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM, TPMS)” on page 93.
Standard tire pressure for summer tires
18-inch wheels 19-inch wheels 20-inch wheels

FA RA FA RA FA RA
29 psi/ 29 psi/ 29 psi/ 30 psi/ 33 psi/ 33 psi/
Boxster 2.0 bar/ 2.0 bar/ 2.0 bar/ 2.1 bar/ 2.3 bar/ 2.3 bar/
200 kPa 200 kPa 200 kPa 210 kPa 230 kPa 230 kPa
29 psi/ 30 psi/ 33 psi/ 33 psi/
Boxster S, Boxster GTS --- --- 2.0 bar/ 2.1 bar/ 2.3 bar/ 2.3 bar/
200 kPa 210 kPa 230 kPa 230 kPa
Standard tire pressure for snow tires
18-inch wheels 19-inch wheels

FA RA FA RA
32 psi/ 32 psi/ 32 psi/ 32 psi/
Boxster 2.2 bar/ 2.2 bar/ 2.2 bar/ 2.2 bar/
220 kPa 220 kPa 220 kPa 220 kPa
32 psi/ 32 psi/ 32 psi/ 32 psi/
Boxster S, Boxster GTS 2.2 bar/ 2.2 bar/ 2.2 bar/ 2.2 bar/
220 kPa 220 kPa 220 kPa 220 kPa

Comfort tire pressure for summer tires up to 165 mph (270 km/h)
(only for vehicles with 20-inch wheels, Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) and “Comfort press.” selection option)
Preconditions for using the comfort tire h
Low tire pressure
2. Select “Comfort press.” as the tire pressure WARNING
pressure type and confirm.
– 20-inch wheels Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) is
– The vehicle is equipped with Tire Pressure Comfort pressure may only be set in the tire if the equipment-dependent, the “Comfort press.”
Monitoring System (TPMS) and “TPMS” main menu and the “Comfort press.” selection is country-dependent and is not available
– the “Comfort pressure” menu is available in selection field are available on the multi-function in all country versions.
TPMS. display. Driving at high speed and low tire pressure
destroys the tires.
f Only set comfort tire pressure on vehicles with
To set the tires to comfort pressure:
Procedure
3. Select “TPMS” in the main menu of the multi- Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) and
For information on using the multi-function display,
function display and confirm. “Comfort pressure” selection.
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) and the
tire pressure type: 4. Select the “Fill info” menu and confirm.
f Please see chapter “OPERATING THE MULTI-
FUNCTION DISPLAY ON THE INSTRUMENT
PANEL” on page 83. Information
f Please see chapter “TIRE PRESSURE MENU Use only the pressure differences shown in the
(TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM, “Fill info” display when correcting the tire
TPMS)” on page 93. pressure.
5. Read the tire pressures to be corrected in the

1. On the multi-function display, select the display and set in the tire.
“TPMS” main menu and confirm.
20-inch wheels
FA RA
30 psi/ 30 psi/
Boxster, Boxster S, Boxster GTS 2.1 bar/ 2.1 bar/
210 kPa 210 kPa

Weights
Boxster Boxster Boxster S Boxster S
Manual transmission PDK transmission Manual transmission PDK transmission
Empty weight (depending on equipment) 2932 lbs. to 3075 lbs. 2998 lbs. to 3142 lbs. 2954 lbs. to 3097 lbs. 3020 lbs. to 3164 lbs.
per DIN 70020 (1,330 kg to 1,395 kg) (1,360 kg to 1,425 kg) (1,340 kg to 1,405 kg) (1,370 kg to 1,435 kg)
Empty weight (depending on equipment) 3097 lbs. to 3240 lbs. 3163 lbs. to 3306 lbs. 3119 lbs. to 3262 lbs. 3185 lbs. to 3328 lbs.
per 70/156/EEC 1) (1,405 kg to 1,470 kg) (1,435 kg to 1,500 kg) (1,415 kg to 1,480 kg) (1,445 kg to 1,510 kg)
Maximum axle load, front 2) 1720 lbs. (780 kg) 1720 lbs. (780 kg) 1731 lbs. (785 kg) 1731 lbs. (785 kg)
Maximum axle load, rear 2) 1962 lbs. (890 kg) 2050 lbs. (930 kg) 1962 lbs. (890 kg) 2050 lbs. (930 kg)
Maximum Gross vehicle weight 2) 3627 lbs. (1,645 kg) 3693 lbs. (1,675 kg) 3649 lbs. (1,655 kg) 3715 lbs. (1,685 kg)
Boxster GTS Boxster GTS

Manual transmission PDK transmission
Empty weight (depending on equipment) 2965 lbs. to 3097 lbs. 3031 lbs. to 3163 lbs.
per DIN 70020 (1,345 kg to 1,405 kg) (1,375 kg to 1,435 kg)
Empty weight (depending on equipment) 3130 lbs. to 3262 lbs. 3196 lbs. to 3328 lbs.
per 70/156/EEC 1) (1,420 kg to 1,480 kg) (1,450 kg to 1,510 kg)
Maximum axle load, front 2) 1731 lbs. (785 kg) 1731 lbs. (785 kg)
Maximum axle load, rear 2) 1962 lbs. (890 kg) 2050 lbs. (930 kg)
Maximum Gross vehicle weight 2) 3649 lbs. (1,655 kg) 3715 lbs. (1,685 kg)
1) Curbweight includes 165 lbs. (75 kg) driver and baggage share.
2) The
maximum vehicle weight and maximum axle loads must not be exceeded.
Notice: If additional accessories are installed, the maximum load will be correspondingly less.

Filling Capacities
Only use fluids and fuels approved by Porsche. Your authorized Porsche dealer will be pleased to advise you.
Engine oil change quantity with oil filter Approx. 1.98 US gallons (7.5 liters)
Fuel tank Approx. 16.91 US gallons (64 liters), including approx. 2.64 US gallons (10 liters) reserve
The engine is designed to provide optimum performance and fuel consumption if unleaded premium
fuel with 98 RON/88 MON (93 CLC or AKI) is used.
If unleaded fuels with octane numbers of less than 98 RON/88 MON (93 CLC or AKI) are used,
Fuel octane rating
the engine’s “Electronic Octane™ knock control” automatically adapts the ignition timing.
Porsche recommends that you use fuel with at least 95 RON/85 MON (90 CLC or AKI) in your
vehicle.
Windshield/headlight washer system Approx. 1.32 US gallons (6 liters)

Driving Performance
The specifications refer to a vehicle with DIN curb weight without performance-reducing additional equipment (e.g. special tires).
Acceleration 0 to 100 km/h (62

mph)
Maximum speed
(values in brackets relate to
“Sport Plus” mode)
Boxster with manual transmission 164 mph (264 km/h) 5.8 seconds
Boxster with PDK transmission 163 mph (262 km/h) 5.7 (5.5) seconds
Boxster S with manual transmission 173 mph (279 km/h) 5.1 seconds
Boxster S with PDK transmission 172 mph (277 km/h) 5.0 (4.8) seconds
Boxster GTS with manual transmission 175 mph (281 km/h) 5.0 seconds
Boxster GTS with PDK transmission 174 mph (279 km/h) 4.9 (4.7) seconds
Dimensions
Boxster, Boxster S Boxster GTS
Length 172.2 in. (4,374 mm) 173.4 in. (4,404 mm)
Width without exterior mirrors 70.9 in. (1,801 mm) 70.9 in. (1,801 mm)
Width with exterior mirrors 77.9 in. (1,978 mm) 77.9 in. (1,978 mm)
Height at DIN curb weight 50.5 in. (1,282 mm) 50.1 in. (1,273 mm)
Wheelbase 97.4 in. (2,475 mm) 97.4 in. (2,475 mm)
Ground clearance at maximum 3.7–4.4 in. (94 - 111 mm) 3.8–4.4 in. (96 mm–111 mm)
gross weight depending on type of suspension depending on type of suspension
Turning circle 36 ft. (11 m) 36 ft. (11 m)

Index
A Installation location ............................................ 36 Armrest
Passenger airbag warning light ........................... 39 Opening oddments tray .................................... 178
A/C button Air-conditioning compressor Ashtray
Air-conditioning system .................................50, 54 Information on air-conditioning compressor.... 50, 54 Emptying......................................................... 179
A/C MAX button Air-conditioning system Opening .......................................................... 179
Air-conditioning system .................................51, 55 Automatic load switch-off ............................. 50, 54 ASR (Anti-slip control)
ABD (automatic brake differential) Defrosting windshield ......................................... 51 Functional description....................................... 167
Functional description.......................................167 Extended ventilation panel .................................. 57 Assigning diamond button (◊)....................................... 114
ABS (Anti-lock Brake System) Information on air-conditioning compressor.... 50, 54 Assistance systems
Functional description.......................................170 Setting air distribution .................................. 53, 57 Active Safe (PAS) ............................................. 115
ACC Setting air quantity............................................. 57 Assistance when driving uphill
Adaptive cruise control .....................................142 Setting automatic air-recirculation mode .............. 56 Functional description....................................... 168
Acoustic signals ............................................................82 Setting temperature..................................... 52, 56 Audio
Active Safe (PAS) Switching A/C MAX mode on/off................... 51, 55 Tips ................................................................ 153
Settings in multi-purpose display........................115 Switching A/C mode on/off .......................... 50, 54 Audio interface, installation position .............................. 155
Adapting fuel gauge.....................................................107 Switching air-conditioning compressor on/off. 50, 54 AUTO (light switch) ........................................................ 68
Adaptive cruise control Switching air-recirculation mode on and off .... 52, 56 Driving light assistant ......................................... 68
Display principle...............................................145 SYNC (MONO) mode .......................................... 55 Auto Start Stop function
Exceptions.......................................................149 Temperature sensor........................................... 54 Display............................................................ 136
Interrupting/resuming control ............................149 Air-recirculation button Exceptions ...................................................... 135
Operating principle ...........................................144 Air-conditioning system ................................ 52, 56 Operating principle........................................... 135
Operating states ..............................................146 Alarm button................................................................. 15 Preconditions................................................... 135
Porsche Active Safe .........................................151 Alarm system Starting engine automatically ............................ 135
Radar sensor ...................................................143 Avoiding false alarms ....................................... 197 Stopping engine automatically........................... 135
Setting the desired distance..............................147 Functional description ...................................... 196 Switching on and off................................. 136, 160
Setting/changing desired speed ........................146 Persons/animals remaining in the locked vehicle 196 Automatic brake differential (ABD)
Switching on/off...............................................146 Switching off ................................................... 196 Functional description....................................... 167
Adaptive cruise control (ACC) .......................................142 Switching off interior surveillance and inclination Automatic Coming Home lights, courtesy lighting
Functional description.......................................142 sensor ............................................................ 196 Entry function .................................................... 69
Adaptive light system, driving light assistant ....................68 Switching on ................................................... 196 Welcome Home function ..................................... 69
Adhesive foils, care instructions....................................215 Alcantara®, care instructions ....................................... 217 Automatic driving light assistant
Adjusting seat position ...................................................30 Alloy wheels High Beam Assistant .......................................... 70
Aftermarket Alarms......................................................154 Care instructions ............................................. 215 Automatic speed control (cruise control)
Air cleaner, maintenance instructions ............................224 Inscription ....................................................... 233 Accelerating .................................................... 141
Air conditioning Alternator Decelerating .................................................... 141
Manual air conditioning .......................................50 Vehicle electrical system warning........................ 81 Functional description....................................... 141
Setting air quantity .............................................52 Aluminum rims Interrupting operation ....................................... 142
Air distribution .........................................................53, 57 Care instructions ............................................. 215 Storing speed.................................................. 141
Air vents Inscription ....................................................... 233 Switching off ................................................... 142
Adjusting ...........................................................58 Ambient lighting ............................................................ 73 Switching on.................................................... 141
Opening/closing.................................................58 Antifreeze Automatic transmission................................................ 157
Airbag in coolant........................................................ 222 AUX interface, installation position ................................ 155
Airbag warning light on the tachometer ................39 in washer fluid ................................................. 204
Automatic deactivation of the passenger airbag....38 Anti-lock brake system (ABS)
Care instructions ..............................................217 Functional description ...................................... 170
Disposal ............................................................37 Anti-slip control (ASR)
Function ............................................................37 Functional description ...................................... 167
Functional description.........................................36
Index 269
B Bulbs Windows..........................................................214
Overview......................................................... 249 Carpet, care instructions..............................................217
Baby seat Catalytic converter ......................................................206
Prescribed installation direction (depending on Emission control (Check Engine)..........................82
weight of child) ..................................................40 C Center armrest
Battery Cabriolet Opening oddments tray ....................................178
Care ...............................................................246 Closing convertible top ...................................... 62 Central locking ..............................................................21
Changing in car key..........................................249 Emergency operation of convertible top .............. 64 Driver’s door emergency operation,
Charging .........................................................248 Opening convertible top ..................................... 61 Passenger’s door emergency operation ...............27
Emergency starting with jumper cables..............247 Car care Locking vehicle door with car key
General information ..........................................245 Airbags........................................................... 217 (remote control) .................................................20
Installation position...........................................245 Alcantara® ...................................................... 217 Locking vehicle door with Porsche Entry & Drive ..20
Procedure after connection...............................246 Alloy wheels .................................................... 215 Opening and locking vehicle door from inside .......21
Replacing ........................................................246 Fabric linings................................................... 217 Unlocking vehicle door with car key
Vehicle electrical system warning ........................81 Headlights, plastic components, adhesive foils .. 215 (remote control) .................................................19
Winter driving ..................................................246 Leather........................................................... 216 Unlocking vehicle door with
Before driving off.............................................................4 Leather care for seats with seat ventilation ........ 217 Porsche Entry & Drive ........................................19
Belts Paint............................................................... 214 Central locking system
Care instructions..............................................217 Safety-belts..................................................... 217 Functional description.........................................16
Fastening ..........................................................35 Seals .............................................................. 216 Centre console..............................................................11
Opening belt buckle............................................35 Underbody protection ...................................... 215 Changing button assignment on
Safety-belt pretensioners, functional description ...34 Use of high-pressure cleaning equipment........... 212 multi-function steering wheel ........................................114
Warning light on the tachometer..........................34 Washing the vehicle, instructions ...................... 212 Changing car key (remote control) battery .....................249
Brake booster .............................................................139 Wheel attachment faces ................................... 237 Changing wheels .........................................................234
Brake disks.....................................................................2 Wheel bolts ..................................................... 237 Chassis control systems
Brake fluid ......................................................................2 Windows ......................................................... 214 Overview (PSM, PASM, PTV) ..............................165
Changing.........................................................223 Car key (remote control) Chassis number, position .............................................261
Warning light on speedometer...........................223 Changing battery ............................................. 249 Chassis setup
Brake pads .....................................................................2 Locking vehicle door.......................................... 20 Functional description.......................................171
Breaking in new brake pads ..................................5 Unlocking vehicle door ....................................... 19 Selecting .........................................................171
Warning message, brakes ................................139 Car Telephone ............................................................ 154 Check Engine (emission control)
Brake pedal ................................................................139 Care instructions Functional description.........................................82
Brake wear Airbags........................................................... 217 Warning light......................................................82
Warning message ............................................139 Alcantara® ...................................................... 217 Checking pressure.......................................................236
Brakes Alloy wheels .................................................... 215 Child restraint equipment
Applying/releasing parking brake ......................137 Car washing .................................................... 212 Prescribed installation direction...........................40
Brake pad warning message.............................139 Carpet ............................................................ 217 Child seat
Brake pedal .....................................................139 Fabric linings................................................... 217 Prescribed installation direction...........................40
Brake wear warning message ...........................139 Headlights, plastic components, adhesive foils .. 215 Prescribed installation direction
Break in new brake pads ......................................5 Leather........................................................... 216 (depending on weight of child).............................40
Footbrake........................................................138 Leather care for seats with seat ventilation ........ 217 Chrono .......................................................................100
Test stand ...............................................201, 221 Mats............................................................... 217 Cigarette lighter ..........................................................180
Break in hints ..................................................................5 Paint............................................................... 214 Closing .........................................................................23
Breaking in Radar sensor .................................................. 215 Locking vehicle door from inside .........................21
Engine.................................................................5 Reversing camera............................................ 215 Persons/animals remaining in the vehicle .............20
Engine oil and fuel consumption during Safety-belts..................................................... 217 Vehicle door with car key (remote control)............20
break-in period.....................................................5 Seals .............................................................. 216 Vehicle door with Porsche Entry & Drive (keyless) .20
Hints ...................................................................5 Ultrasound sensors, ParkAssist ........................ 215 Closing luggage compartment lids..................................23
New brake pads and brake disks...........................5 Underbody protection ...................................... 215 Clutch
New tires.............................................................5 Use of high-pressure cleaning equipment........... 212 Manual transmission.........................................156
Brief overview Wheel attachment faces ................................... 237
Opening and locking the vehicle from outside .......17 Wheel bolts ..................................................... 237
270 Index
Coasting D Dynamic cornering light .................................................69

Coasting mode ........................................136, 160 Dynamic Engine Mounting (PADM) .................................172
Cockpit...........................................................................8 Data carrier for vehicle data......................................... 261
Adjusting lighting................................................71 Daytime driving lights .................................................... 68
Cooling system, temperature gauge ..................105 Defrosting windshield .................................................... 51 E
Engine oil temperature gauge............................106 Air-conditioning system ...................................... 51 Electric parking brake
Fuel gauge ........................................................81 Diagnostic socket ............................................... 132, 241 Automatic parking brake release upon driving off 137
Odometer ..........................................................80 Digital speedometer ...................................................... 80 Emergency braking function ..............................137
Speedometer.....................................................80 Dimensions................................................................. 268 Operating ........................................................137
Tachometer .......................................................80 Dimming Releasing ........................................................137
Warning and indicator lights, overview..................78 Adjusting brightness of instrument lighting ........... 71 Testing on brake test stand.......................201, 221
Comfort Entry function ...................................................32 Adjusting brightness of interior lighting ................ 73 Warning light....................................................137
Comfort memory .........................................................129 Direction indicator, stalk ................................................ 71 Electrical System
Comfort pressure Displacement, Technical data ....................................... 262 Emergency unlocking, front luggage
Selecting ...........................................................96 Door compartment lid...............................................244
Speed warning ...................................................96 De-icing door lock............................................ 212 Emergency flasher.........................................................72
Comfort settings Locking if persons/animals are remaining in Emergency key........................................................16, 27
Storing on memory buttons...............................129 vehicle .............................................................. 20 Emergency operation
Storing on the vehicle key .................................129 Locking with car key (remote control) .................. 20 Filler flap .........................................................209
Comfort tire pressure Locking with Porsche Entry & Drive (keyless) ....... 20 of ignition key/control unit in ignition lock.............26
Speed warning ...................................................96 Malfunctions when opening and closing ............... 24 of luggage compartment lid ................................24
Technical data..................................................265 Opening and locking from inside ......................... 21 of tailgate ..........................................................24
Compressor Unlocking with car key (remote control) ............... 19 Emergency release
Tire pressure ...................................................182 Unlocking with Porsche Entry & Drive (keyless) .... 19 Front luggage compartment lid..........................244
Control systems Door emergency locking................................................ 27 Emergency starting for flat battery................................247
Overview (PSM, PASM, PTV) ..............................165 Door locking, automatic................................................. 20 Emergency starting with jumper cables .........................247
Convertible top Door opening in an emergency situation.......................... 20 Emission control (Check Engine)
Care................................................................213 Doors Functional description.........................................82
Emergency operation .........................................62 Cabriolet windows.............................................. 61 Engine
Locking .............................................................62 Drinks holder .............................................................. 178 Break in hints .......................................................5
Opening.............................................................61 Drive Checking oil level .............................................202
Coolant The vehicle cannot be unlocked .......................... 24 Cooling system ........................................105, 106
Checking level..................................................222 Drive-Off Assistant....................................................... 168 Oil-level gauge....................................................88
Topping up.......................................................222 Driver memory package .............................................. 129 Starting ...........................................................134
Cooling system Driver’s door emergency locking .................................... 27 Starting engine automatically
Warning on multi-function display .......................106 Driving (Auto Start Stop function)
Cornering light In Sport mode ..................................................... 2 Starting manually (Auto Start Stop function)........135
Dynamic ............................................................69 On the race circuit ............................................... 2 Stopping .........................................................134
Countersteering assistance ..........................................167 Driving light assistant Stopping automatically (Auto Start Stop function)135
Courtesy lighting, Entry function .....................................69 Daytime driving lights......................................... 68 Technical data..................................................262
Crankcase ventilation ...................................................206 Dynamic cornering light...................................... 69 Topping up oil ..................................................203
Cruise control Low beam ......................................................... 68 Engine drag torque control (MSR)
Accelerating ....................................................141 Switching on ..................................................... 68 Functional description.......................................167
Decelerating ....................................................141 Driving off Engine oil....................................................................202
Functional description.......................................141 Assistance when driving uphill........................... 168 Change quantity ...............................................267
Interrupting operation .......................................142 Automatic parking brake release upon driving off 137 Checking level..................................................202
Storing speed ..................................................141 Launch Control ................................................ 161 Consumption ...................................................262
Switching off....................................................142 Driving performance, Technical data ............................. 268 Engine oil pressure...........................................116
Switching on ....................................................141 DVD Filler opening ...................................................204
Cupholder ...................................................................178 Installation location .......................................... 155 General information ..................................202, 203
Navigation....................................................... 155 Oil-level warning on the multi-function display ......202
Player ............................................................. 155 Pressure gauge................................................106
Index 271
Temperature gauge ..........................................106 Fluids and fuels H

Entry & Drive Coolant........................................................... 267
Locking vehicle door with Porsche Entry & Drive ..20 Engine oil........................................................ 267 Handbrake (electric parking brake)
Switching off interior surveillance with Fuel ................................................................ 267 Operating ........................................................137
Porsche Entry & Drive ......................................197 Washer fluid .................................................... 267 Releasing ........................................................137
Unlocking vehicle door with Folding the seat backrest forward .................................. 32 Head restraints .............................................................30
Porsche Entry & Drive ........................................19 Footbrake Headlights
Entry function, courtesy lighting when Safety notes.................................................... 138 Adjusting .........................................................254
entering the vehicle .......................................................69 Front luggage compartment lid Care instructions..............................................215
Ergonomic settings Emergency release .......................................... 244 Installing..........................................................251
Storing on memory buttons ..............................129 Fuel Notes..............................................................250
Storing on the vehicle key.................................129 Economy ........................................................ 207 Operating washer system ...................................76
Error messages Evaporation control.......................................... 211 Removing ........................................................250
Overview .........................................................116 Fuel can.......................................................... 210 Heated rear window
Exhaust pipes .................................................................3 Fuel gauge ........................................................ 81 Switching on/off ................................................58
Exhaust system Fuel reserve warning.................................... 81, 85 High Beam Assistant......................................................70
Sport ..............................................................174 Fuels containing ethanol ................................... 210 Activating/deactivating .....................................108
Exterior mirror Octane rating .................................................. 208 High-beam headlight ......................................................71
Adjusting ...........................................................43 Portable fuel containers ....................................... 3 Stalk .................................................................71
Adjusting as parking aid......................................44 Quality ............................................................ 208 High-pressure cleaning equipment
Folding in ..........................................................43 Recommendation............................................. 210 Instructions for use ..........................................212
Storing settings (memory) ..................................44 Refueling......................................................... 208 Hillholder (Drive-off Assistant)
Exterior mirror heating Tank capacity .................................................. 267 Functional description.......................................168
Switching on/off ................................................58 Fuel can ..................................................................... 210 HOLD function
External audio source, interface ...................................155 Fuel container............................................................. 210 Functional description.......................................168
Fuel containers, portable ................................................. 3 HomeLink (garage door opener)
Fuel gauge ................................................................... 81 Deleting programmed signals............................191
F Fuel level indicator Functional description.......................................190
Fabric linings (care instructions)....................................217 Fuel gauge ........................................................ 81 Operating ........................................................191
Fault reporting Fuse, changing electric fuses....................................... 241 Programming signal (changeable code system) ..192
Overview .........................................................116 Programming signal (fixed code system)............192
Faults Hot exhaust pipes............................................................3
Emergency Operation of Convertible Top .............64 G
Emergency operation of ignition key/ Garage door opener I
control unit in ignition lock ..................................26 Deleting programmed signals ........................... 191
Emergency operation of powerlift tailgate ............24 Functional description ...................................... 190 Identification number, position ......................................261
Emergency operation of the filler flap.................209 Operating........................................................ 191 Ignition lock
ParkAssist .......................................................189 Programming signal (changeable code system).. 192 Emergency operation of the key ..........................26
Power windows..................................................61 Programming signal (fixed code system) ........... 192 Functional description.......................................132
When opening and closing ..................................24 Gear display Removing ignition key, PDK transmission ...........159
Filler flap, emergency operation....................................209 Manual transmission ........................................ 157 Immobilizer
Filling capacities PDK transmission/manual transmission ............... 81 Functional description.......................................197
Coolant ...........................................................267 Gear shift assist.......................................................... 102 Switching on/off ..............................................197
Engine oil ........................................................267 G-forces display .......................................................... 103 Inclination sensor
Fuel ................................................................267 Glove box Function indication ...........................................197
Overview of fluids and fuels...............................267 Locking .......................................................... 177 Switching off with button in door handle
Washer fluid.....................................................267 Opening .......................................................... 177 (Porsche Entry & Drive) ....................................197
Filter Ground clearance............................................................ 3 Switching off with vehicle key (remote control)....196
Air cleaner, maintenance instructions.................224 Information messages
Particle filter, maintenance instructions ..............224 Overview .........................................................116
Fire extinguisher, storage location ................................259 Instrument cluster
Floor mats, care instructions ........................................217 Adjusting lighting................................................71
272 Index
Cooling system, temperature gauge ..................105 L Checking the Coolant Level and Adding Coolant..222
Engine oil temperature gauge............................106 Notes on maintenance ..............................199, 220
Fuel gauge ........................................................81 LATCH system Topping up engine oil........................................203
Odometer ..........................................................80 Prescribed installation direction of child seat Malfunctions
Speedometer.....................................................80 (depending on weight of child) ............................ 40 Emergency Operation of Convertible Top..............64
Tachometer .......................................................80 Lateral acceleration forces Emergency operation of ignition key in
Warning and indicator lights, overview..................78 Display............................................................ 103 ignition lock .......................................................26
Instrument lighting .........................................................71 Launch Control ........................................................... 161 Emergency operation of luggage
Instrument panel..............................................................9 Leather, care instructions ............................................ 216 compartment lid.................................................24
Adjusting lighting................................................71 Seats with seat ventilation ................................ 217 Emergency operation of tailgate ..........................24
Cooling system, temperature gauge ..................105 Lids ParkAssist .......................................................189
Engine oil temperature gauge............................106 Emergency unlocking, front luggage Power windows ..................................................61
Fuel gauge ........................................................81 compartment lid .............................................. 244 Storing end position of the windows ....................61
Odometer ..........................................................80 Light When opening and closing ..................................24
Speedometer.....................................................80 Headlight flasher................................................ 71 Manual air conditioning...................................................50
Tachometer .......................................................80 Switching on courtesy lighting when entering the Maximum permitted engine speed
Warning and indicator lights, overview..................78 vehicle .............................................................. 69 Manual transmission .........................................157
Interior lighting Switching on Welcome Home function ................. 69 Memory ................................................................32, 129
Ambient lighting .................................................73 Light switch Minor repairs
Interior lights .....................................................73 AUTO function ................................................... 68 In the event of a flat tire ....................................238
Orientation lighting .............................................73 Overview........................................................... 68 Mirrors
Interior lights.................................................................73 Lights Adjusting exterior mirrors....................................43
Interior mirror Bulb chart ....................................................... 249 Adjusting exterior mirrors as parking aid ......44, 190
Adjusting ...........................................................44 Care instructions ............................................. 215 Exterior mirror heating........................................58
Switching automatic anti-dazzle function on/off.....44 Replacing bulbs ............................................... 249 Folding in exterior mirrors ...................................43
Interior surveillance......................................................197 Switching interior lights on/off automatically ........ 73 Storing exterior mirror settings (memory).............44
Switching off with button in door handle Switching on when entering the vehicle................ 69 Switching automatic anti-dazzle function on and
(Porsche Entry & Drive).....................................197 Switching on when leaving the vehicle ................. 69 off.....................................................................44
Switching off with vehicle key (remote control)....196 Loading information..................................................... 184 Vanity mirror ......................................................48
iPod interface, installation position ................................155 Locking Motion sensor (interior surveillance)
Locking vehicle door from inside......................... 21 Switching off with button in door handle
Locking vehicle door with car key (Porsche Entry & Drive).....................................197
J (remote control)................................................. 20 Switching off with vehicle key (remote control)....196
Jump-lead starting, external power supply .....................247 Locking vehicle door with Porsche Entry & Drive .. 20 Multi-function display
Persons/animals remaining in the vehicle............. 20 Activating functions, opening menus and
Storing personal settings on the key ................. 129
K Vehicle door with car key (remote control) ........... 20
viewing options ..................................................85
Key Browsing through long lists .................................85
Vehicle door with Porsche Entry & Drive Checking oil level ...............................................88
Changing battery..............................................249 (keyless) ........................................................... 20
Emergency operation, ignition lock ......................26 Display areas .....................................................84
Longitudinal acceleration forces Menu overview ...................................................86
Locking vehicle door ..........................................20 Display............................................................ 103
Removing emergency key .............................16, 27 Operating navigation system ...............................91
Luggage compartment .................................................. 28 Operating principle .............................................83
Replacement keys ..............................................15 Opening ............................................................ 23
Storing and retrieving personal settings .............129 Operating with multi-function steering wheel .........84
Overview................................................. 182, 184 Operating with steering wheel lever .....................83
Unlocking vehicle door........................................19
Keys.............................................................................15 Retrieving vehicle information..............................87
Kickdown M Selecting a radio station .....................................89
Porsche Doppelkupplung ..................................161 Maintenance work Sport Chrono ...................................................101
Adding washer fluid.......................................... 204 Tire Pressure Monitoring System .........................93
Changing Air Cleaner ....................................... 224 Tire pressure warnings .......................................98
Changing Particle Filter .................................... 224 Trip information..................................................92
Checking engine oil level .................................. 202 Using the phone .................................................90
Index 273
Warning messages...........................................116 Operating in other countries ........................................ 207 PCCB (Porsche Ceramic Composite Brake)
Multi-function steering wheel Orientation lighting ........................................................ 73 General information ..............................................3
Assigning diamond button (◊) ...........................114 Oxygen sensor ........................................................... 206 PCM (Porsche Communication Management) .................155
Functional description.........................................47 PDK
Multif. key..........................................................84 P Coasting mode ................................................160
Operating principle.............................................84 PDK selector lever
Telephone function .............................................47 PADM, Dynamic Engine Mounting ................................. 172 Emergency release ..........................................257
Paint PDK selector lever emergency release ..........................257
Care instructions ............................................. 214 PDK transmission ................................................157, 158
N Polishing ......................................................... 214 Faults..............................................................159
Navigation system .......................................................155 Preserving ...................................................... 214 Kickdown ........................................................161
Using via multi-function display ............................91 Removing spots and stains............................... 214 Selector-lever Positions ....................................159
Repairing damage ........................................... 214 Shifting gears on the steering wheel ..................161
O Panic button ................................................................. 15 Sport mode .....................................................161
ParkAssist Performance tests on roller-type test stands..........201, 221
Octane rating ..............................................................210 Functional description ...................................... 187
Octane rating, petrol....................................................208 Performance, Technical data ........................................262
Sensors .......................................................... 187 Petrol
Odometer Switching off ................................................... 189
Display ..............................................................80 Fuel gauge ........................................................81
Parking Fuel reserve warning ....................................81, 85
Resetting...........................................................80 Applying the parking brake ............................... 137
Off delay Octane rating...................................................208
Locking the vehicle ............................................ 20 Portable fuel container .....................................210
Switching on......................................................69 PDK transmission ............................................ 158
Oil ..............................................................................202 Portable fuel containers........................................3
Parking aid Quality.............................................................208
Change quantity ...............................................267 Sensors for ParkAssist..................................... 187
Checking level ...........................................88, 202 Refueling .........................................................208
Swivelling down mirror glass .............................. 44 Tank capacity...................................................267
Consumption .......................................................5 Parking brake
General information ..................................202, 203 Plastic components, care instructions ...........................215
Automatic parking brake release upon Porsche Active Safe ....................................................151
Level gauge.......................................................88 driving off ....................................................... 137
Oil pressure .....................................................116 Porsche Active Suspension Management (PASM)
Operating........................................................ 137 Functional description.......................................171
Oil-level warning on the multi-function display......202 Releasing........................................................ 137
Pressure gauge, oil pressure ............................106 Overview .........................................................165
Testing on brake test stand ...................... 201, 221 Warning message on the multi-function display ...171
Temperature gauge ..........................................106 Parking/pulling out
Topping up ......................................................203 Porsche Ceramic Composite Brake (PCCB)
Functional description, ParkAssist..................... 187 General information ..............................................3
On-board computer Sensors for ParkAssist..................................... 187
Measuring oil level..............................................88 Porsche Communication Management (PCM) .................155
Particle filter, maintenance instructions......................... 224 Porsche Doppelkupplung
Menu overview...................................................86 PASM (Porsche Active Suspension Management)
Multi-function display ..........................................83 Coasting mode ................................................160
Functional description ...................................... 171 Porsche Doppelkupplung (PDK).....................................157
Operating principle.............................................83 Overview......................................................... 165
Storing and retrieving personal settings .............129 Faults..............................................................159
Selecting chassis setup ................................... 171 Kickdown ........................................................161
Tire Pressure Monitoring System .........................93 Warning message on the multi-function display... 171
Opening and closing Launch Control ................................................161
PASS AIR BAG OFF Selector-lever position ......................................158
Brief overview....................................................17 Warning light in the center console...................... 39
Locking vehicle door with car key Shifting gears on the steering wheel ..................161
Passenger airbag Sport mode .....................................................161
(remote control) .................................................20 Automatic deactivation of the passenger airbag ... 38
Locking vehicle door with Porsche Entry & Drive ..20 Porsche Dynamic Light System (PDLS)............................69
Warning light in the center console...................... 39 Porsche Dynamic Light System Plus (PDLS Plus) .............70
Opening and locking vehicle door from inside .......21 Passenger mirror
Unlocking vehicle door with car key Porsche Entry & Drive
Adjusting........................................................... 43 Inclination sensor .............................................197
(remote control) .................................................19 Adjusting as parking aid ..................................... 44
Unlocking vehicle door with Porsche Entry & Drive 19 Interior surveillance ..........................................197
Folding in .......................................................... 43 Locking the vehicle ............................................20
Opening and locking Passenger’s door emergency locking, Emergency operation
Storing/retrieving personal settings...................129 Unlocking the vehicle..........................................19
Driver’s door, Passenger’s door .......................... 27
The vehicle cannot be unlocked...........................24
274 Index
Porsche Stability Management (PSM) Rear-axle load ............................................................. 184 Selector lever position display ........................................80
Functional description.......................................166 Refueling .................................................................... 209 Selector-lever position display, PDK transmission ...........158
Multi-function light in the tachometer..................168 Relays Setting air quantity
Overview .........................................................165 Replacing........................................................ 241 Air-conditioning system .................................52, 57
Switching off....................................................167 Remote control ............................................................. 15 Setting automatic air-recirculation mode
Switching on ....................................................168 Changing battery in car key .............................. 249 Air-conditioning system .......................................56
Porsche Torque Vectoring (PTV) Locking vehicle door .......................................... 20 Setting fan
Functional description.......................................172 Unlocking vehicle door ....................................... 19 Air-conditioning system .................................52, 57
Overview .........................................................165 Replacement keys......................................................... 15 Setting temperature
Portable fuel container .................................................210 Restraint system for children Air-conditioning system .................................52, 56
Power Steering ...........................................................224 Prescribed installation direction .......................... 40 Setting the date...........................................................111
Power windows Restraint systems for children Setting the time...........................................................111
Adjusting after connecting battery .......................61 Prescribed installation direction Settings
Malfunctions ......................................................61 (depending on weight of child) ............................ 40 Adjusting on multi-function display......................104
Opening/closing windows with switch ..................60 Retractable Rear Wing Retrieving when opening the vehicle...................130
Overview of driver’s door control panel ................60 Operating principle........................................... 175 Storing on the key ............................................129
Overview of passenger’s door control panel .........60 Reversing camera ....................................................... 189 Storing personal settings ..................................129
Storing end position ...........................................61 Running in Storing vehicle settings ......................................32
Pressure Tires................................................................... 5 Why have the settings changed? ........................130
Tires (bar/psi) ..................................................264 Shifting gears
Protection against towing (inclination sensor) S Gear shift assist ...............................................102
Switching off with Porsche Entry & Drive ............197 Manual transmission .........................................156
Switching off with vehicle key (remote control)....196 Safety compliance sticker............................................ 261 Porsche Doppelkupplung (PDK) .........................157
PSM (Porsche Stability Management) Safety-belts .................................................................. 34 Shift prompt ......................................................80
Functional description.......................................166 Care instructions ............................................. 217 Side lights
Multi-function light in the tachometer..................168 Fastening .......................................................... 35 Switching on ......................................................68
Overview .........................................................165 Opening belt buckle ........................................... 35 Slicks .............................................................................1
Switching off....................................................167 Safety-belt pretensioners, functional description... 34 Snow chains
Switching on ....................................................168 Warning light on the tachometer ......................... 34 General information ..........................................231
Warning light on the multi-function display ..........246 Sealant/sealing set for defective tires........................... 238 Snow tires...................................................................230
PTV (Porsche Torque Vectoring) Seals, care instructions ............................................... 216 Socket (12 V) ..............................................................180
Overview .........................................................165 Seat Spacers
Pulling out/parking Adjusting........................................................... 30 General information ..........................................239
Functional description, ParkAssist .....................187 Seat belts..................................................................... 34 Removing ........................................................240
Sensors for ParkAssist .....................................187 Seat heating Speed code letter on tire..............................................232
Switching off ..................................................... 33 Speed control (cruise control)
Switching on ..................................................... 33 Accelerating ....................................................141
R Seat memory........................................................ 32, 129 Decelerating ....................................................141
Race circuit.....................................................................2 Seat ventilation ............................................................. 33 Functional description.......................................141
Racing Tires ................................................................1, 2 Switching off ..................................................... 33 Interrupting operation .......................................142
Radio Switching on ..................................................... 33 Storing speed ..................................................141
Tips ................................................................153 Seat-belt pretensioner Switching off....................................................142
Radio remote control .....................................................15 Functional description ........................................ 34 Switching on ....................................................141
Rain sensor Seats Speed limit..................................................................232
Adjusting ...........................................................76 Adjusting seat position ....................................... 30 Speedometer ................................................................80
Switching on ......................................................75 Adjusting the seat .............................................. 30 Sport Chrono ..............................................................100
Range on remaining fuel...............................................107 Child restraint system ........................................ 40 Sport mode.....................................................................2
Rear fog light Head restraints.................................................. 30 Porsche Doppelkupplung ..................................161
Adjusting the driving light ....................................69 Seat adjustment ................................................ 30 Switching on/off...............................................172
Switching on ......................................................68 Storing/retrieving seat position......................... 129 Sports exhaust system ................................................174
Rear Luggage Compartment ........................................184 Security wheel bolts
Rear wing, operating principle ......................................175 Storage .......................................................... 182
Index 275
Stainless steel tailpipes T Sealant............................................................238

Care instructions..............................................216 Setting type and size..........................................97
Standstill management Tachometer Sidewall ..........................................................232
Functional description.......................................168 Display ............................................................. 80 Snow chains (general information) .....................231
Start/Stop function......................................................135 Tailpipes Snow tires (general information) ........................230
Starting Stainless steel, care instructions....................... 216 Storage...........................................................230
Engine.............................................................134 Tank Tire pressure plate ...........................................261
Steam-jet cleaners, instructions for use.........................212 Ventilation system............................................ 211 Tire pressure, data (bar/psi) .............................264
Steering .....................................................................224 Technical data Valves .............................................................229
Countersteering assistance...............................167 Driving performance ........................................ 268 Tool kit .......................................................................182
Steering torque pulse ..................................................167 Engine ............................................................ 262 Tools ..........................................................................182
Steering wheel Tire pressure (bar/psi) ..................................... 264 Torque, Technical data .................................................262
Adjustment ........................................................46 Tires, wheels................................................... 263 Towing
Multi-function steering wheel with telephone Weights .......................................................... 266 Screwing in towing lug......................................257
function.............................................................47 Technical modifications to the vehicle, information......... 200 Towing lug
Multi-function steering wheel, functional Telephone................................................................... 154 In the tool kit ...................................................182
description ........................................................47 Using via multi-function display............................ 90 TPMS (Tire Pressure Monitoring System) .........................93
Switching Easy Entry function on/off....................32 Test stands Transmission
Switching heating on/off.....................................45 Brake test............................................... 201, 221 Manual transmission.........................................156
Stopping Performance test .................................... 201, 221 Porsche Doppelkupplung (PDK) .........................157
Engine.............................................................134 Theft protection .................................................... 14, 197 Transmission and chassis control systems
Stopping engine automatically (Auto Start Stop Tire Overview (PSM, PASM, PTV) ..............................165
function) ..........................................................135 Care ............................................................... 228 Transport (on car trains, ferries, etc.)
Stopwatch ..................................................................100 Life................................................................. 228 Securing the vehicle .........................................259
Storage Traction .......................................................... 227 Switching off inclination sensor .........................196
Glove box ........................................................177 Wear .............................................................. 228 Trip counter
Opening storage compartment in armrest ..........178 Tire filling compressor................................................. 182 Display ..............................................................80
Storage options ...............................................177 Tire pressure Resetting...........................................................80
Storage compartment Air pressure (bar/psi) ....................................... 264 Trip information .............................................................92
Glove box ........................................................177 Comfort pressure .............................................. 96 Trunk entrapment ..........................................................28
In armrest, opening ..........................................178 Comfort pressure speed warning ........................ 96 Turn signal, stalk ...........................................................71
Storage...........................................................177 Current settings................................................. 95
Storing Data (bar/psi).................................................. 264
Personal settings .............................................129 Fill info.............................................................. 95 U
Storing the end position for the power windows ...............61 Speed warning .................................................. 99 Ultrasound sensor, ParkAssist ......................................187
Summer tires System learning ................................................ 97 Underbody protection, care instructions ........................215
Changing tires .................................................236 Tire pressure plate........................................... 261 Universal audio interface, installation position ................155
Storage...........................................................230 Warnings........................................................... 98 Unlocking
Sun visor ......................................................................48 Tire Pressure Monitoring System Opening vehicle door from inside.........................21
Switching automatic anti-dazzle function on and off ..........44 Warning light ..................................................... 94 Retrieving personal settings from the key...........129
Switching emergency flasher on/off ................................72 Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)......................... 93 The vehicle cannot be unlocked...........................24
Switching on air-recirculation mode Tire pressure plate ...................................................... 261 Unlocking and opening tailgate............................23
Air-conditioning system.................................52, 56 Tire sealing compound/sealing set for defective tires .... 238 Unlocking vehicle door from inside ......................21
Switching on parking light ..............................................72 Tires Unlocking vehicle door with car key
Breaking in new tires............................................ 5 (remote control) .................................................19
Changing ........................................................ 236 Unlocking vehicle door with Porsche Entry & Drive
Checking pressure........................................... 236 (keyless)............................................................19
Damage.......................................................... 228 Upshift prompt ..............................................................80
Fixing a flat tire................................................ 238 USB interface, installation position ................................155
General information ......................................... 224
Inscription on radial tire.................................... 232
Replacing........................................................ 229
276 Index
V W Windshield wiper/washer stalk

Adjusting the rain sensor sensitivity .....................74
Vanity mirror .................................................................48 Warning messages Windshield wiper/washer system.........................75
Vehicle Overview......................................................... 116 Windshield, fast wiping .......................................75
Keys .................................................................15 Tire pressure..................................................... 99 Windshield, slow wiping ......................................75
Vehicle data ................................................................261 Washer fluid Wiping windshield once (one-touch operation) .......75
Vehicle door Antifreeze ....................................................... 204 Windshield wipers
Locking from inside ............................................21 Filling capacity................................................. 267 Care instructions ..............................................214
Locking with car key (remote control) ..................20 Topping up ...................................................... 204 Stalk .................................................................75
Locking with Porsche Entry & Drive (keyless)........20 Washing the vehicle, instructions .................................. 212 Winter driving ..............................................................246
Malfunctions when opening and closing................24 Weights Winter tires
Unlocking with car key (remote control)................19 Definitions ....................................................... 184 Changing tires..................................................236
Unlocking with Porsche Entry & Drive (keyless) .....19 Weights, Technical data ............................................... 266 General information ..........................................230
Vehicle information Welcome Home function Storage ...........................................................230
Retrieving on multi-function display ......................87 Switching on ..................................................... 69 Wiper blades
Vehicle key (remote control) Wheel Care instructions ..............................................214
Emergency operation of key/control unit in Attachment faces ............................................ 237 Replacing ........................................................205
ignition lock .......................................................26 Checking pressure ........................................... 236 Wrench socket for security wheel bolt
Vehicle settings Security wheel bolts......................................... 182 Using ..............................................................237
Adapting multi-function display...........................104 Wheel alignment.......................................................... 230
Adjusting on multi-function display .....................104 Wheel attachment faces .............................................. 237
Adjusting volume of warning and Wheel change ............................................................. 231
information tones .............................................114 Wheels
Air-conditioning settings....................................110 Adjusting......................................................... 230
Changing button assignment on multi-function Changing ........................................................ 234
steering wheel .................................................114 Fixing a flat tire................................................ 238
Changing the language .....................................114 General information.......................................... 224
Light and visibility settings ................................108 Inscription on alloy wheels ................................ 233
Locking settings...............................................109 Inscription on radial tire .................................... 232
Porsche Active Safe settings.............................115 Overview......................................................... 263
Resetting to factory settings .............................104 Replacing tires (general information).................. 229
Selecting settings menu....................................104 Rim offset ....................................................... 263
Setting date and time .......................................111 Security wheel bolt (wrench socket) .................. 237
Setting units ....................................................113 Size................................................................ 263
Storing on person buttons ..........................32, 129 Snow chains (general information)..................... 231
Storing on the key......................................32, 129 Snow tires (general information)........................ 230
Vents Storage .......................................................... 230
Adjusting ...........................................................58 Tire pressure plate........................................... 261
Opening/closing.................................................58 Tire pressure, data (bar/psi) ............................. 264
Voice control ...............................................................156 Tire sealant ..................................................... 238
Wheel attachment faces ................................... 237
Wheel balancing .............................................. 230
Wheel bolts (care instructions) .......................... 237
Windows
Adjusting after connecting battery....................... 61
Care instructions ............................................. 214
Opening/closing with switch ............................... 60
Storing end position........................................... 61
Windshield washer system
Adding washer fluid.......................................... 204
Antifreeze ....................................................... 204
Filling capacity................................................. 267
Index 277

Boxster, Boxster S, Boxster GTS: Umschlag - U1+U4 - Aussen - FM Seite 1 Freitag, 28. März 2014 8:34 08

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Boxster, Boxster S, Boxster GTS: Umschlag - U1+U4 - Aussen - FM Seite 1 Freitag, 28. März 2014 8:34 08

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Umschlag_U1+U4_aussen.fm Seite 1 Freitag, 28.

März 2014 8:34 08

Boxster, Boxster S, Boxster GTS

Setting and operating vehicle h WARNING California Ground Clearance

procedures only with the vehicle stationary.

Personal Settings ............................ 127 Ashtray ......................................................179 Minor Repairs.................................. 219

Steering Wheel and

Opening and Locking

Opening and Locking 13

Never invite car theft! h WARNING

14 Opening and Locking

Notes on the Key and Central Emergency operation

Opening and Locking 15

Central Locking System Your vehicle is equipped with a central locking

16 Opening and Locking

Brief Overview – Opening and

Key Porsche Entry & Drive

What do I want to do? What do I have to do? What happens?

Unlocking Using the key:

With Porsche Entry & Drive:

Locking Using the key:

Lock if persons/animals Please see the chapter “SWITCHING OFF INTERIOR

Switching off alarm Using the key:

Opening and Locking 17

A - Unlocking the vehicle With Porsche Entry & Drive

18 Opening and Locking

Opening and Locking 19

Locking doors 3. Inform any persons remaining in the vehicle

20 Opening and Locking

In the multi-function display of the instrument Unlocking doors

Opening and Locking 21

Opening and Closing Luggage

Opening front luggage compartment lid

22 Opening and Locking

Opening the rear luggage compartment

Opening and Locking 23

Malfunctions when Opening and

24 Opening and Locking

Opening and Locking 25

26 Opening and Locking

3. Lift the door handle on the driver’s door

Opening and Locking 27

h DANGER Unsecured luggage

28 Opening and Locking

Seats, Mirrors and Steering Wheel

Seats, Mirrors and Steering Wheel 29

30 Seats, Mirrors and Steering Wheel

Seats, Mirrors and Steering Wheel 31

Storing seat settings Comfort Entry Function

32 Seats, Mirrors and Steering Wheel

The driver's seat moves to the stored position:

Seat Heating Seat Ventilation

Seats, Mirrors and Steering Wheel 33

34 Seats, Mirrors and Steering Wheel

5. Make sure that belts are not trapped or twisted

Fasten safety-belt Opening belt buckle and removing belt

Seats, Mirrors and Steering Wheel 35

36 Seats, Mirrors and Steering Wheel

Seats, Mirrors and Steering Wheel 37

38 Seats, Mirrors and Steering Wheel

Seats, Mirrors and Steering Wheel 39

40 Seats, Mirrors and Steering Wheel

Seats, Mirrors and Steering Wheel 41